Home

Planet Technology WGSD-1022 User's Manual

1. cccccseeccecseeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeseueeesaaeeeeseeeesaeeeesaaeees 252 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Di 10 0 CN ANNE OD O at acre seen ehh aera a eee 252 5 15 4 show interfaces port channel a echt ee hi eae eee ee A A 253 5 10 POM VIOMILOR COMMAIS rd a a a ut Cund da letal cos dentado bds 254 De Oli PO MORNO atch cetaed i a sa a dee tA eer otha Mat aerate eects a eset Becca ceed ant eee vane AN 254 910 2 SOW DOMES MONIO saa o te eh o o ee eS 255 SI QOS o O 256 A EEE E ANAA AE AT E E AE A E E ET A 256 PI ee ere 257 e173 WIE GQUG IS COS Sel ees a o a a a a ae Sc 258 TA WIN QUEUC DANG WIC 4 xcs ees ee Saas nace ce ees eee Se etc 259 5 17 5 priority queue out NUM Of QUEUES ccccccccceeccceeeecececeeeecseeeeceeeecsaeeseaeeeseeeeseucessaeessueeeseueeseusessaeesseeeesneessaees 260 9 176 SNOW GOS Mena CE sansi eaa a iei ias 260 oven I fey ae oho Man ASCP QUEUE a e a a Ad a O ee 263 9 1130 00S USE GIODAll nets css access cts teres rari dde eter 264 8 17 9 GOS MUST MENACE siste olpc 265 E A e a Pr a en oe RE ee ee 265 IA GOS COS OVNI a o Ne e e o do a O 266 A lo Map AAA A S 267 DO Radis COMMANA it eto 268 DA On iradis o aay ors atari AP adeannsd a 268 516 2 radis SIV KV a is 270 109 TaGluS SCIVEl TOWN MI o pa 270 210 EaQlUs Server SOUE ID nro e a a a ea eai 271 9109 TadlUs Senv er IME oU ita di A is 271 9 16 6 FAdIUSs CIEMAT 272 5 10 SNOW UN I Un 273 S
2. L PLANET Networking amp Communication WGSD 1022 8 Port 10 100Mbps 2 Port Gigabit TP SFP Combo Managed Ethernet Switch y WGSD 8000 8 Port 10 100 1 lodos E e tad with 2 Shared SFP AA Managed Ethernet Switch II User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Trademarks Copyright PLANET Technology Corp 2007 Contents subject to which revision without prior notice PLANET is a registered trademark of PLANET Technology Corp All other trademarks belong to their respective owners Disclaimer PLANET Technology does not warrant that the hardware will work properly in all environments and applications and makes no warranty and representation either implied or expressed with respect to the quality performance merchantability or fitness for a particular purpose PLANET has made every effort to ensure that this User s Manual is accurate PLANET disclaims liability for any inaccuracies or omissions that may have occurred Information in this User s Manual is subject to change without notice and does not represent a commitment on the part of PLANET PLANET assumes no responsibility for any inaccuracies that may be contained in this User s Manual PLANET makes no commitment to update or keep current the information in this User s Manual and reserves the right to make improvements to this User s Manual and or to the products described in this User s Manual at any time without notice If you find information in th
3. 5 8 7 clear gvrp statistics The clear gvrp statistics privileged EXEC command clears all the GVRP statistics information Syntax clear gvrp statistics ethernet interface port channel port channel number e interface A valid Ethernet interface e port channel number A valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode 221 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example clears all the GVRP statistics information on port e8 Console clear gvrp statistics ethernet e8 5 8 8 show gvrp configuration The show gvrp configuration User EXEC command displays GVRP configuration information including timer values whether GVRP and dynamic VLAN creation is enabled and which ports are running GVRP Syntax show gvrp configuration ethernet nterface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet interface port channel number A valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to display GVRP configuration information Console show gvrp configuration GVRP Feature is currently enabled on the switch Maximum VLANs
4. User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 startup direction The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set to valid If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is greater than or equal to the rthreshold and direction is equal to rising or rising falling then a single rising alarm is generated If the first sample after this entry becomes valid is less than or equal to the fthreshold and direction is equal to falling or rising falling then a single falling alarm is generated owner name Enter a name that specifies who configured this alarm If unspecified the name is an empty string Default Configuration The following parameters have the following default values type type If unspecified the type is absolute startup direction lf unspecified the startup direction is rising falling Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the following alarm conditions Alarm index 1000 Variable identifier abc Sample interval 360000 seconds Rising threshold 1000000 Falling threshold 1000000 Rising threshold event index 10 Falling threshold event index 20 Console config rmon alarm 1000 abc 360000 1000000 1000000 10 20 5 19 6 show rmon alarm table The show rmon alarm table user EXEC command displays the alarms summary table Syntax show
5. Figure 2 8 Pull Out the SFP transceiver Never pull out the module without pull the handle or the push bolts on the module Direct pull out the 23 Note module with violent could damage the module and SFP module slot of the device 23 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 3 CONFIGURATION This chapter explains the methods that you can use to configure management access to the switch It describes the types of management applications and the communication and management protocols that deliver data between your management device work station or personal computer and the system It also contains information about port connection options This chapter covers the following topics Management Access Overview Key Concepts Key Guidelines for Implementation Administration Console Access Web Management Access SNMP Access Standards Protocols and Related Reading 3 1 Management Access Overview The switch gives you the flexibility to access and manage the switch using any or all of the following methods An administration console Web browser interface An external SNMP based network management application The administration console and Web browser interface support are embedded in the switch software and are available for immediate use Each of these management methods has their own advantages Table 3 1 compares the three management methods Method Advantages Disadvantages Console No IP addres
6. Undersize The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and were otherwise well formed Oversize The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets but were otherwise well formed etherHistoryFragments to increment because it counts both runts which are normal occurrences due to collisions and noise hits 2 9 Fragments Jabbers Dropped Collisions User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The total number of packets received during this sampling interval that were less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets AlignmentError It is normal for The number of packets received during this sampling interval that were longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error The total number of events in which packets were dropped by the probe due to lack of resources during this sampling interval This number is not necessarily the number of packets dropped it is just the number of ti
7. Counted frames for which transmission fails due to excessive collisions Counted frames for which transmission fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error Counted frames received that exceed the maximum permitted frame size Counted frames for which reception fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error Counted MAC Control frames received with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation Counted MAC Control frames transmitted on this interface with an opcode indicating the PAUSE operation 5 7 18 show ports jumbo frame The show ports jumbo frame user EXEC command displays the jumbo frames configuration Syntax show ports jumbo frame Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the jumbo frames configuration Console show ports jumbo frame Jumbo frames are disabled 215 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Jumbo frames will be enabled after reset 5 7 20 port storm control broadcast enable The port storm control broadcast enable interface configuration command enables broadcast storm control To disable broadcast storm control use the no form of this command Syntax port storm control broadcast enable no port storm control broadcast enable Default Configuration Broadcast storm control is disabled Comman
8. MAC multicast address ip multicast address P multicast address interface list Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports port channel number list Separate nonconsecutive port channels with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports Default Configuration No multicast addresses are defined Command Mode Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines If the command is executed without add or remove the command only registers the group in the bridge database Static multicast addresses can only be defined on static VLANs Examples The following example registers the MAC address console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast address 0100 5e02 0203 The following example registers the MAC address and adds ports statically console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast address 0100 5e02 0203 add Ethernet g1 9 5 4 4 bridge multicast forbidden address The bridge multicast forbidden address interface configuration command forbids adding a specific multicast address to specific ports Syntax bridge multicast forbidden address mac multicast address ip multicast address add remove Ethernet interface list port channel port channel number list 171 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 no bridge multicast
9. To enter commands that require parameters enter the required parameters after the command keyword For example to set a password for the administrator enter console config username admin password smith When working with the CLI the command options are not displayed The command is not selected by a menu but is manually entered To see what commands are available in each mode or within an interface configuration the CLI does provide a method of displaying the available commands the command syntax requirements and in some instances parameters required to complete the command The standard command to request help is the There are three instances where the help information can be displayed Keyword lookup tThe character is entered in place of a command A list of all valid commands and corresponding help messages are displayed Partial keyword lookup A command is incomplete and the character is entered in place of a parameter The matched parameters for this command are displayed 157 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 To assist in using the CLI there is an assortment of editing features The following features are described Terminal Command Buffer Command Completion Keyboard Shortcuts Every time a command is entered in the CLI it is recorded on an internally managed Command History buffer Commands are stored in the buffer which is maintained on a First In First Out FIFO basis Th
10. Tthe neighbor port the port to which the selected interface is connected advertises its capabilities to the port to start the negotiation process This field displays the neighbor s current settings The Back Pressure feature of the selected port can be enabled or disabled Displays whether Back Pressure is enabled or disabled on the currently selected port 39 e Flow Control e Current Flow Control e MDI MDIX e Current MDI MDIX e PVE User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The Flow Control feature of the selected port can be enabled or disabled Displays whether Flow Control is enabled or disabled on the currently selected port e Auto the port to automatically detect the cable type e MDI if the port is connected to an end station e MDIX if the port is connected to a hub or another switch This is the current MDI MDIX status of the port For Gigabit Ethernet switches ONLY When a port is a Private VLAN Edge PVE port it bypasses the Forwarding Database and forwards all unicast multicast and broadcast traffic to an uplink Uplinks can be ports or LAGs Click the Save Settings button to save your changes 4 3 2 Link Aggregation When you enter the Link Aggregation you can see these parts see figure 4 8 such as LAG shows whether the port is part of a LAG 3 PLANET pay Port Config VLAN Config Statistic LAG ory i nt at A i win Link Aggregation Admin Link Description St
11. User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport forbidden vlan add 234 256 5 27 16 map protocol protocols group The map protocol protocols group VLAN database command adds a special protocol to a named group of protocols which may be used for protocol based VLAN assignment To delete a protocol from a group use the no form of this command Syntax map protocol protocol encapsulation protocols group group no map protocol protocol encapsulation protocol The protocol is a protocol number or one of the reserved names The format is Hex format encapsulation One of the following values ethernet rfc1042 llcOther If no option is indicated the default is ethernet group Group number of group of protocols associated together Range 1 2147483647 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode VLAN Database mode User Guidelines The following protocol names are reserved ip arp ipx Example The following example maps protocol ip arp to the group named 213 Console config vlan database Console config vian map protocol ip arp protocols group 213 354 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 27 17 switchport general map protocols group vian The switchport general map protocols group vlan interface configuration command sets a protocol based classification rule To delete a c
12. User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Unauthorized packets arriving at a locked port are either Forwarded Discarded with no trap Discarded with a trap Cause the port to be shut down Port Security gt Interface el Mi Lock Interface C Learning Mode Classic Lock v Max Entries Action on iolation Enable Trap Trap Frequency Update Interface Lock Interface Learning Mode Max Entries Action on Yiolation Enable Trap Trap Frequency e2 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 e3 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 e4 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 e5 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 e6 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 e Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 es Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 gl Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 g2 Unlocked Classic Lock 1 Discard False 10 Y Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 32 Port Security screen Locked port security also enables storing a list of MAC addresses in the configuration file The MAC address list can be restored after the device has been reset Disabled ports are activated from the Port Security page e Interface e Lock Interface e Learning Mode e Max Entries Where displays the port or LAG name Which selecting this option locks the specified interface Where defines the locked port type The Learning Mode field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Interface Status field The poss
13. When Up is selected the port can be accessed normally The current status of the port is displayed here If you want to reactivate a port that has been suspended click the checkbox This indicates whether or not the port is active Change the speed of the port here The current speed of the port is displayed here Change the duplex mode here Tthis is the duplex mode of the port You can enable or disable the port s Auto Negotiation feature If using an SFP module Auto Negotiation for the specific port should be set to disable This is the current setting of the port s Auto Negotiation feature Specifies the capabilities to be advertised by the port Multiple options may be selected or Max Capability can be selected to cover all of the options The available options are Max Capability which indicates that the port speeds and duplex mode settings can be accepted 10 Half indicates that the port is advertising a 10Mbps half duplex mode setting 10 Full indicates that the port is advertising a 10Mbps full duplex mode setting 100 Half indicates that the port is advertising a 100Mbps half duplex mode setting 100 Full indicates that the port is advertising a 100Mbps full duplex mode setting 1000 Full indicates that the port is advertising a 1000Mbps full duplex mode setting The port advertises its capabilities to its neighbor port to begin the negotiation process This field displays the current advertisement settings
14. monitoring and traffic analysis O Built in Trivial File Transfer Protocol TFTP client O Virtual Cable Test VCT technology provides the mechanism to detect and report potential cabling issues such as cable opens cable shorts etc on Copper Links O EMI standards comply with FCC CE class A WEEE RoHS Product Specification 8 Port 10 100Mbps 2 Gigabit TP SFP 8 Port 10 100 1000Mbps with 2 shared Description combo Managed Ethernet Switch SFP Managed Ethernet Switch Hardware Specification 10 100Base TX Ports 8 RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports 10 100 1000Base T Ports 2 RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports 8 RJ 45 Auto MDI MDI X ports SFP mini GBIC Slots pen Shared with Port 9 and Port 10 Shared with Port 7 and Port 8 16Gbps Non Blocking Switch Throughput 11 9Mpps Wire Speed Layer 2 function Management Interface Console Telnet SSH Web Browser SSL SNMPv1 v2c and v3 Port disable enable Auto negotiation 10 100Mbps full and half duplex mode selection Port configuration Flow Control disable enable Bandwidth control on each port 16 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Display each port s speed duplex mode link status Flow control status Auto negotiation status trunk status VLAN 802 1q Tagged Based VLAN up to 255 VLAN groups Supports 4 groups of 4 Port trunk support IEEE 802 3ad LACP Link Aggregation Traffic classification based on Port Number 802 1p priority and DS
15. on the network The Time to Live TTL field of query messages is set to 1 so that the queries will not be forwarded to other sub networks IGMP version 2 introduces some enhancements such as a method to elect a multicast queried for each LAN an explicit leave message and query messages that are specific to a given group The states a computer will go through to join or to leave a multicast group are shown below Non Member Leave Group Stop Timer Join Group Send Report Start Timer Leave Group g gt a N i Query Received s_ Start Timer Delaying Member Idle Member Report Received Stop Timer Timer Expried te Send report IGMP State Transitions IGMP Snooping Configuration The default status of the IGMP Snooping function is disabled To turn on the IGMP Snooping select Enable of the IGMP Snooping Status field and click on the OK button to save 4 3 3 1 IGMP Configuration The switch support IP multicast you can enable IGMP protocol on web management s switch setting advanced page then display the IGMP snooping information in this page you can view difference multicast group VID and member port in here IP multicast addresses range from 224 0 0 0 through 239 255 255 255 The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is an internal protocol of the Internet Protocol IP suite IP manages multicast traffic by using switches routers and hosts that su
16. 1 SNMPv1 traps is used 2 SNMPv2 traps is used Default Default Configuration The default is SNMPv2 UDP Port 162 timeout 15 seconds retries 3 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines If a trap and inform are defined on the same target and an inform was sent the trap is not sent An inform request is held in memory until a response is received or the request times out An inform can be resent or retried several times but traps are sent only once Network traffic is increased with retries Therefore traps and informs require a trade off between reliability and resources Inform requests should be used if it is important that the SNMP manager receives every notification If traffic on the network or memory in the switch is a concern and notification is not required traps should be used To define an SNMP recipient on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Use only unicast IP addresses Example The following example enables SNMP traps for host 10 1 1 1 with community string management using SNMPv2 Console config snmp server host 10 1 1 1 management 2 5 20 7 snmp server set The snmp server set global configuration command sets SNMP MIB value by the CLI Syntax snmp server set variable name name value name2 value2 variable name MIB variable name name value List of name and value pairs In case of scalar MIBs th
17. Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command However switching to Basic qos mode sets the trust mode to cos Example The following example shows how QoS is enabled on the device in basic mode Console config qos 5 17 2 show qos The show qos user EXEC command displays the QoS status Syntax show qos Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays a device where basic mode is supported Console show qos Qos basic Basic trust dscp 25 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 17 3 wrr queue cos map The wrr queue cos map global configuration command maps assigned CoS values to select one of the egress queues To return to the default values use the no form of this command Syntax wrr queue cos map queue id cos7 cosn no wrr queue cos map queue ia queue id The queue number to which the following CoS values are mapped cos1 cosn Map to specific queues up to eight CoS values from 0 to 7 Default Configuration The map default values are as follows CoS value 1 select queue 1 CoS value 2 select queue 2 CoS value 0 select queue 3 CoS value 3 select queue 4 CoS value 4 select queue 5 CoS value 5 select queue 6 CoS value 6 select queue 7 CoS value 7 s
18. Network administrators configure port mirroring by selecting a specific port to copy all packets and different ports from which the packets are copied Source Port el bat Type Both v Target Port Source Port Type Target Port el Both e2 Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 72 Port Mirroring screen The page contains the following fields e Source Port Defines the port to which traffic is mirrored e Type Indicates the port mode configuration for port mirroring The possible field values are e RxOnly defines the port mirroring on receiving ports This is the default value e TxOnly defines the port mirroring on transmitting ports e Both which defines the port mirroring on both receiving and transmitting ports Target Port defines the port from which traffic is mirrored 4 12 6 Cable Test The Cable Test screen see figure 4 73 shows you results from performance tests on copper cables The maximum cable length that can be tested is 120 meters Cables are tested when the ports are in the down state except for the Approximate 143 Cable Length test User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Cable Test Port el e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e e8 gi g2 Test Result Cable Fault Distance Last Update Cable Length EE wi wi or rr pr T wi rr al fa jfalfalfal a MEENE Ww wv Wi Ww al Wi rr ot rr rr o D wa cr Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 73 Cable Tes
19. Note all other access implicitly denied 246 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 13 6 show management access class The show management access class privileged EXEC command displays the active management access list Syntax show management access class Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the management access list information Console show management access class Management access class is enabled using access list mlist 5 14 PHY Diagnostics Commands 5 14 1 test copper port tdr The test copper port tdr privileged EXEC command diagnoses with TDR Time Domain Reflectometry technology the quality and characteristics of a copper cable attached to a port Syntax test copper port tdr interface interface A valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The port can only be tested if cable is connected to both sides The port under test should be shut down during the test unless it is a combo port with an active fiber port 247 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The maximum disatance VCT can function is 120 meters Examples The following example results in a report on the cable attached to port e3
20. O OL DO Oo Clear Counters Refresh Now F Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 16 RMON Statistics screen The page contains the following fields e Interface Indicates the device for which statistics are displayed The possible field values are e Port defines the specific port for which RMON statistics are displayed e LAG defines the specific LAG for which RMON statistics are displayed e Refresh Rate Defines the amount of time that passes before the interface statistics are refreshed The possible field values are e No Refresh indicates that the RMON statistics are not refreshed e 15 Sec which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds e 30 Sec which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds e 60 Sec which indicates that the RMON statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds 51 e Drop Events e Received Bytes Octets e Received Packets e Broadcast Packets Received e Multicast Packets Received e CRC amp Align Errors e Undersize Packets e Oversize Packets e Fragments e Jabbers e Collisions e Frames of xx Bytes User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 which displays the number of dropped events that have occurred on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the number of octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed This number includes bad packets and FCS octets but excludes fra
21. Out of band Ethernet port number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the description for the interface g1 Console show interfaces description ethernet g1 Management_port R amp D_ port Finance_port Description 5 7 17 show interfaces counters The show interfaces counters user EXEC command displays traffic seen by the physical interface 212 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax show interfaces counters ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays traffic seen by the physical interface Console show interfaces counters Port InOctets InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts 183892 0 123899 Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts InOctets I InUcastPkts InMcastPkts InBcastPkts OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts 213 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The following example displays counters for port g1 Console show interfaces counters ethernet g1
22. Static Address Interface Port el Y Lac MAC Address LAN ID 1 B O YLAN NAME Status Permanent Add to List ey C Port Port LAG C MAC Address C LAN ID Address Table Sort Key Port v Query Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 69 Static Address screen The page contains the following fields e Interface Displays the interface to which the entry refers e Port to which the specific port number the forwarding database 138 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 parameters refer e LAG to which the specific LAG number the forwarding database parameters refer MAC Address which displays the MAC address to which the entry refers e VLAN ID Displays the VLAN ID number to which the entry refers e VLAN Name Which displays the VLAN name to which the entry refers e Status Displays how the entry was created The possible field values are e Permanent the MAC address is permanent e Delete on Reset the MAC address is deleted when the device is reset e Delete on Timeout the MAC address is deleted when a timeout occurs e Secure the MAC Address is defined for locked ports Query e Port Specifies the interface is queried There are two interface types from which to select e Port displays the specific port number e LAG the specific LAG number e MAC Address Specifies the MAC address for which the table is queried VLAN ID which specifies the VLAN ID for which
23. Syntax crypto key generate rsa Default Configuration RSA key pairs do not exist Command Mode Global Configuration mode 307 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines RSA keys are generated in pairs one public RSA key and one private RSA key If the device already has RSA keys a warning and prompt to replace the existing keys with new keys is displayed The maximum supported size for the RSA key is 2048 bits This command is not saved in the startup configuration however the keys generated by this command are saved in the running configuration which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device This command may take a considerable period of time to execute Example The following example generates RSA key pairs Console config crypto key generate rsa 5 22 5 ip ssh pubkey auth The ip ssh pubkey auth global configuration command enables public key authentication for incoming SSH sessions To disable this function use the no form of this command Syntax ip ssh pubkey auth no ip ssh pubkey auth Default Configuration The function is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines AAA authentication is independent Example The following example enables public key authentication for incoming SSH sessions Console config ip ssh pubkey auth 5 22 6 crypto key pubkey chain ssh The crypto key pubkey chain ssh global configuration comm
24. User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax set interface active ethernet interface port channel port channel numben interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example activates interface e5 which is disabled console set interface active ethernet e5 5 7 14 show interfaces configuration The show interfaces configuration Privilege EXEC mode command displays the configuration for all configured interfaces Syntax show interfaces configuration ethernet interface port channel port channel number Interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index o0ob interface Out of band Ethernet port number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the configuration for all configured interfaces console show interfaces configuration 209 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Admin State Back Mdix Pressure Mode Flow control 100M Copper 100M Copper 100M Copper 100M Copper 100M Copper 100M Copper 100M Copper 100M Copper 1G Combo C
25. 1G Combo C Full Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Disabled Auto Admin State Flow Speed Neg control Type Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled Enabled The displayed port configuration information includes the following Port The port number Port Type The port designated IEEE shorthand identifier For example 1000Base T refers to 1000 Mbps baseband signaling inluding both Tx and Rx transmissions Duplex Displays the port Duplex status Speed Refers to the port speed Neg Describes the Auto negotiation status Flow Control Displays the Flow Control status Back Pressure Displays the Back Pressure status MDIX Mode Displays the Auto crossover status Admin State Displays whether the port is enabled or disabled 5 7 15 show interfaces status The show interfaces status user EXEC command displays the status for all configured interfaces Syntax show interfaces status ethernet interface port channel port channel number out of band eth oob interface Interface A valid Ethernet port 210 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 port channel number A valid port channel trunk index oob interface Out of band Ethernet port number Defaul
26. Backup the Running Configuration or Startup Configuration to the Backup Configuration Use the copy running config file command to backup the running configuration to a backup configuration file Use the copy startup config file command to backup the startup configuration a backup configuration file Specifying out of band addresses If you want to copy from to a server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ipaddress Example The following example copies a system image named file1 from the TFTP server with an IP address of 172 16 101 101 to non active image file Console copy tftp 172 16 101 101 file1 image Accessing file file1 on 172 16 101 101 Loading file1 from 172 16 101 101 Copy took 0 01 11 hh mm ss Accessing file configfile on oob 172 16 1 1 Loading file1 from oob 172 16 1 1 198 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Copy took 0 0 23 hh mm ss 5 6 4 show startup config The show startup config privileged EXEC command displays the startup configuration file contents Syntax show startup config Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays the contents of the startup config file Console show startup config software version 1 1 hostname device interface ethernet 1
27. Console config line telnet Console config line history 5 26 10 history size The history size line configuration command changes the command history buffer size for a particular line To reset the command history buffer size to the default use the no form of this command Syntax history size number of commands no history size number of commands Number of commands that the system records in its history buffer Range 10 216 Default Configuration The default history buffer size is 10 Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example changes the command history buffer size to 100 entries for a particular line Console config line history size 100 5 26 12 show history The show history user EXEC command lists the commands entered in the current session 342 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax show history Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC command mode User Guidelines The commands are listed from the first to the latest command The buffer is kept unchanged when entering to configuration mode and returning back Example The following example displays all the commands entered while in the current privileged EXEC mode Console show history show version show clock show history 5 26 13 show privilege The sho
28. Console test copper port tdr e3 Cable is open at 100 meters The following example results in a failure to report on the cable attached to port e4 Console test copper port tdr e4 Can t perform the test on fiber ports 5 14 2 show copper ports tdr The show copper ports tdr privileged EXEC command display the last TDR Time Domain Reflectometry tests on specified ports Syntax show copper ports tdr interface interface A valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the last TDR Time Domain Reflectometry tests on all ports Console show copper ports tdr Port Result Length meters Short 13 32 00 23 July 2003 Test has not been preformed Short 13 32 00 23 July 2003 Fiber 248 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 14 3 show copper ports cable length The show copper ports cable length privileged EXEC command displays the estimated copper cable length attached to a port Syntax show copper ports cable length interface interface A valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This feature works only on 1 Gbps ports Example The following example displays the estimated copper
29. From an SNMP perspective the OOB port is treated as a separate device Therefore when defining an SNMP community the administrator must indicate which tables are being configured If type is oob this indicates that OOB tables are being configured If type is router it means that the device s tables are being configured 288 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration No community is defined Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets up the community access string public to permit administrative access to SNMP protocol at an administrative station with the IP address 192 168 1 20 Console config snmp server community public su 192 168 1 20 The following examples set up the community access string public to permit read write access to SNMP protocol using the out of band port for 192 175 1 10 Console config snmp server community public rw 192 175 1 10 type oob 5 20 2 snmp server contact The snmp server contact global configuration command sets up a system contact To remove the system contact information use the no form of the command Syntax snmp server contact text no snmp server contact text Character string up to 160 characters describing the system contact information Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Globa
30. Leave Timeout Immediate Leave Update lan IGMP Table lt lt Previous Next gt gt IGMP LAN ID Snooping Auto Host MRouter Leave Learn Timeout Timeout Timeout Status Cf 3 IS i ey 2 Disabled Enabled 260 300 10 Sec 3 Disabled Enabled 260 300 10 Sec v Figure 4 55 IGMP Snooping screen The page contains the following fields E IGMP Global e IGMP Snooping Indicates if IGMP Snooping is enabled or Disabled on the device Status VLAN IGMP Settings 120 e VLAN ID e IGMP Status e Auto Learn e Host Timeout e MRouter Timeout e Leave Timeout User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Specifies the VLAN ID Indicates if IGMP snooping is enabled on the VLAN Indicates if Auto Learn is enabled on the device If Auto Learn is enabled the device automatically learns where other Multicast groups are located Enables or disables Auto Learn on the Ethernet device Indicates the amount of time host waits to receive a message before timing out The default time is 260 seconds Indicates the amount of the time the Multicast router waits to receive a message before it times out The default value is 300 seconds Indicates the time the host waits after requesting to leave the IGMP group and not receiving a Join message from another station before timing out If a Leave Timeout occurs the switch notifies the Multicast device to stop sending traffic The Leave Timeout value is either user defined
31. Ports to VLAN LAN 1 v Eth el e2 e3 ed es eb e7 at ai Switch Port Mode Access Trunk Acceptable frame General Type Tagged UnTagged Membership Forbidden Exclude LAG Li 12 13 14 L5 L6 L7 L8 Switch Port Mode Access Trunk General Acceptable frame Type Tagged UnTagged Membership Forbidden Exclude Figure 4 12 Ports to VLAN screen The page contains the following fields e VLAN Where means the VLAN number e Access Indicates the port belongs to a single untagged VLAN When a port is in Access mode the packet types which are accepted on the port cannot be designated Ingress filtering cannot be enabled disabled on an access port e Trunk Which indicates the port belongs to VLANs in which all ports are tagged except for one port that can be untagged e General Which indicates the port belongs to VLANs and each VLAN is user defined as tagged or untagged full 802 1Q mode e Tagged Defines the interface as a tagged member of a VLAN All packets forwarded by the interface are tagged The packets contain VLAN information e Untagged Packets forwarded by the interface are untagged e Forbidden e Exclude 4 4 4 VLAN to Ports Forbidden ports are not included in the VLAN Excludes the interface from the VLAN However the interface can be added to the VLAN through GVRP The VLAN to Ports screen see figure 4 13 contains fields for configuring VLANs to a port This screen displays these parts such as 47 U
32. Syn indicates request to start a session 65 e Source Port e Destination Port e Source IP Address e Wildcard Mask e Destination IP Address e Wildcard Mask e Match DSCP e Match IP Precedence User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Fin indicates request to close a session Defines the TCP UDP source port to which the ACE is matched This field is active only if 800 6 TCP or 800 17 UDP is selected in the Select from List drop down menu The possible field range is 0 65535 Defines the TCP UDP destination port This field is active only if 800 6 TCP or 800 17 UDP is selected in the Select from List drop down menu The possible field range is 0 65535 Matches the source port IP address to which packets are addressed to the ACE Defines the source IP address wildcard mask Wildcard masks specify which bits are used and which bits are ignored A wild card mask of 255 255 255 255 indicates that no bit is important A wildcard of 0 0 0 0 indicates that all the bits are important For example if the source IP address 149 36 184 198 and the wildcard mask is 255 36 184 00 the first eight bits of the IP address are ignored while the last eight bits are used Matches the destination port IP address to which packets are addressed to the ACE Defines the destination IP address wildcard mask Matches the packet DSCP value to the ACE Either the DSCP value or the IP Precedence value is used to match packets
33. The WGSD Switch supports 802 1Q tagged based and GVRP Dynamic VLAN setting in web management page In the default configuration VLAN support is 802 10 IEEE 802 1Q VLANs 43 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 IEEE 802 1Q tagged VLAN are implemented on the Switch 802 1Q VLAN require tagging which enables them to span the entire network assuming all switches on the network are IEEE 802 1Q compliant VLAN allow a network to be segmented in order to reduce the size of broadcast domains All packets entering a VLAN will only be forwarded to the stations over IEEE 802 1Q enabled switches that are members of that VLAN and this includes broadcast multicast and unicast packets from unknown sources VLAN can also provide a level of security to your network IEEE 802 1Q VLAN will only deliver packets between stations that are members of the VLAN Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging feature allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Any port can be configured as either tagging or untagging The untagging feature of IEEE 802 1Q VLAN allows VLAN to work with legacy switches that don t recognize VLAN tags in packet headers The tagging featu
34. This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example specifies the device host name Console config hostname abc 5 23 7 show users The show users user EXEC command displays information about the active users Syntax show users Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 321 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example The following example displays information about the active users Console show users Username Protocol Location Serial SSH 172 16 0 1 HTTP 172 16 0 8 5 23 8 show sessions The show sessions command in EXEC mode lists the open Telnet sessions Syntax show sessions This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command Command Mode EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Console gt show sessions Connection Host Address Remote router 172 16 1 1 EMO er 172 16 1 2 Field Description Connection Connection number Host Remote host to which the device is connected through a Telnet session 322 User s Manual of
35. admin Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 68 User Authentication screen The page contains the following fields e Authentication Type Defines the user authentication methods Also you can choose combinations of all the authentication methods The possible field values are 137 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Local authenticates the user at the device level The device checks the user name and password for authentication e RADIUS where authenticates the user at the RADIUS server e TACACS which authenticates the user at the TACACS server e None assigns none authentication method to the authentication profile e User Name Displays the user name e Password Specifies the new password The password is not displayed As it entered an corresponding to each character is displayed in the field Range 1 159 characters e Confirm Password This confirms the new password The password entered into this field must be exactly the same as the password entered in the Password field Acid ta List Use the button when you want to add the user configuration to the Local User s Table 4 12 2 Static Address A static address can be assigned to a specific interface on this switch Static addresses are bound to the assigned interface and cannot be moved When a static address is seen on another interface the address will be ignored and will not be written to the address table see figure 4 69
36. dot1x auth not req 5 29 17 dot1x multiple hosts The dot1x multiple hosts interface configuration command allows multiple hosts clients on an 802 1X authorized port that has the dot1x port control interface configuration command set to auto Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting dot1x multiple hosts no dot1x multiple hosts This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Multiple hosts are disabled If a port would join a port channel the state would be multiple hosts as long as the port is member in the port channel Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines This command enables the attachment of multiple clients to a single 802 1X enabled port In this mode only one of the attached hosts must be successfully authorized for all hosts to be granted network access If the port becomes unauthorized all attached clients are denied access to the network If a port would join a port channel the state would be multiple host as long as the port is member in the port channel Examples The following command allows multiple hosts clients on an 802 1X authorized port console config if Config VLAN Hdot1x multiple hosts 5 29 18 dot1x single host violation The dot1x single host violation interface configuration command configures the action to be taken when a station whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address attempts to access the interface Use
37. or an immediate leave value The default timeout is 10 seconds 2 Note SMP Snooping can be enabled only if Bridge Multicast Filtering is enabled 4 10 2 Bridge Multicast The Bridge Multicast screen see figure 4 56 displays the ports and LAGs attached to the Multicast service group in the Ports and LAGs tables The Port and LAG tables also reflect the manner in which the port or LAGs joined the Multicast group Ports can be added either to existing groups or to new Multicast service groups This screen permits new Multicast service groups to be created also assigns ports to a specific Multicast service address group and included two areas Configuring Multicast and Multicast Table 121 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 ree Multicast SNMP Admin Bridge Multicast Enable Bridge Multicast Filtering O LAN ID Bridge Multicast Address Interface el e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e7 e8 gl g2 Static gt J gt gt gt y p y gt A Dynamic Forbidden O OOOO 00000 None DO OO QQOOOQ L LAG E 3 RAR Soe E A Static O Dynamic Forbidden O a DO A 00 Es None Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 56 Bridge Multicast screen The Page contains the following fields a Configure Multicast e Enable Bridge The check box allows to enable Bridge Multicast Filtering function Multicast Filtering e VLAN ID This identifies a VLAN to be con
38. spanning tree cost cost no spanning tree cost cost The port path cost Range 1 200 000 000 Default Configuration The default costs are as follows Port Channel 20 000 1000 mbps giga 20 000 100 mbps 200 000 10 mbps 2 000 000 Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines The method used long or short is set by using the spanning tree pathcost method command Example The following example configures the spanning tree cost on e5 to 35000 299 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree cost 35000 5 21 9 spanning tree port priority The spanning tree port priority interface configuration command configures port priority To reset the default port priority use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree port priority priority no spanning tree port priority priority The port priority Range 0 240 in multiples of 16 Default Configuration The default port priority for IEEE STP is 128 Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the spanning priority on e5 to 96 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree port priority 96 5 21 10 spanning tree portfast The spanning tre
39. use the no form of this command 296 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax spanning tree hello time seconds no spanning tree hello time seconds Time in seconds Range 1 10 Default Configuration The default hello time for IEEE Spanning Tree Protocol STP is 2 seconds Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures spanning tree bridge hello time to 5 seconds Console config spanning tree hello time 5 5 21 5 spanning tree max age The spanning tree max age global configuration command configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age To reset the default maximum age use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree max age seconds no spanning tree max age seconds Time in seconds Range 6 40 Default Configuration The default max age for IEEE STP is 20 seconds Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the spanning tree bridge maximum age to 10 seconds 297 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Console config spanning tree max age 10 5 21 6 spanning tree priority The spanning tree priority global configuration command configures the spanning tree priority The priority value is used to determine which bridge is elected as the root bridge To r
40. verifying that information with the authentication server and relaying a response to the client 80 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The switch includes the RADIUS client which is responsible for encapsulating and decapsulating the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP frames and interacting with the authentication server When the switch receives EAPOL frames and relays them to the authentication server the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP frame is re encapsulated in the RADIUS format The EAP frames are not modified or examined during encapsulation and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame format When the switch receives frames from the authentication server the server s frame header is removed leaving the EAP frame which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the client a Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange The switch or the client can initiate authentication If you enable authentication on a port by using the dot1x port control auto interface configuration command the switch must initiate authentication when it determines that the port link state transitions from down to up It then sends an EAP request identity frame to the client to request its identity typically the switch sends an initial identity request frame followed by one or more requests for authentication information Upon receipt of the frame the client responds with an EAP response iden
41. 1 The following example displays the DSCP dscp mutation map Dscp dscp mutation map d1 5 18 Radius Commands 5 18 1 radius server host The radius server host global configuration command specifies a RADIUS server host To delete the specified RADIUS host use the no form of this command Syntax radius server host ip addaress auth port auth port number timeout timeout retransmit retransmit deadtime deadtime key key source source priority priority no radius server host p address 268 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 ip address IP address of the RADIUS server host An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds If no timeout value is specified the global value is used Range 1 30 retransmit Specifies the re transmit value If no re transmit value is specified the global value is used Range 1 10 deadtime Length of time in minutes for which a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests Range 0 2000 key Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the RADIUS server This key must match the encryption used on the RADIUS daemon If no key value is specified the global value is used source Specifies the source IP address to use for the communication If no retransmit value is specifie
42. 1 65535 seconds Default Configuration 30 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the time for the retransmission of packets to the authentication server to 3600 seconds console config if Config VLAN dot1x timeout supp timeout 3600 5 29 12 show dotlx The show dot1x privileged EXEC command displays 802 1X status for the switch or for the specified interface Syntax show dot1x ethernet interface 370 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 interface The full syntax is unit port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays 802 1X status for the switch console show dot1x 802 1x is disabled Reauth Reauth Username Control Period Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Force Authorized Authorized Disabled 3600 Port is down or not present Console show d
43. 1 00 60 6e 30 25 53 e6 Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 70 Dynamic Address screen The page contains the following fields e Address Aging e Clear Table Query e Port e MAC Address e VLAN ID e Address Table Sort Key Specifies the amount of time in seconds the MAC addresses remains in the Dynamic MAC Address table before it times out if no traffic from the source is detected The default value is 300 seconds If checked clears the MAC address table Specifies the interface for which the table is queried There are two interface types from which to select e Port displays the specific port number e LAG displays the specific LAG number Specifies the MAC address for which the table is queried Specifies the VLAN ID for which the table is queried Specifies the means by which the Dynamic MAC Address table is sorted by address VLAN or interface 140 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 12 4 Logging The System Logs enable viewing device events in real time and recording the events for later usage System Logs record and manage events and report errors or informational messages see figure 4 71 Logging Logging Severity Memory Logs Flash Logs Emergency Alert Critical Error Warning Notice Informational 010150 0 00 080 KK Debug v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 71 Loggin screen Event messages have a unique format as per the SYSLOG prot
44. 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax lacp timeout long short no lacp timeout long Specifies a long timeout value Short Specifies a short timeout value Default Configuration The default port timeout value is long Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example assigns an administrative LACP timeout for port e8 to a long timeout value Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if lacp timeout long 5 11 4 show lacp ethernet The show lacp ethernet privilege EXEC command displays LACP information for Ethernet ports Syntax show lacp ethernet nterface parameters statistics protocol state Interface Ethernet interface Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to display LACP statistics information Console show lacp ethernet e1 statistics 238 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Port e1 LACP Statistics LACP PDUs sent 2 LACP PDUs received 2 5 11 5 show lacp port channel The show lacp port channel privileged EXEC command displays LACP information for a port channel Syntax show lacp port channel port_channel_number port_channel_number The port channel number Def
45. 15 Sec indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds e 30 Sec indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds e 60 Sec indicates that the statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds 60 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 5 6 802 1x Statistic The 802 1X Statistic screen see figure 4 23 contains information about EAP packets received on a specific port PLANET E Netey les amp Cormmenicaion 802 1x Statistics Port ely Refresh Rate No Refresh vw Name Description Packet The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been BESAN ARDE Seat received by this 4uthenticator a The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been REcesved ERROL Lagin received by this amp uthenticator g The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by Received EAPOL Invalid this amp uthenticator in which the frame type is not O recognized a The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have PESE EADOA Tobal been received by this 4uthenticator j The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have been Received TAP Resp 1d received by this Authenticator 9 The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Received EAP Resp Oth Resp Id frames that have been received by this 0 Authenticator The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by Received EAP LenError this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field 0 is invalid Received Last EAPOL Ver The protocol version number carri
46. 3 Management ArGnite ctra ed 27 A A 28 A ANIA SCL OOM y CEPPEMS CUE A 30 A2 SEUD A Ne EE CIT PE AO CE Oe en eee See eee eee 31 1 E E eet ce ag ce ae ete geese borane ogee eb es ees aut eas Rested cece dees cess aes A cents 31 AZ NIN A e oe tines teense tes er gates 32 2 MNS Ser ae sts seen a Raed ese ae it aes ata Beh aaa nate et Rad eae eects notte Sonn acetone aoe beanies E eat anes accuees 34 AFON ONNg Uralo Mene we mere terre Pr ne ae ees er Or ae eae er es ey PT DC oer oe ee eer ere ares 36 AS POR Seng S cast atstratunane a a A a delata 36 AZ EKAGO CO Mo ls 40 NO A A A en ee 42 LAVAN COMU ad ah ce ae dl cl a aie 43 A E O 44 A a II 45 4 43 PORS to VEAN cata e a E 46 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 FAA VANTO POS a a NAS ee Dia ANS ae a a Gee AA a tae 47 AAS OV RP nee ti ae ee eee ee ee 49 A O 51 ALE VRMON Sila id ia tee tae nae lo ib 51 4 02 AMONIO a a eee eee 53 4S S RMON ALIN a a AE dicas 55 AS ARMON EVO Suecia ome ao edo roban sidad 58 E A A cae neal a emanate aera 60 45608921X Seal SUG Sapa wa A A oN a 61 A Oil OV FRE SUGUISUICS aes ras seas E E E ocean camera eae atone Oe 62 BE A desc aia teat aloes a 64 A lee dateic dete eternal a a aA EA 64 40 2 P Based ACL Configure Sample osc aces de nee ae Stes 66 46 9 MAC Based Ali e dedo ahce cae 70 4 6 4 MAC Based ACL Configure Sample ccooocnccoccconcconcncocononononcnnonnnnnnonnnonononrnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnrnananons 71 A eee eee ee eae aed tt
47. 3600 Note The ARP entry is deleted between the period of the timeout value and twice the timeout value For example if the timeout value is 20 seconds the ARP value is deleted during the period of 20 to 40 seconds Example The following example configures ARP timeout to 12000 seconds Console config arp timeout 12000 5 10 7 clear arp cache The clear arp cache privileged EXEC command deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache Syntax clear arp cache Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example deletes all dynamic entries from the ARP cache Console clear arp cache 5 10 8 show arp The show arp privileged EXEC command displays entries in the ARP table 235 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax show arp Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays entries in the ARP table Console show arp ARP timeout 60000 Seconds Interface IP address HW address status 10 7 1 102 00 10 B5 04 DB 4B Dynamic 10 7 1 135 00 50 22 00 2A A4 Static 5 11 LACP Commands 5 11 1 lacp system priority The lacp system priority global configuration command configu
48. A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A 50 60 13 65 80 85 95 50 60 13 65 80 85 95 50 60 13 65 80 85 95 50 60 13 65 80 85 95 CONDO BON The following example displays output from the show qos interface ethernet g1 queueing command Console show qos interface Ethernet g1 queuing Ethernet g1 wrr bandwidth weights and EF priority qid weights Ef Priority 125 i N A 125 i N A 125 i N A 125 i N A N A 5 125 i N A 125 i N A N A 8 CONDO BON Cos queue map qid Q O 02 NO oO BR WBN CO CONDO BPN W The following example displays output from the show qos interface g1 shapers command Console show qos interface g1 shapers Ethernet g1 Port shaper enable Committed rate 192000 bps Committed rate 192000 bps Committed burst 9600 bytes qid status Target Committed Target Committed Burst Rate bps bytes Enable 100000 17000 Disable N A N A Enable 200000 19000 Disable N A N A Disable N A N A Disable N A N A Enable 178000 8000 Enable 23000 1000 CONDO BON 262 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The following example displays output from the show qos interface g1 policers command Console show qos interface ethernet g1 policers Ethernet g1 Class map A Policer type aggregate Committed rate 192000 bps Committed burst 9600 bytes Exceed action policed dscp transmit Class map B Policer type single Committed rate
49. A valid port channel number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example all classes of entries in the bridge forwarding database are displayed console show bridge address table Aging time is 250 sec mac address 0060 704C 73FF dynamic 0060 708C 73FF dynamic 0010 0D48 37FF static 178 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 4 14 show bridge address table static The show bridge address table static privileged EXEC command displays statically created entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show bridge address table static vlan v an ethernet interface port channel port channel number vlan Specific valid VLAN such as VLAN 1 interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example all static entries in the bridge forwarding database are displayed console show bridge address table static Aging time is 300 sec mac address 0060 704C 73FF permanent 0060 708C 73FF delete on timeout 0010 0D48 37FF delete on reset 5 4 15 show bridge address table count The show bridge address table
50. Admit Tag Only indicates that only tagged packets are accepted on the port e Admit All indicates that both tagged and untagged packets are accepted on the port e PVID Assigns a VLAN ID to untagged packets The possible values are 2 to 4094 VLAN 4095 is defined as per standard and industry practice as the discard VLAN Packets classified to the Discard VLAN are dropped e Ingress Filtering Enables or disables Ingress filtering on the port Ingress filtering discards packets which do not include an ingress port e LAG Indicates the LAG to which the VLAN is defined Untagged Belongs to a single untagged VLAN Tag PVID be removed Allowed to belongs to multiple untagged Untagged VLANs at the same time Tag PVID be removed Allowed to belongs to multiple Tagged Tagged VLANs at the same time Tag PVID or Original VID be remained 4 4 3 Ports to VLAN The Ports to VLAN screen contains fields for configuring ports to a VLAN The port default VLAN ID PVID is configured on the Create VLAN screen All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID The Ports to VLAN screen contains a Port Table for VLAN parameters for each port Ports are assigned VLAN membership by selecting and configuring the presented configuration options you can refer to figure 4 12 46 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 i S SRA A RN SN E A art Config YLAN Config Statistics ACL Security DoS Sp ng u ticast F i LO Fi
51. Ctrl Z End Returns back to the Privileged EXEC mode from all modes Backspace key Moves the cursor back one space Cu Command Conventions When entering commands there are certain command entry standards which apply to all commands The following table describes the command conventions In a command line square brackets indicate an optional entry In a command line curly brackets indicate a selection of compulsory parameters separated by the character One option must be selected For example flowcontrol auto on off means that for the flowcontrol command either auto on or off must be selected 159 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Italic font Indicates a parameter lt Enter gt Any individual key on the keyboard For example click lt Enter gt Ctrl F4 Any combination keys pressed simultaneously on the keyboard Screen Indicates system messages and prompts appearing on the console Display When a parameter is required to define a range of ports or parameters and all is an option the default for the command is all when no parameters are defined For example the command interface range port channel has the option of either entering a range of channels or selecting all When the command is entered without a parameter it automatically defaults to all 5 3 AAA Commands 5 3 1 aaa authentication login The aaa authentication login global configuration command defines login authenticat
52. Default Configuration By default the interface does not have a description Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel out of band Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example adds a description to the Ethernet e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if description RD_SW 3 5 7 5 speed The speed interface configuration command configures the speed of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto negotiation To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax speed 10 100 1000 no speed 10 Configures the port to 10 Mbps 100 Configures the port to 100 Mbps 1000 Configures the port to 1000 Mbps Default Configuration Maximum port capability Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel out of band Ethernet mode 203 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines The command no speed in port channel context returns each port in the port channel to its maximum capability Before attempting to force a particular duplex mode the port operating at 10 100 Mbps disable the auto negotiation on that port Example The following example configures the speed operation of Ethernet e5 to force 100 Mbps operation Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if speed 100 5 7 6 duplex The duplex interface configuration
53. Global Configuration mode User Guidelines All the syslog messages are logged to the internal buffer This command limits the commands displayed to the user Example The following example limits syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on the severity level debugging Console config logging buffered debugging 5 24 5 logging buffered size The logging buffered size global configuration command changes the number of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer To return the number of messages stored in the internal buffer to the default value use the no form of this command Syntax logging buffered size number no logging buffered size number Numeric value indicating the maximum number of messages stored in the history table Range 20 400 Default Configuration The default number of messages is 200 327 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example changes the number of syslog messages stored in the internal buffer to 300 Console config logging buffered size 300 5 24 6 clear logging The clear logging privileged EXEC command clears messages from the internal logging buffer Syntax clear logging Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guide
54. IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines Range Valid IP Address Default Configuration The IP address would be of the outgoing IP interface User Guidelines To define an out of band IP address use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example specifies the source IP address Console config tacacs server source ip 172 16 8 1 335 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 25 5 show tacacs The show tacacs command in Privileged EXEC mode displays configuration and statistics fora TACACS server Syntax show tacacs p address p address Name or IP address of the host Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays configuration and statistic fora TACACS server Console show tacacs IP address Status TimeOut Source IP Priority Connection 172 16 1 1 Connected Global Global 1 Global values TimeOut 3 Source IP 172 16 8 1 OOB Source IP 176 16 8 1 OOB TACACS servers IP address Status TimeOut Source IP Priority Connection 336 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 172 16 1 1 Connected Global Global 1 Global values Time
55. LAG L1 ba ES EE ES Eb PER TB None Forbbiden O O O O C E state OOOOOOOO Dynamic Cancel Config Figure 4 58 Multicast Bridge Forward All screen The Bridge Multicast Forward All Screen contains the following fields e VLAN ID For which Multicast parameters are displayed This identifies a VLAN to be configured to a Multicast service e Interface Displays Interface that can be added to a Multicast service The configuration options are as follows e Static indicates the port is user defined e Dynamic indicates the port is configured dynamically e Forbidden forbidden ports are not included the Multicast group even if IGMP snooping designated the port to join a Multicast group e None displays the port is not configured for Multicast service e LAG Displays LAG that can be added to a Multicast service 124 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 11 SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP provides a method for managing network devices Devices supporting SNMP run a local software agent The SNMP agents maintain a list of variables which are used to manage the device The variables are defined in the Management Information Base MIB The MIB contains the variables controlled by the agent The SNMP protocol defines the MIB specification format as well as the format used to access the information over the network Access rights to the SNMP agents are controlled by access
56. Link is enabled or disabled for the port or LAG If Fast Link is enabled for a port the port is automatically placed in the forwarding state Indicates if RSTP is enabled on the interface Indicates if a point to point links are established or permits the device to establish a point to point link The possible field values are 112 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Admin Status e Auto Point to point links are automatically established by the device e Enabled enables the device to establish a point to point link e Disabled where disables point to point link e Point to Point Oper Indicates the Point to Point operating state To run a migration test press Activate next to the Activate Protocol Migration Test field The test sends Link Control Status Protocol LCP packets to test if a data link is enabled To establish communications over a point to point link the originating PPP first sends Link Control 2 Note Protocol LCP packets to configure and test the data link After a link is established and optional facilities are negotiated as needed by the LCP the originating PPP sends Network Control Protocols NCP packets to select and configure one or more network layer protocols When each of the chosen network layer protocols has been configured packets from each network layer protocol can be sent over the link The link remains configured for communications until explicit LCP or NCP packets close the link or until s
57. Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 24 9 show logging The show logging privileged EXEC command displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the internal buffer Syntax show logging Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the internal buffer Console show logging Logging is enabled Console logging level debugging Console Messages 0 Dropped severity Buffer logging level debugging Buffer Messages 11 Logged 200 Max File logging level notifications File Messages 0 Dropped severity Syslog server 192 180 2 27 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity Syslog server 192 180 2 28 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity OOB Syslog server 176 16 8 9 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity 2 messages were not logged resources Buffer log 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface FastEthernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g1 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g2 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet e3 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002
58. Orange 7 White Brown 8 Brown Figure A 1 Straight Through and Crossover Cable Please make sure your connected cables are with same pin assignment and color as above picture before deploying the cables into your network 381 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 A 3 Available Modules The following list the available Modules for WGSD Switch MGB GT SFP port 1000Base T Module MGB LX SFP port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module MGB L70 SFP port 1000Base LX mini GBIC module 70KM MGB LA10 SFP port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm mini GBIC module 10KM MGB LA20 SFP port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm mini GBIC module 20KM MGB LA40 SFP port 1000Base LX WDM TX 1310nm mini GBIC module 40KM 2081 A34030 001 C 382
59. Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts Port OutOctets OutUcastPkts OutMcastPkts OutBcastPkts FCS Errors 8 Single Collision Frames 0 Multiple Collision Frames 0 SQE Test Errors 0 Deferred Transmissions 0 Late Collisions 0 Excessive Collisions 0 Internal MAC Tx Errors O Carrier Sense Errors 0 Oversize Packets 0 Internal MAC Rx Errors 0 Received Pause Frames 0 Transmitted Pause Frames 0 The following table describes the fields shown in the display Field Description InOctets Counted received octets InUcastPkts Counted received unicast packets InMcastPkts Counted received multicast packets InBcastPkts Counted received broadcast packets OutOctets Counted transmitted octets OutUcastPkts Counted transmitted unicast packets OutMcastPkts Counted transmitted multicast packets 214 OutBcastPkts FCS Errors Single Collision Frames Late Collisions Excessive Collisions Internal MAC Tx Errors Oversize Packets Internal MAC Rx Errors Received Pause Frames Transmitted Pause Frames User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Counted transmitted broadcast packets Counted frames received that are an integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS check Counted frames that are involved in a single collision and are subsequently transmitted successfully Counted times that a collision is detected later than one slotTime into the transmission of a packet
60. Update Port Broadcast Control Mode Rate Threshold e2 False Broadcast Only 3500 e3 False Broadcast Only 3500 a False Broadcast Only 3500 e5 False Broadcast Only 3500 eb False Broadcast Only 3500 e False Broadcast Only 3500 e8 False Broadcast Only 3500 gi False Broadcast Only 3500 g2 False Broadcast Only 3500 v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 34 Storm Control screen The Page contains the following fields e Port Displays the port number for which storm control is enabled e Broadcast Control This indicates whether broadcast packet types are forwarded on the specific interface e Mode By which specifies the Broadcast mode currently enabled on the device The possible field values are e Unknown Unicast Multicast Broadcast counts Unicast Multicast and Broadcast traffic e Multicast amp Broadcast counts Broadcast and Multicast traffic together e Broadcast Only counts only Broadcast traffic e Rate Threshold Where the maximum rate packets per second at which unknown packets are forwarded The range is 70 100000 The default value is 3500 88 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 8 QoS Network traffic is usually unpredictable and the only basic assurance that can be offered is best effort traffic delivery To overcome this challenge Quality of Service QoS is applied throughout the network This ensures that network traffic is prioritized according to specified criteria and that speci
61. User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax clock source sntp no clock source sntp SNTP servers Default Configuration No external clock source Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example configures an external time source for the system clock console clock source sntp 5 5 3 clock timezone The clock timezone global configuration command sets the time zone for display purposes To set the time to Coordinated Universal Time UTC use the no form of this command Syntax clock timezone hours offset minutes minutes offset Zone acronym no clock timezone hours offse t Hours difference from UTC Range 12 13 minutes minutes offse t Minutes difference from UTC Range 0 59 zone acronym The acronym of the time zone Range Up to 4 characters Default Configuration UTC Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The system internally keeps time in UTC so this command is used only for display purposes and when the time is manually set Examples The following example sets the timezone to 6 hours difference from UTC 184 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 console config clock timezone 6 zone CST 5 5 4 clock summer time The clock summer time global configuration command configures the system to automatically switch to summer time daylight
62. User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example VLAN number 1972 is created Console config vlan database Console config vian vlan 1972 5 27 3 default vlan disable The default vlan disable VLAN configuration command disables the default VLAN functionality Use the no form of this command to enable the default VLAN functionality Syntax default vlan disable no default vlan disable This command has no keywords or arguments Default Configuration Enabled Command Modes Vlan configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examplesl Console vlan database Console config vian default vlan disable 345 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 27 4 interface vian The interface vlan global configuration command enters the interface configuration VLAN mode Syntax interface vlan vian id vlan d The ID of an existing VLAN excluding GVRP dynamic VLANs Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the VLAN 1 IP address of 131 108 1 27 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 131 108 1 27 255 255 255 0 5 27 5 interface range vian The interface range v
63. WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 possible field range is 1 5 e Month The month of the year in which DST begins every year The possible field range is Jan Dec e Time The time at which DST begins every year The field format is Hour Minute for example 02 10 Defines the recurring time that DST ends each year For example DST ends locally e To every fourth Friday in October at 5 00 am The possible field values are e Day The day of the week at which DST ends every year The possible field range is Sunday Saturday e Week The week within the month at which DST ends every year The possible field range is 1 5 e Month The month of the year in which DST ends every year The possible field range is Jan Dec e Time The time at which DST ends every year The field format is Hour Minute for example 05 30 E SNTP Server Enter a user defined SNTP server IP addresses or hostname Up to twot SNTP e Server1 servers can be defined The primary server provides SNTP information e Server2 The backup server provides SNTP information e Poll Interval Defines the interval in seconds at which the SNTP server is polled for Unicast information 60 86400 sec The factory default value is 1024 The device supports the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP SNTP assures accurate network device clock time synchronization up to the millisecond Time synchronization is performed by a network SNTP server SNTP operates only as a cl
64. a MAC address deletes all static MAC addresses belonging to this VLAN Syntax bridge address mac address ethernet interface port channel port channel number permanent delete onreset delete on timeout secure no bridge address mac address mac address A valid MAC address Interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel number permanent The address can only deleted by the no bridge address command delete on reset The address is deleted after reset delete on timeout The address is deleted after age out time has expired secure The address is deleted after the port changes mode to unlock learning no port security command This parameter is only available when the port is in learning locked mode Default Configuration No static addresses are defined The default mode for an added address is permanent Command Mode Interface configuration VLAN mode 169 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example adds a permanent static MAC layer station source address 3aa2 64b3 a245 on port e8 to the bridge table console config interface vlan 2 console config vlan bridge address 3aa2 64b3 a245 ethernet e8 permanent 5 4 2 bridge multicast filtering The bridge multicast filtering global configuration command enables filtering of multicast addres
65. a a UE co 298 52o SPaMINO TEE COS nrs e een eee Mean tad a aa ead vans tena Ratton salle Meniersu ua R saa Ea 299 9 2129 SDAMMIMNG reS POr MONLY a a ee Sih o e o ANS o a aR aces 300 5 2 VAOSDanning ree DOMlaSl 22 te ee oa ee ee tee eee ee au tae ee A 300 2 Ud SOANMING SS Mk Deir ala 301 a E is AAA o o A A 302 5 21 14 clear spanning tree detected protocols ooocccocccccnoconccocnononocanocncnononoconnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnonaninnnnennns 303 521 15 Show spanning IEE aia da tl rl a No loe actas 303 50 22 09 and SEOGIN COMMANGS sesion 305 SA Wl TOSS DOM si octpt cena testo a aaae eaaa aaea a e a tees ea 305 OZ LS eNe O a O A a e ct 306 5 22 3 Cry plo KEY Generale dsa rai as 307 522 ACI DIO KEY generate Sanidad 307 9 22 01 SS DUDE y QUIN acicate 308 922 0 CY LO KEY UD K CY CEI Sa 308 522 1 USE KOY asia aia 309 E AAA Qe A 310 A sw cant se ce aa ce Sm aa Ra aa aE R AIRRA 311 5 22 10 SNOW crypto KEY MY DUDO A Oe aA cee 312 5 2211 SNOW crypto Key DUDKEY CHAIN SSN una A a aa a a EA 312 523 SEM WAN AM r a r e aa aa 313 OZ WDN A a ck Acar a E a anna estos kan uaot 313 A ip As 107 A ee PO E E RR A ee RU ee ee one eee ee ee ene eer ee eerie 314 SS A e S a betisdadnec ut seeds dees aeutaeg seal eanecemtsetaus O eieeanetaa tee 317 eo o ebosteet eng a dente a eee 319 BZ SO O 320 10 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 BDZ ONO SUMAN ih wis E AN asec ar NE ce eS ig She rs Nid cia an NS eae Pe ee etek ance an a abet
66. address p multicast address vlan_id VLAN ID value p multicast address P multicast address Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines To see the full multicast address table including static addresses use the show bridge address table command Example The example shows IGMP snooping information Console show ip igmp snooping groups Querier 224 239 130 2 2 3 224 239 130 2 2 8 230 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 10 IP Addressing Commands 5 10 1 ip address The ip address interface configuration command sets an IP address To remove an IP address use the no form of this command Syntax ip address p address mask prefix length no ip address p address p address IP address mask The IP address network mask The IP address network mask 255 0 0 0 prefix length 8 to 255 255 255 252 prefix length 30 prefix length The number of bits that comprise the IP address prefix The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash Range 8 30 Default Configuration No IP address is defined for interfaces Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet VLAN port channel out of band Ethernet User Guidelines An IP address cannot be configured for a range of interfaces range context Example The following example configures VLAN 1 with the IP address 131 1
67. are Any matches the protocol to any protocol EIGRP which indicates that the Enhanced Interior Gateway Routing Protocol EIGRP is used to classify network flows ICMP which indicates that the Internet Control Message Protocol ICMP is used to classify network flows IGMP which indicates that the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to classify network flows TCP which indicates that the Transmission Control Protocol is used to classify network flows OSPF by which matches the packet to the Open Shortest Path First OSPF protocol UDP which indicates that the User Datagram Protocol is used to classify network flows Protocol ID to Match adds user defined protocols to which packets are matched to the ACE Each protocol has a specific protocol number which is unique The possible field range is 0 255 This filters packets by TCP flag Filtered packets are either forwarded or dropped Filtering packets by TCP flags increases packet control and network security The values that can be assigned are Set which enables filtering packets by selected flags Unset disables filtering packets by selected flags Don t care which indicates that selected packets do not influence the packet filtering process The TCP Flags that can be selected are Urg indicates the packet is urgent Ack indicates the packet is acknowledged Psh indicates the packet is pushed Rst indicates the connection is dropped
68. assign default gateways In the Networking Setting screen you can set these parts as below es x User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Y PLANET Setup Jort Config Config Statistics Network Settings Identification IP Configuration System Name System Location System Contact System Object ID Base Mac Address Management LAN IP Address Mode Host Name IP Address Subnet Mask Default Gateway DNS Server The page includes the following fields m Identification e System Name e System Location e System Contact e System Object ID e Base MAC Address IP Configuration e Management VLAN e IP Address Mode e Host Name e IP Address 1 3 6 1 4 1 10456 1 1466 00 03 6d 30 57 00 1 Static vw 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Y Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 4 Network Setting screen Type your system name Type where the Switch is located Enter the administrative contact person Tthe system object identifier is in this field The MAC address of the Switch displays here Where you can select the Management VLAN The default Managemanet VLAN is VLAN 1 Where select Static or Dynamic IP address configuration The Default Mode is Static In this field you can enter the DHCP Host Name Enter the IP address when you want to use a static address The default IP Address is 192 168 1 254 33 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Subnet Mask Enter the IP
69. cable length attached to all ports Console show copper ports cable length Port Length meters el lt 50 e2 Giga link not active e3 110 140 e4 Fiber 5 14 4 show fiber ports optical transceiver The show fiber ports optical transceiver privileged EXEC command displays the optical transceiver diagnostics Syntax show fiber ports optical transceiver interface detailed interface A valid Ethernet port Detailed Detailed diagnostics 249 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines To test optical transceivers ensure a fiber link is present Examples The following example displays the optical transceiver diagnostics console show fiber ports optical transceiver Temp Voltage Current Output Power Copper Temp Internally measured transceiver temperature Voltage Internally measured supply voltage Current Measured TX bias current Output Power Measured TX output power Input Power Measured RX received power Tx Fault Transmitter fault LOS Loss of signal Data ready Indicates transceiver has achieved power up and data is ready N A Not Available N S Not Supported W Warning E Error The following example displays detailed optical transceiver diagnostics console show fiber ports transceiver detailed Temp Voltag
70. can also be accessed via Telnet and the console port For secure remote management the WGSD Switch support SSL and SSH connection which encrypt the packet content at each session 2 1 2 Switch Front Panel Figure 2 1 and Figure 2 2 shows the front panel of WGSD 1022 and WGSD 8000 SY PLANET Weso 1022 Intelligent 8 Port 10 100Mbps 2 Gigabit Ethernet Switch sai Networking amp Communication O 000000 O 00000 G1 O LNK ACT mini GBIC mini GBIC 100 G1 G2 O LNK ACT O PWR O 1000 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Figure 2 1 WGSD 1022 front panel 18 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Q PLANET WGSD 8000 8 Port Gigabit 2 Shared SFP Managed Ethernet Switch ee Networking amp Communication O 000000 O 00000 O LNK ACT ee ps i rl ri rl O Cal O Ly PWR Figure 2 2 WGSD 8000 front panel 2 1 3 LED Indications a a a ral Function Lights to indicate that the Switch has power m Per 10 1 port Color Function Lights to indicate the link through that port is successfully established LNK ACT Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights to indicate the port is running in 100Mbps speed 100 Orange Off indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps Per 10 100 1000Base T port SFP interfaces Color Function Lights to indicate the link through that port is succe
71. contains the following fields e DSCP Indicates the Differentiated Services Code Point value in the incoming packet e Queue Maps the DSCP value to the selected queue 4 8 4 Bandwidth The Bandwidth screen refer to figure 4 38 allows network managers to define the bandwidth settings for a specified egress interface Modifying queue scheduling affects the queue settings globally The Bandwidth screen is not used with the Service mode as bandwidth settings are based on services 92 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 a Bandwidth Interface Port el l LAG O Ingress Rate Limit Status Egress Shaping Rate on Selected Port Committed Information Rate CIR Committed Burst Size CbS Port Ingress Rate Limit Egress Shaping Rates Status Rate Limit Status CIR Cbs CEA E EN EEE PE EA e2 e3 et e5 e6 e es gl a g2 v Cancel Config Save Config Figure 4 38 Bandwidth screen Queue shaping can be based per queue and or per interface Shaping is determined by the lower specified value The queue shaping type is selected in the Bandwidth screen include interface port LAG Rate Limit Ingress Rate Limit Status Rate Limit The page contains the following fields e Interface Indicates the interface for which the queue shaping information is displayed The possible field values are e Port indicates the port for which the bandwidth settings are displayed e LAG indicates the LAG for w
72. copying process may take several minutes and differs from protocol to protocol and from network to network Filenames cannot be a substring of startup config or running config e g the following filenames are not allowed s st sta 196 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 File download from a TFTP server may take a long time and therefore fail if there are many Quality of Service elements ACLs policers etc present In this case it is recommended to copy the TFTP file to the backup configuration file and then copy the backup file to the running startup configuration file When using tftp to copy files it is recommended to set the tftp server timeout to 10 20 second The device does not accept new commands while files are being copied however the user does not receive notification that the device is busy copying and will ignore the command Note that this behavior occurs only at the session which initiated the copy command response to activity on other management sessions will result in a delay but will not be ignored When a file is copied to the running configuration file or to the startup configuration file the data in the file is checked If the check fails the file is not downloaded and the user is notified of the error However the user should use caution when copying a file from a TFTP server to the backup configuration file because there is no check of data An attempt to display the corrupte
73. default configuration Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example specifies a password abc on a line console config line password abc 5 3 9 enable password The enable password global configuration command sets a local password to control access to normal and privilege levels To remove the password requirement use the no form of this command Syntax enable password level eve password encrypted no enable password level evel password Password for this level from 1 to 159 characters in length level eve Level for which the password applies If not specified the level is 15 Range 1 15 encrypted Encrypted password entered copied from another device configuration Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets a local level 15 password abc to control access to user and privilege levels console config line enable password level 15 abc 167 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 3 10 username The username global configuration command establishes a username based authentication system To remove a user name use the no form of this command Syntax username name password password privilege eve l encr
74. either the Select from List or the Object ID List There are two configuration options Select from List select the OID from the list provided Object ID you can enter an OID not offered in the Select from List option 133 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Filter Type Indicates if informs or traps are sent regarding the OID to the trap recipients e Excluded Restricts sending OID traps or informs e Included Sends OID traps or informs Add ta List Use the button when you want to add the Notification Filter configuration to the Notification Filter Table at the bottom of the screen 4 11 7 Notification Recipient The Notification Recipient screen see figure 4 66 and 4 67 contains information for defining filters that determine whether traps are sent to specific users and the trap type sent Recipient IP Notification Type Traps M SNMPy1 2 Community String Notification Version SNMPv1 SNMPY3 User Name _ Security Level UDP Port 162 Filter Name e Timeout 15 sec Retries 3 Figure 4 66 Notification Recipient The page contains the following fields e Recipient IP Which indicates the IP address to whom the traps are sent e Notification Type Defines the notification sent The possible field values are Traps indicates traps are sent Informs indicates informs are sent e SNMP v1 2 Enables SNMP v1 2 as the Notification Recipient Either SNMP v1 2 or SNMPv3 can be enabled at a
75. hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon Defines the Privacy Key LSB If only authentication is required 20 bytes are defined If both privacy and authentication are required 36 bytes are defined Each byte in hexadecimal character strings is two hexadecimal digits Each byte can be separated by a period or colon Add to List Use the button when you want to add the Group Membership configuration to the respective table at the bottom of the screen 130 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 11 5 Communities The Communities screen contains three areas e Communities e Basic Table e Advanced Table The screens in Figure 4 63 and 4 64 sppears E Communities Communities ol SNMP Management Station all Community String Basic Access Mode Read Only View Name Advanced Group Name Add to List Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 63 Communities configuration screen The page contains the following fields e SNMP Management Defines the management station IP address for which the advanced SNMP Station community is defined There are two definition options e IP Address Define the management station IP address e All which includes all management station IP addresses e Community String Defines the password used to authenticate the management station to the device e Basic which enables SNMP Basic mode for a selecte
76. informations E Device Information e System Name e IP Address e Subnet Mask Display your system name v Cancel Config Display the current IP address of the device Display the subnet mask setting of the device 31 e DNS Servers e Default Gateway e Address Mode e Base MAC Address E System Information e Serial Number e Model Name e Hardware Version e Boot Version e Firmware Version e System Location e System Contact e System Up Time e Current Time User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Display the current DNS Servers no matter by manual setting or assigned by the DHCP server Display the current default gateway setting Show the IP Address mode of the system By Static or Dynamic DHCP The MAC address of the Switch displays here The unique box serial number for this switch The product name of this switch The release version maintenance number of the hardware The version of boot system currently running on the switch The operating system currently running on the switch Display where the Switch is located Display the administrative contact person The time in days hours and minutes since the last switch reboot Specifies the time and date The format is hour minute second month day year 4 2 2 Network Settings The Basic Setup Table include the Network Settings see figure 4 3 which allows you to assign DHCP or static IP settings to interfaces and
77. no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays all VLAN information Console show vlan internal usage IP Address Reserved Active Inactive Active 5 27 22 show interfaces switchport The show interfaces switchport privileged EXEC command displays switchport configuration 357 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax show interfaces switchport ethernet interface port channel port channel numben interface Specific interface such as ethernet e8 port channel number Valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays switchport configuration individually for e1 Console gt show interface switchport ethernet e1 Port e1 Port mode General GVRP Status disabled Ingress Filtering true Acceptable Frame Type admitAll Ingress Untagged VLAN NATIVE 1 Port is member in Egress rule default untagged VLANOO8 tagged Dynamic VLANO11 tagged Static Forbidden VLANS Classification rules Group ID 358 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 219 372 5 28 Web Server Commands 5 28 1 ip http server The ip http server global configuration command ena
78. of queues The priority queue out num of queues global configuration command enables the egress queues to be expedite queues Use the no form of this command to return to the default values Syntax priority queue out num of queues number of queues no priority queue out num of queues number of queues Assign the number of queues to be expedite queues The expedite queues would be the queues with higher indexes The range is 1 8 Default Configuration All queues are expedite queues Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines When configuring the priority queue out num of queues command the weighted round robin WRR weight ratios are affected because there are fewer queues participating in WRR Example The following example sets queue 7 8 to be an EF queue Console config priority queue out num of queues 2 5 17 6 show qos interface The show qos interface user EXEC command displays interface QoS data Syntax show qos interface ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number buffers queuing policers shapers ethernet interface number Ethernet port number 260 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 vlan vian id VLAN number port channel number Port channel buffers Displays buffer setting for the interface queues For gigabit Ethernet interfaces the queue depth for each of the 8 queues and the thresholds for the WRED Tail
79. of the Switch and how to physically install the Switch Section 3 Configuration The section contains the information about the software function of the Switch Section 4 Web Configuration The section explains how to manage the switch by Web interface Section 5 COMMAND STRUCTURE The section explains how to manage the switch by Console interface Appendex A The section contains cable information of the Switch In the following section terms Switch with upper case denotes the WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Managed Ethernet switch Terms with lower case switch means other Ethernet switch devices 14 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Product Feature gt Physical Port WGSD 1022 8 Port 10 100Base TX RJ 45 2 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 2 SFP slots shared with Port 9 g1 and Port 10 g2 Console interface for Switch basic management and setup WGSD 8000 O 8 Port 10 100 1000Base T RJ 45 O 2 SFP slots shared with Port 7 and Port 8 O Console interface for Switch basic management and setup OO O gt Layer 2 Features O Complies with the IEEE 802 3 IEEE 802 3u IEEE 802 3ab IEEE 802 3z Gigabit Ethernet standard O Supports Auto negotiation and half duplex full duplex modes for all 10Base T 100Base TX and 1000Base T ports O Auto MDI MDI X detection on each RJ 45 port O Prevents packet loss with back pressure Half Duplex and IEEE 802 3x PAUSE frame flow control Full Duplex O High performance Store and Forwa
80. on 5 15 4 show interfaces port channel The show interfaces port channel user EXEC command displays port channel information which ports are members of that port channel and whether they are currently active or not Syntax show interfaces port channel port channel number port channel number Valid port channel number information to display Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode 253 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how all port channel information is displayed Console config show interfaces port channel Channel Active g2 Active e3 e7 Inactive g1 Active e4 e8 5 16 Port Monitor Commands 5 16 1 port monitor The port monitor interface configuration command starts a port monitoring session To stop a port monitoring session use the no form of this command Syntax port monitor src interface rx tx no port monitor src interface src interface Valid Ethernet port or port channel number rx Monitors received packets only If no option specified monitors both rx and tx tx Monitors transmitted packets only If no option specified monitors both rx and tx Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration mode User Guidelines
81. or missing the appropriate error message is displayed This assists in entering the correct command By pressing the lt Tab gt button an incomplete command is entered If the characters already entered are not enough for the system to identify a single matching command press to display the available commands matching the characters already entered Incorrect or incomplete commands are automatically re entered next to the cursor If a parameter must be added the parameter can be added to the basic command already displayed next to the cursor The following example indicated that the command interface ethernet requires the parameter lt port num gt 158 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 config interface ethernet missing mandatory parameter config interface ethernet e5 Keyboard Shortcuts The CLI has a range of keyboard shortcuts to assist in editing the CLI commands The following table describes the CLI shortcuts Keyboard Key Description Up arrow key Recalls commands in the history buffer beginning with the most recent command Repeat the key sequence to recall successively older commands Down arrow key Returns to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with the up arrow key Repeating the key sequence will recall successively more recent commands Ctri A Moves the cursor to the beginning of the command line Ctrl E Moves the cursor to the end of the command line
82. packets remove Don t forbid forwarding unregistered multicast packets interface list Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of ports Range Valid Ethernet port port channel number list Separate nonconsecutive port channels with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of port channels Range Valid Port channel number Default Configuration Not forbidden Command Modes Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 173 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Examples This example forbids port 1 to be a Forwarding unregistered multicast addresses port within VLAN 8 console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast forward unregistered add ethernet 1 5 4 7 bridge multicast forward all The bridge multicast forward all interface configuration command enables forwarding of all multicast packets on a port To restore the default use the no form of the bridge multicast forward all command Syntax bridge multicast forward all add remove ethernet interface list port channel port channel number list no bridge multicast forward all add Adds ports to the group remove Removes ports from the group interface list Separate non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to de
83. particular protocol where ist name is any character string used to name this list The method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries in the given sequence The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line Example The following example configures authentication login console config aaa authentication login default radius local enable none 5 3 2 aaa authentication enable The aaa authentication enable global configuration command defines authentication method lists for accessing higher privilege levels To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax aaa authentication enable default ist name method method2 no aaa authentication enable default default Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when using higher privilege levels listname Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated when using accesshigher privilege levels 161 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 method method2 Specify at least one from the following table Radius Uses the list of all radius servers for authentication Uses username Senabx Where
84. providing non blocking switch fabric and wire speed throughput as high as 5 6Gbps and 16Gbps Its two built in SFP mini GBIC slots also offer incredible extensibility flexibility and connectivity to the Core switch or Servers 2 1 1 Product Overview PLANET WGSD Switch is loaded with powerful traffic management and QoS features to enhance services offered by telcos It provides 4 priority queues per port for different types of traffics allowing administrators to set policies for classified filtering and rule based rate limitation The WGSD Switch prioritizes applications with WFQ Weighted Fair Queuing scheduling algorithm to allocate more bandwidth to key traffics such as voice transmission empowering the enterprise to take full advantages of the limited network resources and guarantee the best performance PLANET WGSD Switch offers comprehensive Access Control List ACL for enforcing security to the edge Its protection mechanisms comprised of port based 802 1x user and device authentication The administrators can now construct highly secured corporate networks with time and effort considerably less then before With its built in web based management the PLANET WGSD Switch offers an easy to use platform independent management and configuration facility The PLANET WGSD Switch supports standard Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP and can be managed via any standard based management software For text based management the WGSD Switch
85. saving time To configure the software to not automatically switch to summer time use the no form of this command Syntax clock summer time recurring usa eu week day month hh mm week day month hh mm offset offsef zone acronym clock summer time date date month year hh mm date month year hh mm offset offsef Zone acronym clock summer time date month date year hh mm month date year hh mm offset offset zone acronym no clock summer time recurring Indicates that summer time should start and end on the corresponding specified days every year date Indicates that summer time should start on the first specific date listed in the command and end on the second specific date in the command usa The summer time rules are the United States rules eu The summer time rules are the European Union rules week Week of the month Range 1 4 first last day Day of the week Range first three letters by name like sun date Date of the month Range 1 31 month Month Range first three letters by name year year no abbreviation Range 2000 2097 hh mm Time in military format in hours and minutes Range hh 0 23 mm 0 59 offset offset Number of minutes to add during summer time Range 1 1440 zone acronym The acronym of the time zone to be displayed when summer time is in effect If unspecified default to the timezone acronym Range Up to 4 charac
86. statistics By which displays the device GVRP Leave all statistics The GVRP Error Statistics Table contains the following fields e Invalid Protocol ID Where displays the device GVRP Invalid Protocol ID statistics e Invalid Attribute Type e Attribute Value e Invalid Events Where displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute ID statistics Invalid Displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute Value statistics Invalid Attribute Length where displays the device GVRP Invalid Attribute Length statistics Where displays the device GVRP Invalid Events statistics The Clear All Counters button resets all tables 2163 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 6 ACL An ACL consists of a set of rules which are matched sequentially against a packet When a packet meets the match criteria of a rule the specified rule action Permit Deny is taken and the additional rules are not checked for a match On this menu the interfaces to which an ACL applies must be specified as well as whether it applies to inbound or outbound traffic Rules for the ACL are specified created using the ACL Rule Configuration menu 4 6 1 IP Based ACL The IP Based ACL Access Control List screen see figure 4 25 contains information for defining IP Based ACLs Q PLANET Sree IP based ACL ACL Name New ACL Name Delete ACL Action Deny v Protocol Select from List Any v O Protocol ID To Match TCP Flags Urg Ack Psh Rst Syn Fin Sourc
87. system while still retaining consistency with RADIUS and other authentication processes The TACACS protocol ensures network integrity through encrypted protocol exchanges between the device and TACACS server You can refer to figure 4 29 TACACS Parameters Host IP Address Priority lo Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 Key String Authentication Port 49 Timeout for Reply Status Single Connection E Table Host Priority Source Authentica Timeout Single Status IP Address IP Address tion Port for Reply Connection Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 29 TACACS screen The Page contains the following fields e Host IP Address Indicates the TACACS Server IP address e Priority Displays the order in which the TACACS servers are used The default is O e Source IP Address By which displays the device source IP address used for the TACACS session between the device and the TACACS server e Key String This defines the authentication and encryption key for TACACS server The key must match the encryption key used on the TACACS server e Authentication Port Displays the port number through which the TACACS session occurs e The Timeout for This displays the amount of time that passes before the connection between the Reply device and the TACACS server times out The field range is 1 30 seconds e Status Displays the connection status between the device and the TACACS server The 78 e Single Connect
88. the no form of this command to return to default Syntax dot1x single host violation forward discard discard shutdown trap seconds no port dot1x single host violation forward Forward frames with source addresses not the supplicant address but do not learn the address 376 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 discard Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address discard shutdown Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address The port is also shutdown trap seconds Send SNMP traps and specifies the minimum time between consecutive traps Range 1 1000000 Default Configuration Discard frames with source addresses not the supplicant address No traps Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines The command is relevant when Multiple hosts is disabled and the user has been successfully authenticated Examples The following example uses the forward action to forward frames with source addresses console config if Config VLAN dot1x single host violation forward trap 100 5 29 19 show dotlx advanced The show dot1x advanced privileged EXEC command displays 802 1X advanced features for the switch or for the specified interface Syntax show dot1x advanced ethernet interface interface Ethernet interface Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mod
89. the table is queried e Address Table Sort Specifies the means by which the Dynamic MAC Address Table is sorted The address table can be sorted by e VLAN e Address Key e Interface Add to List Use the button to apply the static MAC address settings 4 12 3 Dynamic Address The Dynamic Address Table contains the MAC addresses learned by monitoring the source address for traffic entering the switch When the destination address for inbound traffic is found in the database the packets intended for that address are forwarded directly to the associated port Otherwise the traffic is flooded to all ports The Dynamic Address screen see figure 4 70 contains parameters for querying information in the Dynamic MAC Address Table including the interface type MAC addresses VLAN and table storing The Dynamic MAC Address table contains information about the aging time before a dynamic MAC address is erased and includes parameters for querying and viewing 139 the Dynamic MAC Address table The Dynamic MAC Address table contains address parameters by which packets are directly User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 forwarded to the ports The Dynamic Address Table can be sorted by interface VLAN and MAC Address Address Aging 300 Sec Clear Table O Query C Port Port LAG C MAC Address C LAN ID Address Table Sort Key VLAN v tg Previous Ne ut gt gt LAN ID MAC Port VLAN 1 00 0e a6 0f 8b 92 es VLAN
90. the usage guidelines hostname Hostname of the server Range 1 160 characters poll Enable polling key keyed Authentication key to use when sending packets to this peer Range 1 4294967295 Default Configuration No servers are defined Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Up to 8 sntp servers can be defined Use the sntp unicast client enables global configuration command to enable predefined unicast clients globally To enable polling you should also use the sntp unicast client poll global configuration command for global enabling Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command To define an SNTP server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Examples The following example configures the device to accept Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from the server on 192 1 1 1 Console config sntp server 192 1 1 1 192 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 5 15 show clock The show clock user EXEC command displays the time and date from the system clock Syntax show clock Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the time and date from the system clock Console show clock 15 29 03 Jun 17 2005 5 5 16 show sntp c
91. to ACLs The possible field range is 0 63 Matches the packet IP Precedence value to the ACE Either the DSCP value or the IP Precedence value is used to match packets to ACLs The possible field range is 0 7 Use the Add to List button when you add the configured IP Based ACLs to the IP Based ACL Table at the bottom of the screen 4 6 2 IP Based ACL Configure Sample This section shows how to build a IP Based ACL and apply to specify interface NW Sample Case Deny IP packets to specific Class C network gt Purpose Verify a positive and negative matches to network IP address with a Class C 24 bit mask no matter the rule defined as permit or deny 66 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 1 Any packets pass through the switch will be dropped if the Destination IP Addresses match specific Class C 2 Any packets pass through the switch will be forwarded if the Destination IP Addresses not match specific Class C gt Case Design Source IP Address Any Class C 172 16 0 0 255 255 255 0 Applied Interface Interface g1 gt Device Connection and Configuration Destination IP Address C cercai a WAN Permit gt Router S or L3 Switch WGSD y ACL Switch z ay UINN n Ethernet Switch Segment 1 Segment 2 192 168 0 x 24 172 16 0 x 24 172 16 0 0 259 255 255 0 The procedure as following m Create Deny ACL and add to list 1 DENY Rule Choose New ACL N
92. to all other Switches for permission to become the Root Bridge If it turns out that your Switch has the lowest Bridge Identifier it will become the Root Bridge Forward Delay Timer The Forward Delay can be from 4 to 30 seconds This is the time any port on the Switch spends in the listening state while moving from the blocking state to the forwarding state Observe the following formulas when setting the above parameters 2 Note Max Age _ 2 x Forward Delay 1 second Max Age _ 2 x Hello Time 1 second Port Priority A Port Priority can be from 0 to 255 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen as the Root Port Port Cost A Port Cost can be set from 0 to 65535 The lower the number the greater the probability the port will be chosen to forward packets 3 Illustration of STP A simple illustration of three switches connected in a loop is depicted in Figure 5 7 In this example you can anticipate some major network problems if the STP assistance is not applied If switch A broadcasts a packet to switch B switch B will broadcast it to switch C and switch C will broadcast it to back to switch A and so on The broadcast packet will be passed indefinitely in a loop potentially causing a network failure In this example STP breaks the loop by blocking the connection between switch B and C The decision to block a particular connection is based on the STP calculation of the most current Brid
93. to unlocked Once the mode is A Note changed the Lock Interface can be reinstated 86 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 7 6 Multiple Hosts The Multiple Hosts screen see figure 4 33 allows network managers to configure advanced port based authentication settings for specific ports and VLANs A 3 Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multiple Hosts Port el Y Enable Multiple Hosts O Action on Violation Discard v Enable Traps F Trap Frequency 10 Update z Action on Trap Number of gA Multiple Hosts Violation ee Frequency ae Violations e2 Single Discard False Not in auto mode 0 e3 Single Discard False 10 Not in auto mode 0 ed Single Discard False 10 Not in auto mode 0 e5 Single Discard False 10 Not in auto mode 0 eb Single Discard False 10 Not in auto mode 0 e7 Single Discard False 10 Not in auto mode 0 es Single Discard False 10 Not in auto mode 0 gi Single Discard False 10 Not in auto mode 0 q2 Single Discard False 10 Not in auto mode 0 Port is down or not present v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 33 Multiple Hosts screen The Page contains the following fields e Port e Enable Multiple Hosts e Action on Violation e Enable Traps e Trap Frequency Displays the port number for which advanced port based authentication is enabled When checked indicates that multiple hosts are enabled Multiple hosts must be enabled in order to either disable the ing
94. user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to configure the PVID for e8 when the interface is in general mode 351 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general pvid 234 5 27 13 switchport general ingress filtering disable The switchport general ingress filtering disable interface configuration command disables port ingress filtering To enable ingress filtering on a port use the no form of this command Syntax switchport general ingress filtering disable no switchport general ingress filtering disable Default Configuration Ingress filtering is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to enables port ingress filtering on e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general ingress filtering disable 5 27 14 switchport general acceptable frame type taggedonly The switchport general acceptable frame type tagged only interface configuration command discards untagged frames at ingress To enable untagged frames at ingress use the no form of this command Syntax switchport general acceptable frame type tagged only no switchport general acceptable frame type tagged only 352 Default Configuration All fr
95. version this version number is only for demonstration purposes Console gt show version SW version x x x xx date xx xxx xxxx time 17 34 19 Boot version x x x xx date xx xxx xxxx time 11 48 21 HW version x x x 5 24 Syslog Commands 5 24 1 logging on The logging on global configuration command controls error messages logging This command sends debug or error messages to a logging process which logs messages to designated locations asynchronously to the process that generated the messages To disable the logging process use the no form of this command 324 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax logging on no logging on Default Configuration Logging is enabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The logging process controls the distribution of logging messages to the various destinations such as the logging buffer logging file or syslog server Logging on and off for these destinations can be individually configured using the logging buffered logging file and logging global configuration commands However if the logging on command is disabled no messages are sent to these destinations Only the console receives messages Example The following example shows how logging is enabled Console config logging on 5 24 2 logging The logging global configuration command logs messages to a syslog server To delete the syslog server with the specified address f
96. when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment e Disabled which indicates the port is not participating in the Spanning Tree e Interface Priority Defines the interface priority for specified instance The default value is 128 e Path Cost Indicates the port contribution to the Spanning Tree instance The range should always be 1200 000 000 e Designated Bridge Where indicates that the bridge ID number that connects the link or shared LAN to ID the root e Designated Port ID By which indicates that the Port ID number on the designated bridge that connects the link or the shared LAN to the root e Designated Cost Indicates that the default path cost is assigned according to the method selected on the Spanning Tree Global Settings screen e Forward Transitions This indicates the number of times the port has changed from the Forwarding state to Blocking state e Remaining Hops Indicates the hops remaining to the next destination E MSTP Interface status table The page displays the current MST Interfaces configuration and status MSTP Interface Settings Previous 1 2 Next gt gt ataca Port Type Role Port Path Designated Designated Designated Forward Remain State Priority Cost Bridge ID Port ID Cost Transitions Hops oo elo NA NA NA 128 O NA O NA O NA OA A e2 MWA N A NJA 128 2000000 Nid Nid N A Nid N A e3 N A NJA NA 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A e4 N A NJA NA 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A e
97. 0 Default Configuration This default speed is 115200 Command Mode Line Configuration console mode 240 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command which is available only on the console line Examples The following example the baud rate is set to 19200 Console config line console Console config line speed 19200 5 12 3 exec timeout The exec timeout line configuration command sets the interval that the system waits until user input is detected To restore the default setting use the no form of this command Syntax exec timeout minutes seconds no exec timeout minutes Integer that specifies the number of minutes Range 0 65535 seconds Additional time intervals in seconds Range 0 59 Default Configuration The default configuration is 10 minutes Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines To specify no timeout enter the exec timeout 0 command Examples The following example configures the interval that the system waits until user input is detected to 20 minutes Console config line console Console config line exec timeout 20 5 12 4 show line The show line user EXEC command displays line parameters Syntax show line console telnet ssh 241 console Console terminal line telnet Virtual terminal for remote console access Telnet ssh V
98. 08 1 27 and subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address 131 108 1 27 255 255 255 0 5 10 2 ip address dhcp The ip address dhcp interface configuration command acquires an IP address on an interface from the Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol DHCP server To deconfigure any acquired address use the no form of this command The no ip address dhcp command deconfigures any IP address that was acquired thus sending a DHCPRELEASE message Syntax ip address dhcp hostname host name no ip address dhcp hostname Specifies the host name host name DHCP host name This name need not be the same as the host name entered in global configuration 231 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 mode Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet VLAN port channel out of band Ethernet User Guidelines The ip address dhcp command allows any interface to dynamically learn its IP address by using the DHCP protocol Some DHCP Servers require that the DHCPDISCOVER message have a specific host name The most typical usage of the ip address dhcp hostname host name command is when host name is the host name provided by the system administrator If a router is configured to obtain its IP address from a DHCP server it sends a DHCPDISCOVER message to provide information about itself to the DHCP server on
99. 0Mbps 1000Base T RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI 1 Bl DAt Bl_DA Bl_DB BI_DC BI_DC Bl_DB Bl DD O I NIDO oO BP OJN BI_DD MDI X BI_DB BI_DB BI_DA BI_DD BI_DD BI_DA BI_DC BI_DC MDI X Media Dependant Interface Cross Rx receive Rx receive Tx transmit Tx transmit Implicit implementation of the crossover function within a twisted pair cable or at a wiring panel while not expressly forbidden is beyond the scope of this standard A 2 RJ 45 cable pin assignment The standard cable RJ 45 pin assignment 380 The standard RJ 45 receptacle connector User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 There are 8 wires on a standard UTP STP cable and each wire is color coded The following shows the pin allocation and color of straight cable and crossover cable connection Straight Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 SIDE 2 Straight Cable 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SIDE 1 SIDE 2 SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE 1 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Orange 3 White Green 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6 Green 7 White Brown 8 Brown SIDE2 1 White Orange 2 Green 3 White Orange 4 Blue 5 White Blue 6
100. 1 ip address 176 242 100 100 255 255 255 0 duplex full speed 1000 interface ethernet 1 2 ip address 176 243 100 100 255 255 255 0 duplex full speed 1000 199 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 200 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 7 Ethernet Configuration Commands 5 7 1 interface ethernet The interface ethernet global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure an Ethernet type interface Syntax interface ethernet interface interface Valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables ports g1 for configuration Console config interface ethernet g1 Console config if 5 7 2 interface range ethernet The interface range ethernet global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple Ethernet type interfaces Syntax interface range ethernet port range all port range ist of valid ports to add Separate non consecutive ports with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports all All Ethernet ports Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode 201 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000
101. 15 41 43 SYS 5 CONFIG_I Configured from memory by console 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g0 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g1 changed 330 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g2 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet e3 changed state to down 5 24 10 show logging file The show logging file privileged EXEC command displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the logging file Syntax show logging file Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the state of logging and the syslog messages stored in the logging file Console show logging file Logging is enabled Console logging level debugging Console Messages 0 Dropped severity Buffer logging level debugging Buffer Messages 11 Logged 200 Max File logging level notifications File Messages 0 Dropped severity Syslog server 192 180 2 27 logging errors Messages 6 Dropp
102. 172 16 1 2 1645 1646 11 8 Global Global OOB RADIUS servers Port IP address Auth Acct TimeOut Retransmit Deadtime Source IP Priority 176 16 8 9 1645 1646 Global Global Global Global Global values TimeOut 3 Retransmit 3 Deadtime 0 Source IP 172 16 8 1 2 3 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 19 RMON Commands 5 19 1 show rmon statistics The show rmon statistics user EXEC command displays RMON Ethernet Statistics Syntax show rmon statistics ethernet interface number port channel port channel number interface number Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics for port g1 Console show rmon statistics ethernet g1 Port g1 Dropped 8 Octets 878128 Packets 978 Broadcast 7 Multicast 1 CRC Align Errors 0 Collisions O Undersize Pkts 0 Oversize Pkts 0 Fragments O Jabbers 0 64 Octets 98 65 to 127 Octets 0 128 to 255 Octets 0 256 to 511 Octets 0 512 to 1023 Octets 491 1024 to 1518 Octets 389 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Dropped The total number of events in which packets are dropped by the probe due to lack of resources This number is not a
103. 192000 bps Committed burst 9600 bytes Exceed action drop Class map C Policer type none Committed rate N A Committed burst N A Exceed action N A 5 17 7 qos map dscp queue The qos map dscp queue global configuration command modifies the DSCP to queue map To return to the default map use the no form of this command Syntax qos map dscp queue dscp list to queue id no qos map dscp queue e dscp list Specify up to 8 DSCP values separate each DSCP with a space Range 0 63 e queue d Enter the queue number to which the DSCP value corresponds QoS Commands gos trust Global Copyright O 2004 Marvell CONFIDENTIAL Doc No MV S200005 00 Rev C January 19 2004 Preliminary Document Classification Proprietary Information Page 147 Default Configuration The following table describes the default map 263 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Queue settings for 3 11 19 cannot be modified Example The following example maps DSCP values 33 40 and 41 to queue 1 Console config qos map dscp queue 33 40 41 to 1 5 17 8 qos trust Global The qos trust global configuration command can be used in basic mode to configure the system to trust state To return to the default state use the no form of this command Syntax qos trust cos dscp tcp udp port no qos trust cos Classifies ingress packets with th
104. 255 Port s GVRP Registration Dynamic Timers Status milliseconds Creation Enabled Normal Enabled Enabled Normal Enabled 222 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 8 9 show gvrp statistics The show gvrp statistics User EXEC command displays GVRP statistics Syntax show gvrp statistics ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet interface port channel number A valid trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows GVRP statistics information Console show gvrp statistics GVRP statistics rJE Join Empty Received rJin Join In Received rEmp Empty Received rLIn Leave In Received rLE Leave Empty Received rLA Leave All Received SJE Join Empty Sent sJIn Join In Sent sEmp Empty Sent sLIn Leave In Sent SLE Leave Empty Sent SLA Leave All Sent rJE rJin rEmp rLin sEmp sLin sLE 223 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 8 10 show gvrp error statistics The show gvrp error statistics user EXEC command displays GVRP error statistics Syntax show gvrp error statistics ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface Valid Ethernet interface port channel number A valid port channel trunk index Default Conf
105. 30 9441 62c1 128 25 FWD 57 32769 0002 4b29 7a00 128 25 FWD 57 32769 0002 4b29 7a00 128 65 The following example displays spanning tree information for port g1 Console show spanning tree ethernet g1 Interface Port ID Cost Designated Port ID Prio Nbr Cost Bridge ID Prio Nbr 38 32768 0030 9441 62c1 128 25 Spanning tree enabled Type point to point configured auto Port Fast no configured no Number of transitions to forwarding state 1 BPDU sent 2 received 120638 5 22 SSH and SLOGIN Commands 5 22 1 ip ssh port The ip ssh port global configuration command specifies the port to be used by the SSH server To use the default port use the no form of this command Syntax ip ssh port port number no ip ssh port port number Port number for use by the SSH server Range 1 65535 305 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration The default value is 22 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example specifies the port to be used by the SSH server as 8080 Console config ip ssh port 8080 5 22 2 ip ssh server The ip ssh server global configuration command enables the device to be configured from a SSH server To disable this function use the no form of this command Syntax ip ssh server no ip ssh server Default Configuration This default is SSH is disabl
106. 321 DIZ 9 1 SNOW USCN Sass cess see peet oases tina ite oes ce aes leet eter Bee ee 321 529 0 SNOW SESSIONS oes ipadeads heed ssa sth nas a dolo 322 SS A US A a even tt O O O E Dare A A Gan atiusa aAA 323 ZO POSTON VI e cea acetate 324 9 24 SVSIOG COMMA MOS vas aes ents oes a a E E ee eed eects iece see sane coed Soap cee soeed 324 e o y q apt ede tle bested orto ge na haven rude wld ebuild obadeed eat lean Serta es 324 5724A O aaa 325 9 24 S JOGGING CONSI a 326 524 4 logona BUNGIE as 327 5249 lOGGING Ue ts dd lo 327 5 246 CIC AA A oad 328 eer 27 MON Md a 328 5 240 Clean logging Her sti dt eds ds 329 D249 SMOW OO GING IPN q a debated ced uia Ae Oi eeenan ed edd cetee ae a relceeee 330 5 24 10 SHOW IOQGING MMS aiii A A Medan ens deus Rete bees hada A Rodin octb ES 331 9 24 Td SNOW SY SOS LIVES A ea nad Acie O Ad 332 525 TAGACS COMmMandS iS nae ae ee ee 333 3 20 lacas Sei NO oda 333 A A A a A A A a A 334 02059 ACA NU greiner a el ace naa 334 925A 1acacs Se ver SOUNCCHID aver escccectareecss E elaine ea ees Saeed sce aig E ec cebece vet AE a 335 D522 SNOW TAC AGS ria AAA AA 336 5 26 User Interface GOMMIANdS cipal brad ai 337 g 2O IRC pF C eerie ge pcre eC in ce OP Ea ere Oe ae oe ee eee CR or ee ee ee er ee ee ne ee ee 337 D202 Aale raa cee ee ee ee 338 SA anata saben laste os ialae cd Nenicds nsec tind needsaciataedencs a 338 A e O 339 0 20 90 EXI CONIL 339 AL arin em OO een ne AEP ee ee en een ene rere ene ese 340 EA SN E a o ee
107. 36 Quere Setting screen The page contains the following fields e Strict Priority e WRR e Queue e WRR Weight e of WRR Bandwidth 4 8 3 DSCP Settings This indicates that traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based strictly on the queue priority This indicates that traffic scheduling for the selected queue is based strictly on the WRR Shows the queue for which the queue settings are displayed The possible field range is 1 4 Which displays the WRR weights to queues Default Rate 1 2 4 8 Displays the amount of bandwidth assigned to the queue These values are fixed and are not user defined e 6 67 e 13 33 e 26 67 e 53 33 The DSCP Settings screen see figure 4 37 enables mapping DSCP values to specific queues 91 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 gt PLANET E ras e o oni AAA j tomara cari Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS DSCP Settings DSCP Queue DSCP Queue DSCP Queue DSCP Queue 0 y 16 2 32 3i 48 1 m 17 2 33 30 49 4 y 2 1 isa 18 2 34 3 il 50 4w 3 T 19 al 35 51 4 1 20 2 36 3 52 4 5 E 21 2 3 37 EN 53 4 wl 6 EN 22 23 38 39 54 EN 7 m 23 20 39 39 55 4 8 m 24 2 3 40 3 56 4 9 14 25 a 41 319 57 43 10 rt ie 26 2 42 3 al 58 EN 11 i 27 2 43 i 59 iv 12 le 28 Iv 44 3 w 60 4y 13 1 29 2 45 39 61 EN 14 il vl 30 2 46 3 62 4 al 15 1 e 31 2 47 3 y 63 14 7 Y Figure 4 37 DSCP Settings screen The DSCP Settings screen
108. 5 4 12 port security routed secure address The port security routed secure address interface configuration command adds MAC layer secure addresses to a routed port Use the no form of this command to delete the MAC addresses Syntax port security routed secure address mac address no port security routed secure address mac address mac address Specify a MAC address Default Configuration No addresses are defined Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel Cannot be configured for a range of interfaces range context User Guidelines The command enables adding secure MAC addresses to a routed ports in port security mode The command is available when the port is a routed port and in port security mode The address is deleted if the port exits the security mode or is not a routed port 177 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example In this example the MAC layer address 66 66 66 66 66 66 is added to port g1 console config interface ethernet g1 console config if port security routed secure address 66 66 66 66 66 66 5 4 13 show bridge address table The show bridge address table privileged EXEC command displays all entries in the bridge forwarding database Syntax show bridge address table vlan vlan ethernet interface port channel port channel number vlan Specific valid VLAN such as VLAN 1 Interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number
109. 8000 ore eg MO NU S AA Ta eee E apeiron E ne emer Sat OR ae er ee ee A OR eee Peer E E ee ee ee ee 168 Bis ESO USES AC COUING 5 aerating re tates ace ae tea e 168 D4 Address Table Command Sd e ea 169 541 Didge A FOS AAA A Sea Ua ve espera A A A aAA 169 SA2 ie CG AS UT CS LIN as aa a a ia cn eed ete eee en el al eo 170 54 3 pidge MUINICASE address ia e VA a a ad 170 5 4 4 bridge multicast forbidden addressS ccoooncccoconnncccoconocononconononononcnnononnnnonnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnrnrnnnnronrnnornnnnenonrnnenonens 171 3 4 5 bridge multicast forward unregistered ooocccooncccccoccnccnconoconcnnononononnncnnnnnnrnnonnnrnnnnnrrnrnnnrnrrnnrrnnnrnnrnnrnnnrnrrnnnrnnnnneos 172 5 4 6 bridge multicast forbidden forward uUNregisStered coooccccooncccococcnconoconononcnnonoronononcnnnnnnnnnonnnrnnnnnrrnnnnnronennnnnnnnneos 173 54 7 bridge multicast O aces 174 5 4 8 bridge multicast forbidden forward all ccccccsecceecseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeesseeeeeseeeeesseeeeessaeeeeseeeeesaeeeesaeees 174 5 4 9 DOGS ading IME rert sisma r e Eia aaa e a etna a AE 175 IN A E A A 176 SAT PO Secundaria aiii a 176 5 4 12 port security routed secure addresS micro 177 5 4 13 show Brage adaress talar ir Rd ia 178 54 14 ShoW brage adaress tableStalliun A Aaa 179 5 4 15 show bridge address table CO a ani ie ele 179 5 4 16 show brage multicastaddresstable ui is 180 5 4 17 show bridge multicast filtering ooocccococnnccc
110. AO RAMON SOM Man aint oil cent neisevedtees ona eleseeet 274 SE o A noses ieis ia e e a a sa 274 S192 TIMOR COM CLIO USO sd sa 2 6 5 19 63 SNOW FIMO CONECIION STO Varroa ad 276 DAIA SNOW MON PISTO sosa a a o rae 217 A RA 280 OS NOW FIMO AAN OA 281 9 197 SNOWAMOR AA e 282 IO NON dio iio ote ols 284 LO SHOWN TIMO OVS MS ostia a oi 285 BASA O SNOW ON O a ia 286 O TON WADIC SIZC es a ao 287 5 20 NMECOMMANO Sussie ia otto beens ernst hese 288 5 20 1 snmp server COMMUNITY ai A A an 288 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 x202 SMM HSO Ver conta waar hd ct sah aN A re Ne at Oita Date aS ak A es ace aR ae 289 5 20 3 ShIMD SErver lOCALOM ss neni eae A a 290 5 20 ASMP SENEL Chale aD Sis cesses dd oc tani See e dd Cues di di 290 5 20 5 snmp server trap authentication ccocccoccccocncocncccnnnncnnonnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnennnnns 291 3 20 00 SNMP SEVE NO a a a a ti aaah ea NS et 291 D207 SOMOS OVAS Ole rt o deceo RT 292 ZO SRON MIND oases nasa RCP Pao e no 293 5 21 Spanning Tree COMMAMNAS cccccccseeecceesceccauseccceueeecsuueeessucecsaueeessueeeseeeeeseueeessueeessesesssaecessegeessseeeesseeeeensegeeesas 295 5 2 Wed SPannild tee a aa 295 5 212 SPANNING Wee Modera AA eer 295 5 21 3 spa nning tree Or Wade il ld 296 5 21 4 spanning tree hello time ssutoeins arta rd idad diia 296 izado Span Ma ES mar age a 297 5 2 10 SpanNiInG WeS DIO a airada 298 522 1 SpaliMinG SC dis O ir
111. Authorized EAPOL Logoff Port Unauthorized E Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States The switch port state determines whether or not the client is granted access to the network The port starts in the unauthorized state While in this state the port disallows all ingress and egress traffic except for 802 1X protocol packets When a client is successfully authenticated the port transitions to the authorized state allowing all traffic for the client to flow normally If a client that does not support 802 1X is connected to an unauthorized 802 1X port the switch requests the client s identity In this situation the client does not respond to the request the port remains in the unauthorized state and the client is not granted access to the network In contrast when an 802 1X enabled client connects to a port that is not running the 802 1X protocol the client initiates the authentication process by sending the EAPOL start frame When no response is received the client sends the request for a fixed number of times Because no response is received the client begins sending frames as if the port is in the authorized state If the client is successfully authenticated receives an Accept frame from the authentication server the port state changes to authorized and all frames from the authenticated client are allowed through the port If the authentication fails the port remains in the unauthorized state but authentication can be retr
112. Console gt telnet 176 213 10 50 Esc U sends telnet EL 5 23 4 resume The resume command in EXEC mode is used to switch to another open Telnet session 319 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax resume connection connection The connection number The default is the most recent connection Default Configuration There is no default configuration for this command Command Mode EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following command switches to another open Telnet session Console gt resume 176 213 10 50 5 23 5 reload The reload privileged EXEC command reloads the operating system Syntax reload Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines Caution should be exercised when resetting the device to ensure that no other activity is being performed In particular the user should verify that no configuration files are being downloaded at the time of reset Example The following example reloads the operating system Console reload 320 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 23 6 hostname The hostname global configuration command specifies or modifies the device host name To remove the existing host name use the no form of the command Syntax hostname name no hostname name The device host name Default Configuration
113. D 8000 The default Engine ID is based on the device MAC address E Notification e SNMP Notifications which indicates if the device can send SNMP notifications e Authentication which indicates if SNMP Authentication failure notification is enabled on the device Notifications 4 11 2 Views SNMP Views provide access or block access to device features or feature aspects For example a view can be defined that states that SNMP Group A has Read Only R O access to Multicast groups while SNMP Group B has Read Write R W access to Multicast groups Feature access is granted via the MIB name or MIB Object ID refer to figure 4 60 View Name Default v New Yiew Name O Al f interfaces i i Subtree ID Tree Select from List ip Insert icmp tcp v Down View Type Included v Add to List Object ID Subtree View Type 1 Included 1 3 6 1 6 3 13 Excluded 1 3 6 1 6 3 16 Excluded 1 3 6 1 6 3 18 Excluded ob 631212 Excluded 1 3 6 1 6 3 12 1 3 Excluded Edd diia Excluded 19 4A1 OND 7 4 Eserb idad Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 60 SNMP View screen The page contains the following fields View Name Indicates the user defined views The options are as follows e Default which displays the default SNMP view for read and read write views e DefaultSuper indicates the default SNMP view for administrator views e Subtree ID Tree Indicates the device feature OID included or excluded in the selected SNMP view
114. Default Configuration 3600 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the number of seconds between re authentication attempts to 3600 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x timeout re authperiod 3600 5 29 6 dot1x re authenticate The dot1x re authenticate privileged EXEC command manually initiates a re authentication of all 802 1Xenabled ports or the specified 802 1X enabled port dot1x re authenticate ethernet interface interface The full syntax is unit port 366 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following command manually initiates a re authentication of the 802 1X enabled port Console config dot1x re authenticate ethernet e8 5 29 7 dot1x timeout quiet period The dot1x timeout quiet period interface configuration command sets the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange for example the client provided an invalid password Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout quiet period seconds no dot1x timeout quiet period seconds Time in secon
115. Drop are displayed For 10 100 interfaces the minimum reserved settings are displayed queuing Displays the queue strategy WRR or EF the weight for WRR queues the CoS to queue map and the EF priority shapers Displays the specified interface shaper and the shaper for the queue on the specified interface policers Displays all the policers configured for this interface their setting and the number of policers currently unused Default Configuration For VLAN interface only the policers option is relevant If no keyword is specified with the show qos interface command the port QoS mode default CoS value DSCPto DSCP mutation map if any attached to the port and policy map if any attached to the interface are displayed If a specific interface is not specified the information for all interfaces is displayed Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays output from the show qos interface ethernet e1 buffers command Console show qos interface ethernet e1 buffers Ethernet e1 Notify Q depth a Size 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 125 sf 1 2 3 4 5 6 T 8 Threshold 100 100 100 100 2 a 261 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 qid MinDPO MaxDPO ProbDPO MinDP1 MaxDP1 ProbDP1 MinDP2 MaxDP2 ProbDP2 Weight N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N A N
116. EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the syslog server settings Console show syslog servers Facility Description 192 180 Informational 192 180 2 285 Warning 332 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 25 TACACS Commands 5 25 1 tacacs server host The tacacs server host command in global configuration mode specifies a TACACS host To delete the specified name or address use the no form of this command Syntax tacacs server host p address hostname single connection port port number timeout timeout key keystring source source priority priority no tacacs server host p address p address Name or IP address of the host An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines hostname Hostname of the tacacs server Range 1 160 characters single connection Specify single connection Rather than have the device open and close a TCP connection to the daemon each time it must communicate the single connection option maintains a single open connection between the device and the daemon port number Specify a server port number If unspecified the port number defaults to 49 Range 0 65535 timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds If no timeout value is specified the global value is used Range 1 1000 key string Specifies the authe
117. Half transmission occurs in only one direction at a time This mode can be configured only when auto negotiation is disabled and port speed is set to 10Mbps or 100Mbps Shows the flow control status of the port It is active when the port uses Full Duplex Mode Shows the current mode of the LAG interface Click the Detail button for more detail port configuration Linkli Aggregation detail configuration At per LAG detail configuration page the administrator can select ports to be the members of the LAG interface The scree appears as follow 41 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 L4G Configuration LAG le Description LACP LAG Type Administrative Status Up Current Status Reactivate Suspended LAG Operational Status Active Admin Auto Negotiation Enable Current Auto Negotiation Admin Speed Current LAG Speed Admin Flow Control Disable Current Flow Control PYE None Select Ports el ez es ed es eb ef ed gl qe Port d d L d L d d L 4 3 3 LACP Aggregated Links can be manually setup or automatically established on the relevant links by enabling Link Aggregation Control Protocol LACP Aggregate ports can be linked into link aggregation port groups Each group is comprised of ports with the same speed set to full duplex operation The LACP screen contains fields for configuring LACP LAG s see figure 4 9 42 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 3 PLANET E Port Config V
118. ION 1 1 MAY 2007 Part No EM WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000_ v1 0 2081 A34030 001 29 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION ee emer entre ne eee a di e a a ee o 14 FIOW to Use IMIS AIVIAIN alii aaa e 14 o e A ge eee A rete ene re eg ne ee eee ee eee te op ee eee cee en err ae 15 Produc SPECIES o e 16 ZAIN TALA FION A e Pe ee ee ee eee 18 Zl FOOUCE DO SCHIDTON eric tii 18 Zl ROGGE ON CIV EW isa 0 vice ect a ce te e ae hace aah ea es 18 2 12 SWICK Front Rane micia 18 ZA LED MGIC AOS a seas ieee nested la eee 19 q SA deduced bawevedopineuaunedthaielaauen E 19 ZZ MVS A 20 ZZANDOSKIOO INSTA OM y o de 20 22A RACK MOUNU eiseres siustis ton ie cros edt ei ntaesodahuaat ethane tunic eveh wrens abate ob Wee reen exon cassette OA 21 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver cccccceccccssececceeececcesececsuucecceueeesseueeecsuuceeseeceesegeeessseeessaueesseueeesseeeeesseesesseneeesas 22 37 CONE GER ATION ua a a o ed tata at eh OE a ete edn a ere a O 24 IN Management ACCES DI A its 24 SLAMS STAIN CONS oido ls to di tl 25 AA CL ACCES AA e PUE aad ax cvactaamacch a aa a a laieartualoraiestaes 25 SAWED Manage Medi diosa 26 3 3 SNMP Based Network Management c ccccssecccceseeeceeseecceuseecceuseecseseeeceaseessaueeecsaneeessuseesseeeessaueeeseueeessegesesseseeessass 26 AE FOO CONS A oo O a eaee ee aes 26 AV UN Terminal Protool sr sects sacha tenia ias dano 26 iF Z7SINIVIPHP O 26 34
119. Informational Informational Informational Informational Informational Informational Informational Informational Informational Informational v Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 81 Memory Logs screen The log number in the Log File Table Specifies the time at which the log was entered in the Log File Table Specifies the log severity The log message text 4 12 13 Flash Logs The Flash Log screen see figure 4 82 contains information about log entries saved to the Log File in FLASH the time that the log generated the log severity and description of the log message The Message Log is available after reboot 151 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Y PLANET Ketwoties b Commesicatoe Multicast SNMP Admin Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree LogOut Log Index LogTime Severity Description O1 Jan S HTTP_HTTPS E 1 214781854000 22 22 31 EM SETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set tag bxt_ipAdEntNetMask repeat which does not exist in the page O1 Jan S HTTP_HTTPS E 2 2147482035 2000 22 22 31 EMO GETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntAddr repeat which does not exist in the page D1 Jan S HTTP_HTTPS E IS 2000 22 21 33 Em SETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntNetMask repeat which does not exist in the page O1 Jan S HTTP_HTTPS E 4 2147482400 2000 22 21 33 1 EMO SETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set ta
120. LA Config Statistics AC System Priority LACP System Priority 1 65535 1 Port Priority Port el M LACP Port Priority a a LACP Timeout Long Y Admin Key lo Update LACP Port Table Port Admin Key Port Priority LACP Timeout ES E 2 e2 0 1 Long 3 e3 0 1 Long 4 e4 0 1 Long 5 e5 0 1 Long 6 e6 0 1 Long 7 e 0 1 Long 8 es 0 1 Long 9 gl 0 1 Long F 10 g2 0 1 Long v Figure 4 9 LACP configuration screen The page contains the following fields e LACP System Indicates the global LACP priority value The possible range is 1 65535 and the default value is 1 Priority e Port Set the port number which need to timeout and the priority values are assigned e LACP Port Priority Where set the LACP priority value for the port and the field range is 1 65535 e LACP Timeout Administrative LACP timeout A short or long timeout value can be selected Long is the default e Admin Key A channel will only be formed between ports having the same admin key in other words this only applies to ports located on the same switch 4 4 VLAN Configuration A Virtual LAN VLAN is a logical network grouping that limits the broadcast domain It allows you to isolate network traffic so only members of the VLAN receive traffic from the same VLAN members Basically creating a VLAN from a switch is logically equivalent of reconnecting a group of network devices to another Layer 2 switch However all the network devices are still plug into the same switch physically
121. MP Versions 1 and 2 Multicast groups allow members to join or leave at any time IGMP provides the method for members and multicast routers to communicate when joining or leaving a multicast group IGMP version 1 is defined in RFC 1112 It has a fixed packet size and no optional data The format of an IGMP packet is shown below IGMP Message Format Octets 0 8 1 6 31 Group Address all zeros if this is a query The IGMP Type codes are shown below Type Meaning 0x11 Membership Query if Group Address is 0 0 0 0 0x11 Specific Group Membership Query if Group Address is Present 0x16 Membership Report version 2 0x17 Leave a Group version 2 0x12 Membership Report version 1 IGMP packets enable multicast routers to keep track of the membership of multicast groups on their respective sub networks The following outlines what is communicated between a multicast router and a multicast group member using IGMP A host sends an IGMP report to join a group A host will never send a report when it wants to leave a group for version 1 A host will send a leave report when it wants to leave a group for version 2 Multicast routers send IGMP queries to the all hosts group address 224 0 0 1 periodically to see whether any group members exist on their sub networks If there is no response from a particular group the router assumes that there are no group members 118 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000
122. MS dias didas 236 Sa aep systems ONON cerrara a aa oie e ci ol ecos 236 9 11 2 18400 POrEPNO NV asii dai 237 TESA EAA ED E a a o a a O 237 e A o uu A E 238 De SOW lach DOr ehane karsa dedica duo di 239 512 SG OMNIS ie tiido dido laicas 240 A ee ee eee 240 A OE eT aE er ee PP et ene OnE are ane ieee ee 240 912 0 KSC UM erro ad 241 A A A a e O o seinen aoe aie 241 9 19 ManagementACl Commands canis eee i oe ee he el th ae 242 5 13 1management acCCeSSAllSt atic A oa 242 132 PM a do a eee 244 9 13 39 deny Management isc ina aerated aesa A ere aAa daa 244 5 19 2 management acces scan as 245 5 190 shnowmanagementaccessAlSbouitmaa a a a a R A ads 246 SRC gio s t eet A a ee ee ee er ere 246 5 13 6 show management access claSsS iii ia eRatnonactalash eNed Gencreudehes uibactslauua Auteanentans 247 SARA Diagnostics COI VAIS eases ica da ee Dasa NA ae oh E a RA 247 5 14 1 16S ECON A ce ih eet ee ce ee ee eh tee ce 247 D142 SNOW COPPE PONS ON acts ot ioc saad cece ona hes tetas dica dun dad 248 5 14 3 show copper ports cable length coocccocccoocococcncocncnncocncnnonnnoncnonnnnnnnonnrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnncnnnnns 249 5 14 4 show fiber ports optical transceiver occcconnccccnnccccnccnnncconnnonnnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnarnnnaninenans 249 SS Pot Channel Commande iaa cin o do cuss codecs LA e ia edad 201 5151 IME MACE DOF channel resse E Un e 251 5 15 2 interface range POrt CNANNE l
123. Mode e Class of Service e Queue This indicates if QoS is enabled on the interface The possible values are e Disable disables QoS on the interface e Basic enables QoS on the interface e Advanced enables the Advanced Mode QoS on the interface Specifies the CoS priority tag values where zero is the lowest and 7 is the highest Defines the traffic forwarding queue to which the CoS priority is mapped Four traffic priority queues are supported The Restore Defaults button restores the device factory defaults for mapping CoS values to a forwarding queue m CoS Default The Table contains the following fields e Interface e Default CoS e Restore Defaults e LAG 4 8 2 Queue Setting Interface to which the CoS configuration applies Determines the default CoS value for incoming packets for which a VLAN tag is not defined The possible field values are 0 7 The default CoS is 0 Restores the device factory defaults for mapping CoS values to a forwarding queue LAG to which the CoS configuration applies The Queue Setting screen see figure 4 36 contains fields for defining the QoS queue forwarding types 90 Queue w Ne User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Near Security Queue Settings A Strict Priority WRR O Scheduling of WRR aes Bandwidth 1 6 67 Z Iaa 4 26 67 3 53 33 Note WRR Weights are shown for reference only Y Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4
124. N Creation e GVRP Registration e Update Enables and disables GVRP on the device Displays the interface on which GVRP is enabled Possible field values are Port indicates the port number on which GVRP is enabled LAG indicates the LAG number on which GVRP is enabled When the checkbox is checked GVRP is enabled on the interface When the checkbox is checked Dynamic VLAN creation is enabled on the interface When the checkbox is checked VLAN registration through GVRP is enabled on the device The Update button adds the configured GVRP setting to the table at the bottom of the screen 50 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 5 Statistics The Statistic of the switch This field includes these parts as below 4 5 1 RMON Statistic The RMON Statistics screen refer to figure 4 16 contains fields for viewing information about device utilization and errors that occurred on the device Config Statistics ACL Security Oc RMON Statistics Interface O pot fet w O tac Refresh Rate No Refresh Drop Events Received Bytes Octets Received Packets Broadcast Packets Received O 2 oo 0 Multicast Packets Received CRC amp Align Errors Undersize Packets Oversize Packets Fragments Jabbers O O O oF 0 Collisions Frames of 64 Bytes Frames of 65 to 127 Bytes Frames of 128 to 255 Bytes Frames of 256 to 511 Bytes Frames of 512 to 1023 Bytes Frames of 1024 to 1632 Bytes
125. Ord o o id OE o 354 5 27 17 switchport general map protocols group VIAN c ooocccccnccccccocnnncncnononncnnncnnnnnnnncnonononnnonnrnnnnnonnnnnncnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnss 355 527 Culp Intemal Usage Via ae a oi A UE ios 355 BM EINNA E EE ec gee A T eters ae eat yon astra aia a E heen pein E eee ate ata 356 5 27 20 SHOW Viahiinte Mal USAGE io a ar Ae et ch aie Sa eed el aa eee ts 357 5 27 22 SNOW Mtertaces SWIICNDO Ms 357 5 28 WOD Sel Vem C OMMAN Ss dd os se natuslabet 359 MA A A 359 A A A ee 359 920 SID AUS SO VO a dls 360 ao 674 i 61 0 4 1 6 dale A na a tee cee ml oe eae neo 361 5 28 5 crypto certificate generate ccceccccsssccccseececceeeccsuscecceueeecauueeecsuececseueeecsuueeessecesseueeessaaueeessuecessegeeessueseesaaeees 361 920 0 SNOW AND mmmcare tre ere ee mcr a Seer a OR Oe a aR ree ee ae ee 362 5 26 7 SMOW AD MNOS ssn E ee eee ete ee a eee ete co 362 D2 GOZA COMMMANG S io aes a id 363 5 29 laada AUIMENUCATION do rinitis 363 D292 COLI System ALI CO a 364 S29 9 GOX PON COMMON 5220s resected de ol dede dE 364 5 29 4 Ol 1X e AUING MLC ATOM A ata 365 5 29 5 dot1x timeout re AUtNPELiOd cccccceeccsscccseeceeecceeeceeeceuecceeceeeceueesaeeseueceueesaeeseeessueeeaeessasecseessusesaeesseeseeseneeess 366 ZO OUI TS AUIS la 366 5 29 7 GOt1X UMEOUL OUIET PENO sais isos coh eet oe ee cae eerie ae aie ene ate gett eee a 367 529 001 TIMCOUL LE PETO told di cie duo Ll 368 AS 8 MAX TE AA A A 368 3 29 100 UNMECUL SU AIM a O
126. Out 3 Source IP 172 16 8 1 OOB Source IP 176 16 8 1 5 26 User Interface Commands 5 26 1 enable The enable user EXEC command enters the privileged EXEC mode Syntax enable privilege level privilege level Privilege level to enter the system Range 1 15 Default Configuration The default privilege level is 15 Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to enter privileged mode Console gt enable enter password Console 337 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 26 2 disable The disable privileged EXEC command returns to User EXEC mode Syntax disable privilege level privilege level Privilege level to enter the system Range 1 15 Default Configuration The default privilege level is 1 Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to return to normal mode Console disable Console gt 5 26 3 configure The configure privileged EXEC command enters the global configuration mode Syntax configure There are no parameters for this command Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In the following examp
127. P In addition Multiple STP transmits packets assigned to different VLANs through different MST regions MST regions act as a single bridge 4 9 1 STP Status The STP Status screen see figure 4 45 describes the STP status on the device ty QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut STP Status Spanning Tree State Disable Spanning Tree Mode Classic STP Bridge ID 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 D0 Designated Root 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 D0 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Root Maximum Age sec Root Hello Time sec Root Forward Delay sec Topology Changes Counts Last Topology Change 20 2 15 0 OD 2H 59M 375 Figure 4 45 STP Status screen The page contains the following fields e Spanning Tree State By which indicates if STP is enabled on the device e Spanning Tree Mode By which indicates the STP mode by which STP is enabled on the device e Bridge ID Where identifies the Bridge priority and MAC address e Designated Root This indicates the ID of the bridge with the lowest path cost to the instance ID Where indicates the port number that offers the lowest cost path from this bridge to the Root Bridge It is significant when the Bridge is not the Root e Root Port The default is zero 106 e Root Path Cost e Root Maximum Age sec e Root Hello Time sec e Root Forward delay sec e Topology Changes Counts e Last Topology Change User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Where t
128. RADIUS daemon To reset to the default use the no form of this command Syntax radius server key key string no radius server key key string Specifies the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the RADIUS server This key must match the encryption used on the RADIUS daemon The key can be up to 128 characters long Default Configuration The default is an empty string Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS daemon to abc server Console config radius server key abc server 5 18 3 radius server retransmit The radius server retransmit global configuration command specifies the number of times the software searches the list of RADIUS server hosts To reset the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax radius server retransmit retries no radius server retransmit Default Configuration The default is 3 attempts Command Mode Global Configuration mode 270 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the number of times the software searches the list of RADIUS server hosts to 5 attempts Console config radius server
129. TOS field in IP Packet IGMP Snooping Allow to be disabled or enable Supports IGMP Snooping v1 and v2 RFC 1213 MIB 2 RFC 2863 Interface MIB RFC 2665 EtherLike MIB RFC 1493 Bridge MIB RFC 2674 Extended Bridge MIB RFC 2819 RMON MIB Group 1 2 3 and 9 RFC 2737 Entity MIB RFC 2618 RADIUS Client MIB Standards Conformance Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE IEEE802 3 10BASE T IEEE802 3u 100BASE TX 100BASE FX IEEE802 3z Gigabit SX LX IEE802 3ab Gigabit 1000T IEEE802 3x Flow Control and Back pressure Standards Compliance IEEE802 3ad Port trunk with LACP IEEE802 1d Spanning tree protocol IIEEE802 1w Rapid spanning tree protocol IEEE802 1p Class of service IEEE802 1Q VLAN Tagging Environment Regulation Compliance FCC Part 15 Class A CE Operating Temperature 0 C 50C Storage Temperature 40 C 70C Operating Humidity 5 to 90 relative humidity non condensing Storage Humidity 5 to 90 relative humidity non condensing 7 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 2 INSTALLATION This section describes the functionalities of the Switch s components and guides how to install it on the desktop or shelf Basic knowledge of networking is assumed Please read this chapter completely before continuing 2 1 Product Description The PLANET WGSD Series are Full Managed Desktop Switches with gigabit interfaces equipped It boasts a high performance switch architecture that is capable of
130. The options to select the following Subtree 126 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Select from List Select the Subtree from the list provided e Insert Enables a Subtree not included in the Select from List field to be entered e View Type This indicates if the defined OID branch will be included or excluded in the selected SNMP view Add to List Use the button when you want to add the Views configuration to the Views Table at the bottom of the screen 127 4 11 3 Group Profile User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The Group Profile screen see figure 4 61 provides information for creating SNMP groups and assigning SNMP access control privileges to SNMP groups Groups allow network managers to assign access rights to specific device features or features aspects Group Profile Log Table Group Name Security Model SNMPyv1 vw Security Level Operation C Read O write O Notify Group Name Security Model Security Level Operation Read Write Notify Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 61 Group Profile screen The page contains the following fields e Group Name e Security Model e Security Level e Privacy e Operation Displays the user defined group to which access control rules are applied The field range is up to 30 characters Defines the SNMP version attached to the group The possible field values are e SNMPvi defined for the group e SNMPv2 defined for the gro
131. This command enables traffic on one port to be copied to another port or between the source port src interface and a destination port the port being configured Only a single target port can be defined per system The port being monitored cannot be set faster than the monitoring port The following restrictions apply to ports configured to be destination ports The port cannot be already configured as a source port 254 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The port cannot be a member in a port channel An IP interface is not configured on the port GVRP is not enabled on the port The port is not a member in any VLAN except for the default VLAN will automatically be removed from the default VLAN The following restrictions apply to ports configured to be source ports Port monitoring Source Ports must be simple ports and not port channels The port cannot be already configured as a destination port All the frames are transmitted as either always tagged or always untagged Refer to the port monitor vlan tagging command below General Restrictions Ports cannot be configured as a group using the interface range ethernet command Note The Port Mirroring target must be a member of the Ingress VLAN of all Mirroring source ports Therefore multicast and broadcast frames in these VLANs are seen more than once Actually N where N is the number of mirroring source ports When both transmit Tx and receive Rx d
132. US servers provide additional security for networks RADIUS servers provide a centralized authentication method for web access see figure 4 28 Cat ls 3 Parameters IP Address RADIUS ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree N 192 168 1 51 Priority o Authentication Port 11812 Number of Retries Timeout for Reply 13 i Sec Dead Time lo Min Key String 112345678 Alpha Numeric Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 Usage Type Lagin Y Priority futhentica Number of Timeout Dead Source Usage Address tion Port Retries for Reply Time IP Address Type 192 168 1 51 0 1612 3 3 0 0 0 0 0 Login kerr v Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 28 RADIUS screen The Page contains the following fields e IP Address e Priority e Authentication Port e Number of Retries e Timeout for Reply The Authentication Server IP address Displays the server priority The possible values are 0 65535 where 1 is the highest value The RADIUS Server priority is used to configure the server query order Identifies the authentication port The authentication port is used to verify the RADIUS server authentication The authenticated port default is 1812 Defines the number of transmitted requests sent to RADIUS server before a failure occurs The possible field values are 1 10 Three is the default value This defines the amount of the time in seconds the device waits for an answer from the RADIUS server before retryin
133. User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 3 PLANET Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin Logout Advanced Mode Policy Settings Out of Profile DSCP Assignments Select Policy Policy Settings Class Map Settings Class Map Trust Action C Set 05c New Yalue 0 63 Police Type gt Aggregate Policer Aggregate Policer Settings Ingress Committed Information Rate CIR Kbits per Second Ingress Committed Burst Size CBS Me Bytes Exceed Action Interface to Policy Policy Content Aggregate z CIR CBS Exceed Action Remove Policer Name Class Map Trust Set Attribute Set Yalue Type View Interface to Policy Figure 4 40 Advance Mode screen MAC ACLs and IP ACLs can be grouped together in more complex structures called policies Policies can be applied to an interface Policy ACLs are applied in the sequence they appear within the policy Only a single policy can be attached to a port In advanced QoS mode ACLs can be applied directly to an interface in the Security ACL Binding However a policy and ACL cannot be simultaneously applied to an interface After assigning packets to a specific queue services such as configuring output queues for the scheduling scheme or configuring output shaping for burst size CIR or CBS per interface or per queue can be applied ignments this button opens up the DSCP Map screen see figure 4 41 95 U
134. User Guidelines Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each active interface in the range If the command returns an error on one of the active interfaces it does not stop executing commands on other active interfaces Example The following example shows how ports e1 to e4 and ports g1 to g2 are grouped to receive the same command Console config interface range ethernet e1 e4 g1 g2 Console config if 5 7 3 shutdown The shutdown interface configuration command disables interfaces To restart a disabled interface use the no form of this command Syntax shutdown no shutdown Default Configuration The interface is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel out of band Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example disables Ethernet e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if shutdown The following example re enables Ethernet port e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if no shutdown 202 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 7 4 description The description interface configuration command adds a description to an interface To remove the description use the no form of this command Syntax description string no description string Comment or a description of the port up to 64 characters
135. VLAN 4 VLAN 5 VLAN 6 VLAN 7 VLAN 6 VLAN 9 VLAN 10 VLAN 11 VLAN 12 VLAN 13 VLAN 14 VLAN 15 Instance ID 0 7 0 ee es eS ee a a a IO Figure 4 52 MSTP VLAN Instance Configuration screen Defines the VLAN group to which the interface is assigned Where maps the selected VLAN to the selected instance Each VLAN belongs to one instance Specifies the selected spanning tree instance device priority The field range is 0 61440 which indicates the ID of the bridge with the lowest path cost to the instance ID Where indicates the selected instance s root port Indicates the selected instance s path cost Indicates the bridge ID of the selected instance Indicates the number of hops remaining to the next destination 115 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 9 7 MSTP Interface Settings Network Administrators can assign MSTP Interface settings using the MSTP Interface Settings screen see figure 4 53 MSTP Interface Settings Instance ID 1 Interface Port el Y LAG Port State NjA Type NjA Role nia Interface Priority 128 Path Cost 2000000 C use Default Designated Bridge ID NjA Designated Port ID NjA Designated Cost nia Forward Transitions nia Remain Hops nia Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 53 MSTP Interfance Settings screen The MSTP Interface Settings screen contains the following fields e Instance ID Lists the MSTP instances configured on the device Possible f
136. VLAN Name e Status To remove a VLAN click the Remove button 4 4 2 Port setting In this port setting screen refer to figure 4 11 the parameters managing ports that are part of a VLAN will be provided and you can set the default VLAN ID PVID All untagged packets arriving to the device are tagged by the ports PVID Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Port Setting lt lt Previous 1 2 Wext gt gt Port Mode See P ID cios LAG Frame Type Filtering el Access Y e2 Access v e3 Access Y et Access es Access e6 Access v e7 Access es Access iM gl Access v g2 Access v Figure 4 11 VLAN Port Setting screen The page contains the following fields 45 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Port Displays the port number included in the VLAN e Mode Indicates the port mode Possible values are e General The port belongs to VLANs and each VLAN is user defined as tagged or untagged full 802 1Q mode e Access The port belongs to a single untagged VLAN When a port is in Access mode the packet types which are accepted on the port packet type cannot be designated It is also not possible to enable disable ingress filtering on an access port e Trunk The port belongs to VLANs in which all ports are tagged except for an optional single native VLAN e Acceptable Frame Packet type accepted on the port Possible values are Type e
137. WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Address IP address of the remote host Port Telnet TCP port number Byte Number of unread bytes for the user to see on the connection 5 23 9 show system The show system user EXEC command displays system information Syntax show system Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the system information console show system System Description System Up Time days hour min sec 01 02 48 20 System Contact System Name System Location System MAC Address 00 03 6d 30 57 00 System Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 89 1 1 Temperature Indicates the temperature at which the device is currently running The device temperature is displayed in Celsius The device temperature threshold is O 40 C 32 104F The following table displays the temperature in Fahrenheit in increments of 5 Celsius Fahrenheit 0 32 5 41 10 50 323 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 15 59 20 68 25 77 30 86 35 95 40 104 5 23 10 show version The show version user EXEC command displays the system version information Syntax show version Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays a system
138. WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The following example enables the device to use the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to request and accept Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from servers console config sntp unicast client enable 5 5 13 sntp unicast client poll The sntp unicast client poll global configuration command enables polling for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP predefined unicast clients To disable the polling for SNTP client use the no form of this command Syntax sntp unicast client poll no sntp unicast client poll This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Examples The following example enables polling for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP predefined unicast clients console config sntp unicast client poll 5 5 14 sntp server The sntp server global configuration command configures the device to use the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to request and accept Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from a server To remove a server from the list of NTP servers use the no form of this command Syntax sntp server p address hostname poll key keyia no sntp server host p address IP address of the server An out of band IP address can be specified as described in
139. a aN TRE 222 510 SOW ECV SAS UGSA eraa Aaa 223 58 10 ShOW OVID CFOF SIAlISIICS uscar aa 224 5 0 IOMP SNo0PNE Commands seinas a a a a r nd sli 225 5 9 TIPOM SNOOPNG Global ieai aa e aa li 225 5 FZ QMO SNGOPING UC ACS a S 225 S9 P IGIMD SMOO DING MOET isisi dc iaa aA cies EEEE AEAEE TRE 226 LIA PIME SMOODING NOSHIME OUt assan a a e a a a aa e a a 226 5 9 5 ip IGMP snooping mrouter time 0Ut 0 eee ce cece ccc ee eee e eee ee ee eee se ees e seca eee se eese Sess cess eesaeesss sess essa setae eesaeesaeesaeeeaaeees 22 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 9 6 Ip IGMP SMOOPING le aVE IMGE OUT coisas la ah E Sk ek o aA ee 228 5 9 7 SNOW Ip IGMP SNOOPING MOUTET csi hates ieee ens a a ee 228 5 9 6 SNOW Ip IGIMP SNOOPING INLEM ACE dl eo tdi 229 5 9 9 SNOW IP IFMP SNOOPING QLOUNS ossiani aie aiaa eee se eee nn a aa a etsa ease Seta RA 230 SIOP Addiessing Commands a o tl Bi eal elena 231 A AA eee ene ere AP a eee ee een ee eee eae 231 OZ lo GOSS o Po eet a 231 5 10 3 ip default gateway cccccccsssccccseseeceescecceececseeeeecsuueecseueeessueeeseuseeceueeessaueeessaesesseuseeecseusesssuseessueeesseesessaaeees 232 510s SNOW DIMNA e na e da o a eh o A eae tl AN ce eh eh a O 233 arid JN a lament pet et tr oa ee Pr eg ee ee eee 234 A INT On EEN Ce Sac anSse rn erat nen ORR rk ay anda RRE ER eee MET een ee 234 o fi E PETES REEN EE E IEN EES EE E E A E ETE E E ees 235 IOO SNOW Doa eect eter eS ne E eee eee ee 235 SA LAGO M
140. actory Reset screen see figure 4 79 allows network managers to reset the device to the factory defaults settings but if you restore factory defaults results in erasing the configuration file Although restoring the factory defaults will erase your configuration you can save a backup of your current configuration settings from the Admin Save Configuration screen gt Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Factory Default Factory Default Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 79 Factory Default screen 148 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 12 11 Server Logs The Global Log Parameters page contains fields for enabling logs globally and fields for defining log parameters The Severity log messages are listed from the highest severity to the lowest Event messages have a unique format as per the SYSLOG RFC recommended message format for all error reporting For example Syslog local device reporting Messages are assigned a severity code and include a message mnemonic which identifies the source application generating the message Messages are filtered based on their urgency or relevancy The severity of each message determines the set of event logging devices to which are sent for each event logging device The following table contains the Log Severity Levels Severity Type Severity Description Level 1 The system needs immediate Main system me
141. address format oob ip address Keywords Table Options Description echo Enables local echo quiet Prevents onscreen display of all messages from the software source interface Specifies the source interface stream Turns on stream processing which enables a raw TCP stream with no Telnet control sequences A stream connection does not process Telnet options and can be appropriate for connections to ports running UNIX to UNIX Copy Program UUCP and other non Telnet protocols Ports Table Keyword Description Port number bgp Border Gateway Protocol 179 chargen Character generator 19 cmd Remote commands 514 daytime Daytime 13 discard Discard 9 domain Domain Name Service 53 echo Echo 7 exec Exec 912 finger Finger 79 318 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 ftp File Transfer Protocol 21 ftp data FTP data connections 20 gopher Gopher 70 hostname NIC hostname server 101 ident Ident Protocol 113 irc Internet Relay Chat 194 klogin Kerberos login 543 kshell Kerberos shell 544 login Login 513 Ipd Printer service 515 nntp Network News Transport Protocol 119 pop2 Post Office Protocol v2 109 pop3 Post Office Protocol v3 110 pim auto rp PIM Auto RP 496 smtp Simple Mail Transport Protocol 25 sunrpc Sun Remote Procedure Call 111 syslog Syslog 514 tacacs TAC Access Control System 49 talk Talk 517 telnet Telnet 23 time Time 37 UUCp Unix to Unix Copy Program 540 whois Nickname 43 WWW World Wide Web 80 Example
142. aded through a TFTP Server The possible field values are e Software Image e Boot Code The TFTP Server IP Address that contains the source file to upgrade from Specifies the name of the upgrade file on the TFTP Server Type in the name and path of the file or Browse to locate the upgrade file 146 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 m Via HTTP See figure 4 77 PLANET W y KEINSS getup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security 008 Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Firmware Upgrade Next O via TFTP via HTTP Source File Browse Figure 4 77 Firmware Upgrade via HTTP e Via HTTP Allows you to upgrade the firmware using your Web browser e Source File Name Specifies the file to be downloaded Use the Proceed button to upgrade the firmware via TFTP or HHTP that be selected 4 12 9 Reboot The Reboot screen see figure 4 78 resets the device whose configuration is automatically saved before the device is rebooted PLANET MEE ANS Setup Part Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 78 Reboot screen There is a Known issue Sometimes after the Reboot button be pressed it costs lot 5 Note time to stop the curent tasks So it might be rebooted after more then 5 minutes 147 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 12 10 Factory Defaults The F
143. ail It will open the port configuration detail screen Click the Detail button for more detail port configuration Port Configuration Detail screen see figure 4 7 Port el w Description Port Type 1O0M copper Admin Status Up w Current Port Status Down Reactiyate Suspended Port Operational Status Active Admin Speed Current Port Speed Admin Duplex Current Duplex Mode Auto Negotiation e Current Auto Negotiation Admin Advertisement 10 Half 10 Full 100 Half 100 Full 1000 Full Current Advertisement Unknown Neighbor Advertisement Unknown Back Pressure Disable Current Back Pressure Flow Control Disable Current Flow Control Disable MDI MDIX AUTO w Current MDI MDIX Auto PYE None e LAG E a E Figure 4 7 Per Port Configuration detail screen The Port Configuration screen contains the following fields e Port Indicates the number of the port 38 e Description e Port Type e Admin Status e Current Port Status e Reactivate Suspended Port e Operational Status e Admin Speed e Current Port Speed e Admin Duplex e Current Duplex Mode e Auto Negotiation e Current Auto Negotiation e Admin Advertisement e Current Advertisement e Neighbor Advertisement e Back Pressure e Current Back Pressure User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Where can be entered by clicking on the Detail button This is the port type The port can be taken offline by selecting the Down option
144. al methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line 164 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example The following example configures the http authentication console config ip http authentication radius local 5 3 6 ip https authentication The ip https authentication global configuration command specifies authentication methods for https servers To return to the default use the no form of this command Syntax ip https authentication method methodz2 no ip https authentication method method2 Specify at least one from the following table Keyword Source or destination Uses the local username database for authentication Uses no authentication Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication Default Configuration The local user database is checked This has the same effect as the command ip https authentication local Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line Example The following exa
145. alue no sntp authentication key number number Key number Range 1 4294967295 value Key value Range Up to 8 characters Default Configuration No authentication key is defined Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example defines the authentication key for SNTP 186 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 cnsole config sntp authentication key 8 md5 ClkKey console config sntp trusted key 8 console config sntp authenticate 5 5 6 sntp authenticate The sntp authenticate global configuration command grants authentication for received Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from servers To disable the feature use the no form of this command Syntax sntp authenticate no sntp authenticate This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration No authentication Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The command is relevant for both unicast and broadcast Examples The following example defines the authentication key for SNTP and grants authentication cnsole config sntp authentication key 8 md5 ClkKey console config sntp trusted key 8 console config sntp authenticate 5 5 7 sntp trusted key The sntp trusted key global configuration command authenticates the identity of a system to which Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP will synchro
146. ame Name of a previously defined group The group defines the objects available to the community Range 1 30 characters The View name command cannot be specified for su which has access to the whole MIB However the View name command can be used to restrict the access rights of a community string Specifying a view name parameter does the following Generates an internal security name Maps the internal security name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to an internal group name Maps the internal group name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to view name read view and notify view always and for rw for write view also The group name command can be used to restrict the access rights of a community string Specifying a group name parameter does the following Generates an internal security name Maps the internal security name for SNMPv1 and SNMPv2 security models to the group name To define a management station on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ipaddress For a user to define OOB management port configurations such as ip address default gateway RADIUS and so forth you must define two SNMP communities A super user can configure OOB management port settings with a single community by switching between the two communities The OOB ip address indicates whether the selected management station being configured is an OOB management station The type is used for a different purpose
147. ame then key in Deny IP Destination A Choose Action Deny The ACL Name can de entered with other policy name 2 DENY Rule Keep the Source IP Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked 67 3 4 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 DENY Rule Enter 172 16 0 0 in the Destination IP Address and 0 0 0 255 in the Wild Card Mask After click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table ACL Name Delete ACL Action Protocol TCP Flags Source Port Destination Port Source IP Address Destination IP Address Match DSCP Match IP Precedence Action Protocol Deny Any Source Port New ACL Name Deny IF Destination 4 Deny we Select From List Any 8 Protocol ID To Match Urg Ack Psh Rist Syn Fin Any Any Wild Card Mask 1172 16 0 0 Wild Card Mask 0 0 0 255 C Add to List Destination Source Destination Match Match Port IP Address IP DSCP IP Address Precedence 172 16 0 0 Cancel m Create Permit ACL and add to list 5 6 7 8 9 Permit Rule Within the same ACL Deny IP Destination A choose Action Permit Permit Rule Keep the Source IP Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked Permit Rule Keep the Destination IP Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked After click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table Rember to
148. ame types are accepted at ingress Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures e8 to discard untagged frames at ingress Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general acceptable frame type tagged only User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 27 15 switchport forbidden vian The switchport forbidden vlan interface configuration command forbids adding specific VLANs to a port This may be used to prevent GVRP from automatically making these VLANs active on the selected ports To revert to allowing the addition of specific VLANs to the port use the remove parameter for this command Syntax switchport forbidden vlan add vian list remove vlan list add vian list List of VLAN IDs to add to the forbidden list Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs remove vian list List of VLAN IDs to remove from the forbidden list Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs Default Configuration All VLANs allowed Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example forbids adding VLANs number 234 till 256 to e8 353
149. and Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The command is not saved in the router configuration however the certificate and keys generated by this command are saved 361 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 in the private configuration which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device Example The following example regenerates a HTTPS certificate Console enable crypto certificate generate key generate 5 28 6 show ip http The show ip http privileged EXEC command displays the HTTP server configuration Syntax show ip http Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC command User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the HTTP server configuration Console show ip http HTTP server enable Port 80 5 28 7 show ip https The show ip http privileged EXEC command displays the HTTPS server configuration Syntax show ip https Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 362 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Privileged EXEC command User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the HTTP server configuration Console show ip https HTTPS server enabled Port 443 Certificate was generated 5 29 802 1x Commands 5 29 1 aaa
150. and enters SSH Public Key chain configuration mode The mode is used to manually specify other device public keys such as SSH client public keys 308 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax crypto key pubkey chain ssh Default Configuration By default there are no keys Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enters the SSH Public Key chain configuration mode Console config crypto key pubkey chain ssh Console config pubkey chain 5 22 7 user key The user key SSH public key chain configuration command specifies which SSH public key is manually configured and enters the SSH public key string configuration command To remove a SSH public key use the no form of this command Syntax user key username rsa dsa no user key username username Specifies the remote SSH client username which can be up to 48 characters long rsa RSA key dsa DSA key Default Configuration By default there are no keys Command Mode SSH Public Key Chain Configuration mode User Guidelines Follow this command with the key string command to specify the key Example The following example enables a SSH public key to be manually configured for the SSH public key chain called bob 309 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Console config pubkey chain user key bob Console conf
151. arate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs remove vian list List of VLAN IDs to remove Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs 350 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 tagged Sets the port to transmit tagged packets for the VLANs If the port is added to a VLAN without specifying tagged or untagged the default is tagged untagged Sets the port to transmit untagged packets for the VLANs Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 2 5 and 6 to the allowed list Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general allowed vlan add 2 5 6 tagged 5 27 12 switchport general pvid The switchport general pvid interface configuration command configures the PVID when the interface is in general mode To configure the default value use the no form of this command Syntax switchport general pvid vian id no switchport general pvid vilan id PVID Port VLAN ID The vlan id may belong to a non existent VLAN Default Configuration VLAN ID 1 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no
152. ared link Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables shared spanning tree on eb Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree link type shared 301 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 21 12 spanning tree pathcost method The spanning tree pathcost method command sets the default path cost method To revert to the default setting use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree pathcost method long short no spanning tree pathcost method long Specifies 1 through 200 000 000 range for port path costs short Specifies 1 through 200 000 000 range for port path costs Default Configuration Auto Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines This command applies to all the spanning tree instances on the switch The priority value must be a multiple of 4096 The cost is set using the spanning tree cost command Example The following example sets the default path cost method to long Console spanning tree pathcost method long 5 21 13 spanning tree bpdu The spanning tree bpdu global configuration command defines BPDU handling when spanning tree is disabled on an interface Syntax spanning tree bpdu filtering flooding filtering Filter BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an inte
153. at multicast group To reset to default host time out use the no form of this command 226 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax ip igmp snooping host time out time out no ip igmp snooping host time out Default Configuration The default host time out is 260 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines The timeout should be at least greater than 2 query_interval max_response time of the IGMP router Example The following example configures the host timeout to 300 seconds Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping host time out 300 5 9 5 ip igmp snooping mrouter time out The ip igmp snooping mrouter time out interface configuration command configures the mrouter time out The mrouter time out command is used for setting the aging out time after multicast router ports are automatically learned To configure the default mrouter time out use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter time out time out no ip igmp snooping mrouter time out time out mrouter timeout in seconds Range 1 2147483647 Default Configuration The default value is 300 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the mrouter timeout to 200 seconds 227 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Co
154. ath When starting a session the initial mode is the User EXEC mode Only a limited subset of commands is available in User EXEC Mode This level is reserved for tasks that do not change the configuration To enter the next level the Privileged EXEC mode a password is required The Privileged mode gives access to commands that are restricted on EXEC mode and provides access to the device Configuration mode The Global Configuration mode manages the device configuration on a global level For specific interface configurations enter the next level the Interface Configuration Mode The Interface Configuration mode configures specific interfaces in the device User EXEC Mode After logging into the device the user is automatically in user EXEC command mode unless the user is defined as a privileged user In general the user EXEC commands allow the user to perform basic tests and list system information The user level prompt consists of the device host name followed by the angle bracket gt console gt The default host name is Console unless it has been changed using the hostname command in the Global Configuration mode Privileged EXEC Mode Because many of the privileged commands set operating parameters privileged access is password protected to prevent unauthorized use The password is not displayed on the screen and is case sensitive Privileged users are entered directly into the Privileged EXEC mode To enter the P
155. ath Cost C Priority 128 Designated Bridge ID N A Designated Port ID N A Designated Cost N A Forward Transitions N A Update The page contains the following fields Y Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 47 STP Port Settings screen 109 e Interface e STP e Port Fast e Port State e Speed e Path Cost e Default Path Cost e Priority e Designated Bridge ID e Designated Port ID e Designated Cost User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Indicates the port or LAG on which STP is enabled which indicates if STP is enabled on the port Indicates if Fast Link is enabled on the port If Fast Link mode is enabled for a port the Port State is automatically placed in the Forwarding state when the port link is up Fast Link optimizes the STP protocol convergence STP convergence can take 30 60 seconds in large networks Displays the current STP state of a port If enabled the port state determines what forwarding action is taken on traffic Possible port states are e Disabled indicates that STP is currently disabled on the port The port forwards traffic while learning MAC addresses e Blocking where indicates that the port is currently blocked and cannot forward traffic or learn MAC addresses Blocking is displayed when Classic STP is enabled e Listening where indicates that the port is in Listening mode The port cannot forward traffic nor can it learn MAC addresses e Learning where indicate
156. ation turned on it may re synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half duplex operation and may as per the standards set them all inactive Example The following example enables autonegotiation on Ethernet e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if negotiation 5 7 8 flowcontrol The flowcontrol interface configuration command configures the Flow Control on a given interface To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax flowcontrol auto on off rx tx no flowcontrol auto Enables auto negotiation of Flow Control on Enables Flow Control off Disables Flow Control rx Enables receiving pause frames only tx Enables transmitting pause frames only 205 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration Flow Control is off Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines Flow Control will operate only if duplex mode is set to FULL Back Pressure will operate only if duplex mode is set to HALF When Flow Control is ON the head of line blocking mechanism of this port is disabled If a link is set to NOT use auto negotiation the other side of the link must also be configured to not use auto negotiation To select auto ensure negotiation for Flow Control is enabled Example In the following example Flow Control is enabled on e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Con
157. ations defined for a device utilize the same facility on a server The possible field values are Local 0 Local 7 The field default is Local 7 Where provides a user defined server description Indicates the Minimum severity from which logs are sent to the server For example if Notice is selected all logs from a Notice severity and higher are sent to the remote server If you want to add the Server Log configuration to the Server Log Table use the Add to List button at the bottom of the screen When a severity level is selected all severity level choices above the selection are selected ZS Note automatically 4 12 12 Memory Logs The Memory Log screen see figure 4 81 contains all system logs in a chronological order that are saved in RAM Cache Log 150 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Index which shows the log number Log Time at which the log was generated Severity which shows the log severity and the description that shows log message text Q Yan Ketepties b Cormmenicatce Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut lt lt Previous Next gt gt Log Index 1 2147483613 2 2147483614 3 2147483615 4 2147483616 5 2147483617 6 2147453618 7 2147483619 8 2147483620 9 2147483621 10 2147483622 11 2147483623 12 2147483624 The page contains the following fields e Log Index e Log Time e Severity e Description Log T
158. atus Type Status Speed Duplex Flow Control LAG Mode Detail Up v Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Up bd Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Up v Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Up e Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Up Y Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Up v Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Up v Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Up v Static Unknown Disable Link Not Present Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 8 Link Aggregation screen The Link Aggregation page contains the following fields e LAG e Description e Administrative Status Indicates the number of the LAG interface Up to eight LAG interface can be configured Indicates the description of the LAG ports Up indicates that the port is available and down shows administrator has taken the port offline You can click the Save Settings option to save this option 40 e Type e Link Status e Speed e Duplex e Flow control e LAG Mode User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The port types that comprise the LAG Shows an active connection when you choose the UP button there is no active connection or the port has been taken offline by an Admiinistrator when you choose the Down button Shows the connection speed of the port and the speed can be configured only when auto negotiation is disabled on that port The port duplex mode Full transmission occurs in both directions simultaneously or
159. ault Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to display LACP port channel information Console show lacp port channel 1 Port Channel 1 Port Type 1000 Ethernet Actor System Priority 1 MAC Address 000285 0E1C00 Admin Key 29 Oper Key 29 Partner System Priority 0 MAC Address 000000 000000 Oper Key 14 239 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 12 Line Commands 5 12 1 line The line global configuration command identifies a specific line for configuration and enters the line configuration command mode Syntax line console telnet ssh console Console terminal line telnet Virtual terminal for remote console access Telnet ssh Virtual terminal for secured remote console access SSH Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example configures the device as a virtual terminal for remote console access Console config line telnet Console config line 5 12 2 speed The speed line configuration command sets the line baud rate Syntax speed bps bps Baud rate in bits per second bps The options are 2400 9600 19200 and 3840
160. authentication dotlx The aaa authentication dot1x global configuration command specifies one or more authentication authorization and accounting AAA methods for use on interfaces running IEEE 802 1X Use the no form of this command to return to default Syntax aaa authentication dot1x default method methodz2 no aaa authentication dot1x default method1 method2 At least one from the following table Keyword Description Radius Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication None Uses no authentication Default Configuration The default behavior of the aaa authenctication for dot1 x is failed to authenticate If the 8021 x calls the AAA for authentication services it will receive a fail status Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line 363 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Examples The following example uses the aaa authentication dot1x default command with no authentication Console config aaa authentication dot1x default none 5 29 2 dot1x system auth control The dot1x system auto control command enables 802 1x globally Use the no form of this command to disable 802 1x globally dot1x system auto control no d
161. been received by this Authenticator The number of valid EAP Response frames other than Resp ld frames that have been received by this Authenticator The number of EAP Regq ld frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator The number of EAP Request frames other than Rq Id frames that have been transmitted by this Authenticator The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the frame type is not recognized The number of EAPOL frames that have been received by this Authenticator in which the Packet Body Length field is invalid The protocol version number carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame The source MAC address carried carried in the most recently received EAPOL frame 5 29 15 dot1x auth not req The dot1x auth not req interface VLAN configuration command enables unauthorized users access to that VLAN Use the no form of this command to disable the access Syntax dot1x auth not req no dot1x auth not req This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration User should be authorized to access the VLAN Command Mode Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines To define a VLAN for authorized and unauthorized users use the dot1x auth not req interface VLAN command Examples The following example enables unauthorized users access to the VLAN 375 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 console config if Config VLAN
162. ble OID Last Sample Value The statistic value during the last sampling period For example if the sample type is delta this value is the difference between the samples at the beginning and end of the period If the sample type is absolute this value is the sampled value at the end of the period Alarm Alarm index Owner The entity that configured this entry Interval The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds Sample Type The method of sampling the variable and calculating the value compared against the thresholds If the value is absolute the value of the variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval If the value is delta the value of the variable at the last sample is subtracted from the current value and the difference compared with the thresholds Startup Alarm The alarm that may be sent when this entry is first set If the first sample is greater than or equal to the rising threshold and startup alarm is equal to rising or rising and falling then a single rising alarm is generated If the first sample is less than or equal to the falling threshold and startup alarm is equal falling or rising and falling then a single falling alarm 283 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 is generated Rising Threshold A sampled statistic threshold When the current sampled value is greater than or equal to this thresho
163. bles the device to be configured from a browser To disable this function use the no form of this command Syntax ip http server no ip http server Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables the device to be configured from a browser Console enable ip http server 5 28 2 ip http port The ip http port global configuration command specifies the TCP port for use by a web browser to configure the device To use the default TCP port use the no form of this command Syntax ip http port port number no ip http port port number Port number for use by the HTTP server Range 0 65535 359 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration This default port number is 80 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command However specifying O as the port number will effectively disable HTTP access to the device Example The following example shows how the http port number is configured to 100 Console config ip http port 100 5 28 3 ip https server The ip https server global configuration command enables the device to be configured from a secured browser To disable this function use the no form of this command Syntax ip https server no ip
164. called bob Consoles show crypto key pubkey chain ssh username bob Username bob Key 005C300D 06092A86 5 23 System Management 5 23 1 ping The ping user EXEC command sends ICMP echo request packets to another node on the network Syntax ping p address hostname size packet_size count packet_counf timeout time_ouf p address IP address to ping An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines hostname hostname to ping Range 1 160 characters 313 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 packet_size Number of bytes in a packet The actual packet size is eight bytes larger than the size specified because the switch adds header information Range 57 1472 bytes packet_count Number of packets to send If O is entered it pings until stopped Range 1 65535 packets time_out Timeout in milliseconds to wait for each reply Range 1 65535 milliseconds Default Configuration The default packet size is 56 bytes The default packet count is 4 packets The default time out is 1 000 milliseconds Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines Press Esc to stop pinging Following are sample results of the ping command Destination does not respond lf the host does not respond a no answer from host message appears in 10 seconds Destination unreachable The gateway for this destination indicates that the destination is unreac
165. cifies the bridge priority value When switches or bridges are running STP each is assigned a priority After exchanging BPDUs the device with the lowest priority value becomes the Root Bridge The port priority value is provided in increments of 4096 For example 4096 8192 12288 etc The range is O to 65535 The default value is 32768 This specifies the device Hello Time The Hello Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages The default is 2 seconds The range is 1 to 10 seconds Where specifies the device Maximum Age Time The Maximum Age Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before sending configuration messages The default max age is 20 seconds The range is 6 to 40 seconds This specifies the device forward delay time The Forward Delay Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets The default is 15 seconds The range is 4 to 30 seconds 4 9 3 STP Port Settings Network administrators can assign STP settings to specific interfaces using the STP Interface Settings screen see figure 4 47 The STP Interface Settings page contains the following fields Interface STP STP Port Settings se Neo A OAND CA de 30S Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin O Port el 4 O tac Laci Port Fast Disabled Port State Disabled Speed 100M Path Cost 2000000 Default P
166. click the Save Config button 68 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 O ACL Name cta 2 New ACL Name Delete ACL Action Permit Ww Protocol 2 Select From List pany M O Protocol ID To Match Urg Ack Psh Rist Sym Se Fin Source Port Any Destination Port Ary Source IP Address Wild Card Mask TCP Flags Destination IP Address Wild Card Mask Match DSCP Match IP Precedence O Add to List Action Protocol Source Destination Source Destination Port Port IP Address IP Address Deny Ary 1 2 16 0 0 Permit Any E Binding the IP ACL to specify interface 10 Select Security ACL Binding in the Menu bar 11 Choose Port g1 at the Interface Precedence Cancel 12 Choose IP Based ACL select ACL name with Deny Source A that we had been created at step 1 Click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table 69 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 GQ PLANET Ketwortler amp Commoticaton Set Port VLAN eer Spanning a Config Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Tree ACL Binding Interface Port gi O Lac ACLName IP Based ACL Deny IP Destination A Y O MAC Based ACL _Deny MAC A Interface Select ACL gl Deny IP Destination 4 Delete Add New Save Config M Cancel Config 4 6 3 MAC Based ACL The MAC Based ACL screen see figure 4 27 allows a MAC based ACL
167. command configures the full nalf duplex operation of a given Ethernet interface when not using auto negotiation To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax duplex half full no duplex half Force half duplex operation full Force full duplex operation Default Configuration The interface is set to full duplex Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet out of band Ethernet mode User Guidelines Before attempting to force a particular duplex mode on the port operating at 10 100 Mbps disable the auto negotiation on that port Half duplex mode can be set only for ports operating at 10 Mbps or 100 Mbps Example The following example configures the duplex operation of Ethernet e5 to force full duplex operation Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if duplex full 204 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 7 7 negotiation The negotiation interface configuration command enables auto negotiation operation for the speed and duplex parameters of a given interface To disable negotiation use the no form of this command Syntax negotiation no negotiation Default Configuration auto negotiation Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel out of band Ethernet mode User Guidelines Turning off auto negotiation on an aggregate link may under some circumstances make it non operational If the other side has auto negoti
168. consists of the device host name followed by the word config and ff console To return from Global Configuration mode to Privileged EXEC mode the user can use one of the following commands exit end Ctri Z The following example illustrates how to access Global Configuration mode and teturn back to the Privileged EXEC mode console console configure console config exit console 155 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Interface Configuration Mode and Specific Configuration Modes Interface Configuration commands are to modify specific interface operations The following are the Interface Configuration modes Line Interface Contains commands to configure the management connections These include commands such as line speed timeout settings etc The Global Configuration mode command line is used to enter the line configuration command mode VLAN Database Contains commands to create a VLAN as a whole The Global Configuration mode command vlan database is used to enter the VLAN Database Interface Configuration mode Management Access List Contains commands to define management access lists The Global Configuration mode command management access list is used to enter the Management Access List Configuration mode Ethernet Contains commands to manage port configuration The Global Configuration mode command interface ethernet enters the Interface Configuration
169. cos override The qos cos override interface configuration command overrides the CoS of incoming packets To disable the override use the no form of this command Syntax qos cos override no qos cos override This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration CoS Override is disabled Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet Port Channel User Guidelines This command enables to override the CoS value of tagged packets with the value configured by the qos cos command 266 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example The following example overrides the CoS of incoming packets Console config qos cos override 5 17 12 show qos map The show gos map user EXEC command displays all the QoS maps Syntax show qos map dscp queue policed dscp dscp mutation dscp queue Displays the DSCP to queue map policed dscp Displays the DSCP to DSCP remark table dscp mutation Displays the DSCP DSCP mutation table Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC command User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the DSCP port queue map console show qos map Dscp queue map d1 d2 0 01 02 03 04 06 07 08 The following example displays the policed DSCP map 267 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Policed dscp map d1 d2 0
170. count privileged EXEC command displays the number of addresses present in all VLANs or ata specific VLAN Syntax show bridge address table count vlan v an Vlan Specific VLAN 179 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example the number of addresses present in the VLANs are displayed console show bridge address table count Capacity 8192 Free 8084 Used 108 Secure 0 Dynamic addresses 97 Static addresses 2 Internal addresses 9 Dynamic Static 5 4 16 show bridge multicast address table The show bridge multicast address table privileged EXEC command displays multicast MAC address table information Syntax show bridge multicast address table vlan vian id address mac multicast address ip multicast address format ip mac vian_id AVLAN ID value mac multicast address A MAC multicast address ip multicast address An IP multicast address format Multicast address format Can be ip or mac If format is unspecified the default is mac Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example multicast MAC address table information
171. d backup configuration file show backup will result in information which is meaningless to the user or even a blank row The device does not accept new commands while files are being copied however the user does not receive notification that the device is busy copying and will ignore the command Note that this behavior occurs only at the session which initiated the copy command response to activity on other management sessions will result in a delay but will not be ignored Understanding Invalid Combinations of Source and Destination Some invalid combinations of source and destination exist Specifically the following cannot be copied If the source file and destination file are the same file xmodem cannot be a destination Can only be copied to image boot and null tftp cannot be the source and destination on the same copy Copy Character Descriptions Character Description For network transfers an exclamation point indicates that the copy process is taking place Each exclamation point indicates the successful transfer of ten packets 512 bytes each For network transfers a period indicates that the copy process timed out Many periods in a row typically mean that the copy process may fail Copying image file from a Server to Flash Memory Use the copy source url image command to copy an image file from a server to Flash memory Copying boot file from a Server to Flash Memory Use the copy source url bo
172. d no gvrp vlan creation forbid Default Configuration By default dynamic VLAN creation is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines This command forbids dynamic VLAN creation from the interface The creation or modification of dynamic VLAN registration entries as a result of the GVRP exchanges on an interface are restricted only to those VLANs for which static VLAN registration exists Example The following example disables dynamic VLAN creation on port e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if gvrp vlan creation forbid 220 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 8 5 gvrp registration forbid The gvrp registration forbid interface configuration command de registers all dynamic VLANs and prevents dynamic VLAN registration on the port To allow dynamic registering for VLANs on a port use the no form of this command Syntax gvrp registration forbid no gvrp registration forbid Default Configuration Dynamic registering and deregistering for each VLAN on the port is allowed Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how default dynamic registering and deregistering is forbidden for each VLAN on port e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if gvrp registration forbid
173. d the global value is used 0 0 0 0 is interpreted as request to use the IP address of the outgoing IP interface An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines priority Determines the order in which the servers are used where 0 is the highest priority Range 0 65535 priority Determines the order in which the servers are used where 0 is the highest priority Range 0 65535 Default Configuration By default no RADIUS host is specified Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines To specify multiple hosts multiple radius server host commands can be used If no host specific timeout retransmit deadtime or key values are specified the global values apply to each host To define a radius server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address The address type of the source parameter must be the same as the ip address parameter Example The following example specifies a RADIUS server host with the following characteristics Server host IP address 192 168 10 1 Authentication port number 20 Timeout period 20 seconds Console config radius server host 192 168 10 1 auth port 20 timeout 20 269 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 18 2 radius server key The radius server key global configuration command sets the authentication and encryption key for all RADIUS communications between the router and the
174. d False 7 e7 Force Authorized False 8 es Force Authorized False 9 al Force Authorized False 10 g2 Force Authorized False Port is down or not present v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 30 802 1x setting screen The Page contains the following fields e Enable 802 1x Place a checkmark in the check box to enable 802 1x authentication e Port Indicates the port name Status Port Control This specifies the port authorization state The possible field values are as follows e Force Authorized the controlled port state is set to Force Authorized forward traffic e Force Unauthorized the controlled port state is set to Force Unauthorized discard traffic e Enable Periodic Permits immediate port re authentication The Setting Timer button opens the a Setting Timer screen to configure ports for 802 1x functionality Re authentication Setting Timer 83 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 On this screen it includes port re authentication resending EAP Refer to figure 4 31 Port el Reauthentication Period Quiet Period Resending EAP Max EAP Requests Supplicant Timeout Server Timeout Figure 4 31 Setting Timer parameter screen The Page contains the following fields e Quiet Period e Resending EAP e Max EAP Requests e Supplicant Timeout e Server Timeout 4 7 5 Port Security Specifies the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a fail
175. d Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines Use the port storm control broadcast rate interface configuration command to set the maximum allowable broadcast rate Multicast can be counted as part of the storm frames if the port storm control include multicast global configuration command is already executed Example The following example enables broadcast storm control on port e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if port storm control broadcast enable 5 7 21 port storm control broadcast rate The port storm control broadcast rate interface configuration command configures the maximum broadcast rate Use the no form of this command to configure the default value port storm control broadcast rate rate no port storm control broadcast rate rate Maximum of kilobytes per second of broadcast and multicast traffic on a port Rate 70 100000 216 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration The default storm control broadcast rate is 12000 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet User Guidelines Use the port storm control broadcast enable interface configuration command to enable broadcast storm control The rate is rounded to the nearest 64 kbytes sec except 1 63 kbytes sec which is rounded to 64 bytes sec Note that if the rate is 0 broadcast packets are not forwarded Example The following example configures the maximu
176. d community and contains the following fields Access Mode Defines the access rights of the community The possible field values are e Read Only which indicates management access is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the community e Read Write management access is read write and changes can be made to the device configuration but not to the community e SNMP Admin user has access to all device configuration options as well as permissions to modify the community View Name contains a list of user defined SNMP views 131 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Advanced Enables SNMP Advanced Mode for a selected community and contains the following fields Group Name defines advanced SNMP communities group names Add to List Use the button when you want to add the Communities configuration to the respective Table at the bottom of the screen E Base Table Communities Base Table Management Station Community String Access Mode View Name All public Read Only Default 192 168 1 51 private Read Write Default fe Advanced Table Management Station Community String Group Name ETA Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 64 Communities table screen The page contains the following fields e Management Station Displays the management station IP address for which the basic SNMP community is defined e Community String Displays the password used to authenticate the managem
177. disabled on all VLANs in the set context 225 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines IGMP snooping can only be enabled on static VLANs Example The following example enables IGMP snooping on VLAN 2 Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping 5 9 3 ip igmp snooping mrouter The ip igmp snooping mrouter interface configuration command enables automatic learning of multicast router ports in the context of a specific VLAN To remove automatic learning of multicast router ports use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping mrouter learn pim dvmrp no ip igmp snooping mrouter learn pim dvmrp Default Configuration Automatic learning of mrouter ports is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines Multicast router ports can be configured statically by the bridge multicast forward all command Example The following example enables automatic learning of multicast router ports on VLANs Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping mrouter learn pim dvmrp 5 9 4 ip igmp snooping host time out The ip igmp snooping host time out interface configuration command configures the host time out If an IGMP report for a multicast group was not received for a host time out period from a specific port this port is deleted from the member list of th
178. ds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange with the client Range 0 65535 seconds Default Configuration 60 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet User Guidelines During the quiet period the switch does not accept or initiate any authentication requests The default value of this command should only be changed to adjust for unusual circumstances such as unreliable links or specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers If it is necessary to provide a faster response time to the user a smaller number than the default should be entered Examples The following example sets the number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication 367 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 exchange to 3600 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x timeout quiet period 3600 5 29 8 dot1x timeout tx period The dot1x timeout tx period interface configuration command sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame from the client before resending the request Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout tx period seconds no dot1x timeout tx period seconds Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response to an EAP reques
179. e User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays 802 1X advanced features for the switch Switch show dot1x advanced Guest VLAN 3978 317 Unauthenticated VLANs 91 92 Use user attributes from Authentication Server Enabled User VLAN not created Create Interface Multiple Hosts Disabled Enabled console show dot1x advanced ethernet 1 1 Guest VLAN 3978 Unauthenticated VLANs 91 92 Use user attributes from Authentication Server Enabled User VLAN not created Create Interface Multiple Hosts 1 1 Disabled 1 2 Enabled Single Host Violation Discard Trap Enabled Frequency 100 Status Authorized Locked Counter 9 3 8 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 TROUBLE SHOOTING This chapter contains information to help you solve problems If the Switch is not functioning properly make sure the Ethernet Switch was set up according to instructions in this manual The Link LED is not lit Solution Check the cable connection and remove duplex mode of the Switch Some stations cannot talk to other stations located on the other port Solution Please check the VLAN port trunking function that may introduce this kind of problem Performance is bad Solution Check the full duplex status of the Ethernet Switch If the Ethernet Switch is set to full duplex and the partner is set to half dup
180. e Current Output Input C Volt mA Power Power mWatt mWatt 250 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Temp Internally measured transceiver temperature Voltage Internally measured supply voltage Current Measured TX bias current Output Power Measured TX output power Input Power Measured RX received power Tx Fault Transmitter fault LOS Loss of signal Data ready Indicates transceiver has achieved power up and data is ready N A Not Available N S Not Supported W Warning E Error 5 15 Port Channel Commands 5 15 1 interface port channel The interface port channel global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode of a specific port channel Syntax interface port channel port channel number port channel number A valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Seven supported aggregated links are defined and per port channel up to 4 member ports Turning off auto negotiation of an aggregate link may under some circumstances make it non operational If the other side has auto negotiation turned on it may re synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half duplex operation and may as per the standards set them all to inactive 251 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example The following e
181. e Port O Any Destination Port O Any Source IP Address 0 0 0 0 wild Card Mask 0 0 0 0 S Destination IP Address 0 0 0 0 wild Card Mask 0 0 0 0 Match DSCP O Match IP Precedence Update Action Protocol Source Destination Source Destination Match Match Port Port IP Address IP DSCP Address Precedence Deny Any 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 v Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 25 IP Base ACL screen The Page contains the following fields e ACL Name Displays the user defined IP based ACLs e New ACL Name Defines a new user defined IP based ACL e Delete ACL By which deletes the selected ACL e Action Indicates the action assigned to the packet matching the ACL Packets are forwarded or dropped In addition the port can be shutdown a trap can be sent to 64 e Protocol e Select from List e TCP Flags User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 the network administrator or a packet assigned rate limiting restrictions for forwarding The options are as follows Permit by which forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria Deny which drops packets which meet the ACL criteria Shutdown where drops packet that meets the ACL criteria and disables the port to which the packet was addressed Ports are reactivated from the Port Management screen By which creates an ACE Access Control Event based on a specific protocol Where selects from a protocols list on which ACE can be based The possible field values
182. e deny and permit commands must be defined If no match criteria are defined the default is deny If reentering to an access list context the new rules are entered at the end of the access list Use the management access class command to select the active access list The active management list cannot be updated or removed Examples The following example shows how to create an access list called mlist configure two management interfaces ethernet g1 and ethernet g9 and make the access list the active list Console config management access list mlist Console config macl permit ethernet g1 Console config macl permit ethernet g2 Console config macl exit Console config management access class mlist The following example shows how to create an access list called mlist configure all interfaces to be management interfaces except interfaces ethernet g1 and ethernet g9 and make the access list the active list Console config management access list mlist Console config macl deny ethernet g1 Console config macl deny ethernet g2 Console config macl permit Console config macl exit Console config management access class mlist 50435 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 13 2 permit management The permit management access list configuration command defines a permit rule Syntax permit ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number o
183. e ere Pi ee oo A A 340 A EE AEE AE TT AA AE EAE EE E AE ESA E A a ee ee eee 341 920 Bl Co eaaa N a E E a eee ee eee 341 S200 MISIO SZE aaa 342 2012 SAOWMISTO Mania ries dalla 342 A AAA A O la Gaiolskan ues 343 LIN EAN NS ad Ni 344 4 A sates ccaacetauentelaulasnes ats satoeieses E E ets 344 AN o a e ne e 344 5 27 3 de tauliviand Salina ad suienaasundetedadunlptisbatep ras vuisiaun dative ol uaedtated aia wnctaunn Rarmaesacaes 345 led ie User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Sea Gra IMENICE Mai a RerE cee Sener a ee rer eres tae ene Pee rere er ee oer 346 5 27 DINE MACS range VIAN aia daertuaaten ieee ae aA a A le A 346 A a wedollas Saad di itunincand Granda aha Ouad eta touerspastana ee 347 D2 al SWICMDONE MOOS iia di tias 347 BL SWINCMDOM ACCESS MA Mi is 348 52139 SWILCHDOFL THUNK alowed Mirra A o a 349 5 21 105 Wiehpon TONK HAVE Vasari a 350 5 27 11 switchport general allowed VIAN oocccooonccoonncconnnononcnonncnnanoncncnnonnncnnnnnnnannnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonancnnnnnnnannnonens 350 9 2 12 WUICAPON EAST PMA e e ND a he e e ect 351 5 27 13 switchport general ingress filtering disable oooccconncccococcncnoncnnconnnnononononnnnnnononcnnonrnnonnnnrnnonnnrnnnnnnnnnnnanos 352 5 27 14 switchport general acceptable frame type taggedOnly ccccsecccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeeeseeeeesaeeeeesaeees 352 5 27 21 5 switchport forbidden VAN aviat bid dd idas 353 2 10 Map protocol protocals
184. e frames received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Clear Counters button this option will reset all of the statistic counts Refresh Now button which use this option to refresh the statistics 52 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 5 2 RMON History The RMON History contains information about samples of data taken from ports For example the samples may include interface definitions or polling periods The RMON History Control screen is divided into RMON History and Log Table Log Table includes the following parts see figure 4 17 RMON History Source Interface OPort el Olas Sampling Interval 11800 sec Max Number of Samples to Keep 50 Owner Add to List Log Table Source Sampling Sampling Current Number Owner Interface Interval Requested of Samples Ema View History Table Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 17 RMON History screen The page contains the following fields a RMON History e Source Interface Displays the interface from which the history samples were taken The possible field values are Port specifies the port from which the RMON information was taken LAG specifies the port from which the RMON information was taken e Sampling Interval Indicates in seconds the time that samplings are taken from the ports The field range is 1 3600 The default is 1800 seconds equal to 30 minutes e Sampling Requested Displays the number of samples to be saved T
185. e only if duplex mode is set to half Example In the following example Back Pressure is enabled on e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if back pressure 5 7 11 port jumbo frame The port jumbo frame global configuration command enables jumbo frames for the device To disable jumbo frames use the no form of this command Syntax port jumbo frame no port jumbo frame 207 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration Jumbo Frames are not enabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In the following example Jumbo Frames are enabled on the device Console port jumbo frame 5 7 12 clear counters The clear counters user EXEC mode command clears statistics on an interface Syntax clear counters ethernet interface port channel port channel number Interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In the following example the counters for interface g1 are cleared console clear counters ethernet g1 5 7 13 set interface active The set interface active privileged EXEC mode command reactivates an interface that was suspended by the system 208
186. e ope eee eee ee ae a ee eee eee eee eee 75 AT AACL BM a e o a do a ao eee 75 A A eeee eee ae a etch ee tae Oc Ns ee dates ee ee 76 AS TASA ae el dd RR elo ee eae en ener 78 AE AAA A O a A O E a R 80 AT E A O 84 NA ceed lel ca EE au brett ae cer ap eect ened eee ne cate romicee 87 os AA o o a N atie enale 88 A EEA ee 89 4o CoS SE TING Sse Ns oN Na a a aN aN A Sata a ee aA a eh tN a 89 4 O 2 JUCUG S CUING session ce es ee ee ete ee 90 E cn Rn en Re nee en On eee a ee eee Cnn ene 91 A Mucnedasedeiesdennadebabensduatandeadeiysdexneselatensauis aaa 92 SA YS MOUS A E E A 94 AO CO AAOV AN CCG MOS sta a 94 A hea ease t be tiie jetta ote tacts cose ton deste ns mesh ease tee Ment eye 100 A a E e o Eee ee eee 106 4 92 The 16 6 em TP aaan o ao a da o da eee 108 ARISTE Porm SeuinGs Aca iaet nea eae ee tee ee eect Ae ee 109 AOA RO FROT SENI Sestesds Septic ees ansa stot cat tbs teeth A 111 o AA Oe EO ee A eer eee 113 AO IVP AS ear SS ULI Sees ts eet ah te ta eal eee ed at 114 As Wi Interace SENGS ici 2s tes saad seats ion aca a ii 116 en eee Se ee o ene eee ee ee ee eee eee ee ee 118 AAO Ni IGMIP SMO OD ING sc A A AA A DA AA 120 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 A VO 2 Bages Multas hnne wos et NA ocd rh Na carte ee Neale Nhs Gene eak A ea ease ale ete eee A ace apa eae 121 410 3 Briage Multicast Forward Alai 123 a A 125 A E o Bs AAA O O A O saves niet uieeck neta Ee 125 SS A A 126 AS OU O a o en eo 128 AMA Groupe Member SID en
187. e packet CoS values For untagged packets the port default CoS is used dscp Classifies ingress packets with the packet DSCP values tcp udp port Classifies ingress packets with the packet destination port values Default Configuration If the system is in basic mode then CoS is the default trust mode Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command can be used only in QoS basic mode Packets entering a quality of service QoS domain are classified at the edge of the QoS domain When the packets are classified at the edge the switch port within the QoS domain can be configured to one of the trusted states because there is no need to classify the packets at every switch within the domain Use this command to specify whether the port is trusted and which fields of the packet to use to classify traffic DSCP value 0 7 8 15 16 23 24 31 32 39 40 47 48 56 57 63 Queue ID 12345678 For an inter QoS domain boundary the port can be configured to the DSCP trusted state and apply the DSCP to DSCP mutation map if the DSCP values are different between the QoS domains 264 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 To return to the untrusted state use the no qos command to apply best effort service Example The following example configures the system in basic mode to DSCP trust state Console config qos trust dscp 5 17 9 qos trust I nterface The qos trust interface configuration command
188. e portfast interface configuration command enables PortFast mode In PortFast mode the interface is immediately put into the forwarding state upon linkup without waiting for the timer to expire To disable PortFast mode use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree portfast no spanning tree portfast 300 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration PortFast mode is disabled Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines This feature should be used only with interfaces connected to end stations Otherwise an accidental topology loop could cause a data packet loop and disrupt switch and network operations Example The following example enables PortFast on eb Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree portfast 5 21 11 spanning tree link type The spanning tree link type interface configuration command overrides the default link type setting To reset the default use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree link type point to point shared no spanning tree spanning tree link type point to point Specifies the port link type as point to point shared Specifies that the port link type is shared Default Configuration The switch derives the link type of a port from the duplex mode A full duplex port is considered a point to point link and a half duplex port is considered a sh
189. ed Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines If encryption keys are not generated the SSH server is in standby until the keys are generated To generate SSH server keys use the commands crypto key generate rsa and crypto key generate dsa Example The following example enables the device to be configured from a SSH server Console config ip ssh server 306 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 22 3 crypto key generate dsa The ip ssh server global configuration command generates DSA key pairs Syntax crypto key generate dsa Default Configuration DSA key pairs do not exist Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines DSA keys are generated in pairs one public DSA key and one private DSA key If the device already has DSA keys a warning and prompt to replace the existing keys with new keys is displayed The maximum supported size for the DSA key is 1 024 This command is not saved in the startup configuration however the keys generated by this command are saved in the running configuration which is never displayed to the user or backed up to another device This command may take a considerable period of time to execute DSA key size is 2048 bits Example The following example generates DSA key pairs Console config crypto key generate dsa 5 22 4 crypto key generate rsa The crypto key generate rsa global configuration command generates RSA key pairs
190. ed severity Syslog server 192 180 2 28 logging errors Messages 6 Dropped severity 2 messages were not logged resources File log 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface FastEthernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g1 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet g2 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 LINK 3 UPDOWN Interface Ethernet e3 changed state to up 331 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 11 Aug 2002 15 41 43 SYS 5 CONFIG_1 Configured from memory by console 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface FastEthernet g0 changed state to up 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g0 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g1 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet g2 changed state to down 11 Aug 2002 15 41 39 LINEPROTO 5 UPDOWN Line protocol on Interface Ethernet e3 changed state to down 5 24 11 show syslog servers The show syslog servers privileged EXEC command displays the syslog servers settings Syntax show syslog servers Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged
191. ed authentication exchange Range 0 65535 Specifies the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an EAP request identity frame from the supplicant client before resending the requests Which the total amount of EAP requests sent If a response is not received after the defined period the authentication process is restarted The field default is 2 retries Which displays the number of seconds that lapses before EAP requests are resent to the supplicant Range 1 65535 The field default is 30 seconds Which specifies the number of seconds that lapses before the switch resends a request to the authentication server Range 1 65535 The field default is 30 seconds Work security screen see figure 4 32 can be increased by limiting access on a specific port only to users with specific MAC addresses MAC addresses can be dynamically learned or statically configured Locked port security monitors both received and learned packets that are received on specific ports Access to the locked port is limited to users with specific MAC addresses These addresses are either manually defined on the port or learned on that port up to the point when it is locked When a packet is received on a locked port and the packet source MAC address is not tied to that port either it was learned on a different port or it is unknown to the system the protection mechanism is invoked and can provide various options 84
192. ed in the most recently o received EAPOL frame Received Last EAPOL Src The source MAC address carried in the most recently 00 00 00 00 00 00 received EAPOL frame The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been n v Save Config Cancel Config Transmit FAPMI Total Figure 4 23 802 1x Statistics screen The page includes the following fields e Port e Refresh Rate e Name e Description e Packet Indicates the port which is polled for statistics Indicates the amount of time that passes before the EAP statistics are refreshed The possible field values are e No Refresh indicates that the EAP statistics are not refreshed e 15 Sec which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds e 30 Sec which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds e 60 Sec which indicates that the EAP statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds Displays the measured 802 1x statistic Describes the measured 802 1x statistic Displays the amount of packets measured for the particular 802 1x statistic 61 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 5 7 GVRP Statistics The GVRP Statistics screen see figure 4 24 contains device statistics for GVRP The GVRP Statistics screen is divided into two areas GVRP Statistics Table and GVRP Error Statistics Table GVRP Statistics Interface Port el O LAG Refresh Rate No Refresh Y GYRP Statistics Table Attribute Recei
193. een the switch and the surrounding objects When choosing a location please keep in mind the environmental restrictions discussed in Chapter 23 Note 1 Section 4 and Specification Step4 Connect the Switch to network devices A Connect one end of a standard network cable to the 10 100 RJ 45 ports or Gigabit RJ 45 SFP mini GBIC slot on the front of the Switch B Connect the other end of the cable to the network devices such as printer servers workstations or routers etc Connection to the Switch requires UTP Category 5 network cabling with RJ 45 tips For more 73 Note information please see the Cabling Specification in Appendix A Step5 Supply power to the switch A Connect one end of the power cable to the switch B Connect the power plug of the power cable to a standard wall outlet When the switch receives power the Power LED should remain solid Green 20 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 2 2 2 Rack Mounting To install the switch in a 19 inch standard rack please follows the instructions described below Step1 Place the switch on a hard flat surface with the front panel positioned towards the front side Step2 Attach the rack mount bracket to each side of the switch with supplied screws attached to the package Figure 2 5 shows how to attach brackets to one side of the switch E ieee Figure 2 5 Attach brackets to the switch Caution You must use the screws supplied with the
194. efault configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 284 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example The following example configures an event with the trap index of 10 Console config rmon event 10 log 5 19 9 show rmon events The show rmon events user EXEC command displays the RMON event table Syntax show rmon events Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the RMON event table Console show rmon events Index Description Type Community Last time sent Errors Jan 18 2002 23 58 17 High Broadcast Log Trap router Manager Jan 18 2002 23 59 48 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Index An index that uniquely identifies the event Description A comment describing this event Type The type of notification that the device generates about this event Can have the following 285 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 values none log trap log trap In the case of log an entry is made in the log table for each event In the case of trap an SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations Community If an SNMP trap is to be sent it is sent to the SNMP community specified by this octet s
195. elect queue 8 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines You can use this command to distribute traffic into different queues where each queue is configured with different weighted round robin WRR and Weighted Random Early Detection WRED parameters You enable the expedite queues by using the priority queue out interface configuration command wrr queue cos map It is recommended to specifically map a single VPT to a queue rather than mapping multiple VPTs to a single queue Example The following example maps CoS 3 to queue 7 Console config wrr queue cos map 7 3 258 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 17 4 wrr queue bandwidth The wrr queue bandwidth interface configuration command assigns Weighted Round Robin WRR weights to egress queues The weights ratio determines the frequency in which the packet scheduler dequeues packets from each queue To return to the default values use the no form of this command Syntax wrr queue bandwidth weight weight2 weight_n no wrr queue bandwidth weight1 weight_n Sets the bandwidth ratio in which the WRR packet scheduler dequeues packets Separate each value by spaces Range 6 255 Default Configuration The default WRR weight is 1 8 ratio for all queues each weight set to 6 Command Mode Interface Configuration mode User Guidelines The packet refers to a threshold by the conformance level Weighted round robin queues sho
196. enables each port trust state while the system is in basic mode To disable the trust state on each port use the no form of this command Syntax qos trust no qos trust Default Configuration Each port is enabled while the system is in basic mode Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines Use no qos trust to disable the trust mode on each port Use qos trust to enable trust mode on each port Example The following example configures port e5 in basic mode to default trust state CoS Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if qos trust 5 17 10 qos cos The qos cos interface configuration command configures the default port CoS value To return to the default setting use the no form of this command 265 Syntax qos cos default cos no qos cos gos cos override User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 default cos Specifies the default CoS value being assigned to the port If the port is trusted and the packet is untagged then the default CoS value becomes the CoS value Range 0 7 Default Configuration Port CoS is 0 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel command User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures port e5 default CoS value to 3 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if qos cos 3 5 17 11 qos
197. ent station to the device e Access Mode Where displays the access rights of the community e View Name Displays the user defined SNMP view m Advanced Table e Management Station Displays the management station IP address for which the basic SNMP community is defined Community String which displays the password used to authenticate the 132 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 management station to the device e Group Name Displays advanced SNMP communities group name 4 11 6 Notification Filter The Notification Filter screen see figure 4 65 permits filtering traps based on OIDs Each OID is linked to a device feature or a feature aspect The Notification Filter screen also allows network managers to filter notifications Notification Filter gt Filter Name New Filter Name A interfaces a New Object Identifier Tree Select from List ip 0 Object ID Itep Filter Type Included Y Add to List Object ID Subtree Filter Type Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 65 Notification Filter screen The page contains the following fields e Filter Name This contains a list of user defined notification filters e New Filter Name Add a new user defined notification filter name e New Object Displays the OID for which notifications are sent or blocked If a filter is attached to an OID traps or informs are generated and sent to the trap recipients Object IDs Identifier Subtree re selected from
198. er Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example closes an active terminal session Console gt exit 5 26 7 end The end global configuration command ends the current configuration session and returns to the privileged command mode Syntax end Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 340 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode All Command modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example ends the current configuration session and returns to the previous command mode Console config end Console 5 26 8 help The help command displays a brief description of the help system Syntax help Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode All Command modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 5 26 9 history The history line configuration command enables the command history function To disable the command history feature use the no form of this command Syntax history no history Default Configuration The history function is enabled 341 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables the command history function for telnet
199. ere is only a single pair of name values In case of entry in a table the first pairs are the indexes followed by one or more fields Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 292 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Although the CLI can set any required configuration there might be a situation where a SNMP user sets a MIB variable that does not have an equivalent command In order to generate configuration files that support those situations the snmp server set command is used This command is context sensitive Examples The following example sets the scalar MIB sysName to have the value abc Console config snmp server set sysName sysname abc The following example sets the entry MIB rndCommunityTable with keys 0 0 0 0 and public The field rndCommunityAccess gets the value super and the rest of the fields get their default values Console config snmp server set rndCommunity Table rndCommunityMngStationAddr 0 0 0 0 rndCommunityString public rndCommunityAccess super 5 20 8 show snmp The show snmp privileged EXEC command displays the SNMP status Syntax show snmp Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the SNMP communicatio
200. erface configuration command sets the time for the retransmission of an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request frame to the client Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout supp timeout seconds no dot1x timeout supp timeout seconds Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response to an EAP request frame from the client before resending the request Range 1 65535 seconds Default Configuration 30 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines The default value of this command should be changed only to adjust to unusual circumstances such as unreliable links or 369 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 specific behavioral problems with certain clients and authentication servers Examples The following example sets the time for the retransmission of an EAP request frame to the client to 3600 seconds Console config dot1x timeout server timeout 3600 5 29 11 dotl1x timeout server timeout The dot1x timeout server timeout interface configuration command sets the time for the retransmission of packets to the authentication server Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout server timeout seconds no dot1x timeout server timeout seconds Time in seconds that the switch should wait for a response from the authentication server before resending the request Range
201. ese commands can be recalled reviewed modified and reissued This buffer is not preserved across device resets Keyword Source or destination Up arrow key Recalls commands in the history buffer beginning with the most recent command Ctrl P Repeats the key sequence to recall successively older commands Down arrow Returns to more recent commands in the history buffer after recalling commands with key the up arrow key Repeating the key sequence will recall successively more recent commands By default the history buffer system is enabled but it can be disabled at any time For information about the command syntax to enable or disable the history buffer see history There is a standard default number of commands that are stored in the buffer The standard number of 10 commands can be increased to 256 By configuring O the effect is the same as disabling the history buffer system For information about the command syntax for configuring the command history buffer see history size To display the history buffer see show history Negating the Effect of Commands For many configuration commands the prefix keyword no can entered to cancel the effect of a command or reset the configuration to the default value This guide describes the negation effect for all applicable commands Command Completion If a command is entered and it is not complete if the command is invalid or if some parameters of the command are invalid
202. eset the default spanning tree priority use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree priority priority no spanning tree priority priority Priority of the bridge Range 0 61440 in steps of 4096 Default Configuration The default bridge priority for IEEE STP is 32768 Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The lower the priority the more likely the bridge is to be the Root Bridge Example The following example configures spanning tree priority to 12288 Console config spanning tree priority 12288 5 21 7 spanning tree disable The spanning tree disable interface configuration command disables spanning tree on a specific port To enable spanning tree on a port use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree disable no spanning tree disable 298 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration By default all ports are enabled for spanning tree Command Modes Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example disables spanning tree on e5 Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if spanning tree disable 5 21 8 spanning tree cost The spanning tree cost interface configuration command configures the spanning tree path cost for a port To reset the default port path cost use the no form of this command Syntax
203. esponse is received to the client before restarting the authentication process How long the user is logged in Time since last authentication The supplicant MAC address 5 29 13 show dotlx users The show dot1x users privileged EXEC command displays 802 1X users for the switch 372 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax show dot1x users username username username Supplicant username Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays 802 1X users console show dot1x users Username Session Time Last Auth Auth Method MAC Address Interface Remote 0008 3b79 8787 John 0008 3b89 3127 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Username The User Name representing the identity of the Supplicant Login Time How long the user is logged in Last Authentication Time since last authentication Authentication Method The authentication method used to establish the session Mac address The supplicant MAC address Interface The interface that the user is using 3 3 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 29 14 show dotlx statistics The show dot1x statistics privileged EXEC command displays 802 1X statistics for the specified interface Syntax show dot1x stati
204. ethods For more information about using the console refer to Chapter 5 Command Line Interface Console Management WGSD Managed Switch Serial Port PC Workstation with Terminal emulation software Serial Port 38400 8 n 1 3 1 2 Direct Access Direct access to the administration console is achieved by directly connecting a terminal or a PC equipped with a terminal emulation program such as HyperTerminal to the switch console serial port When using this management method a null modem cable is required to connect the switch to the PC After making this connection configure the terminal emulation program to use the following parameters The default parameters are 384 00 bps 8 data bits No parity 1 stop bit You can change these settings if desired after you log on This management method is often preferred because you can remain connected and monitor the system during system reboots Also certain error messages are sent to the serial port regardless of the interface through which the associated action was initiated A Macintosh or PC attachment can use any terminal emulation program for connecting to the terminal serial port A workstation attachment under UNIX can use an emulator such as TIP 25 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 3 2 Web Management The switch provides a browser interface that lets you configure and manage the switch remotely After you set up your IP address for the switch y
205. fic traffic receives preferential treatment And Cos Settings Queue settings Dscp Settings Bandwidth Basic Mode Advanced mode are provided 4 8 1 CoS Settings The terms Class of Service CoS and QoS are used in the following CoS provides varying Layer 2 traffic services CoS refers to classification of traffic to traffic classes which are handled as an aggregate whole with no per flow settings CoS is usually related to the 802 1p service that classifies flows according to their Layer 2 priority as set in the VLAN header QoS refers to Layer 2 traffic and above QoS handles per flow settings even within a single traffic class The CoS Settings screen see figure 4 35 contains fields for enabling or disabling CoS In addition the Trust mode can be selected The Trust mode relies on predefined fields within the packet to determine the egress queue settings To configure the Trust Mode see 4 8 5 The CoS Settings screen has two areas CoS Settings and CoS to Queue CoS Settings CoS Settings QoS Mode Basic y Class of Service Queue 0 2 Mi 1 E z 1x 3 Y 4 av 5 3M 6 ax 7 4 CoS Default tevin 4 Y Mawes Interface DefaultCoS Restore Defaults LAG el OM O e2 ow O ES x o e4 ow O es o O e6 lo O a owl O e8 om o gl o m o g2 ov O v Save Config Cancel Config 89 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Figure 4 35 CoS Settings screen The Page contains the following fields e CoS
206. figured to a Multicast service e Bridge Multicast Identifies the Multicast group MAC address IP address Address e Interface Displays Interface that can be added to a Multicast service The configuration options are as follows e Static indicates the port is user defined e Dynamic indicates the port is configured dynamically e Forbidden forbidden ports are not included the Multicast group even if IGMP snooping designated the port to join a Multicast group e None displays the port is not configured for Multicast service e LAG Displays LAG that can be added to a Multicast service The fields are the same for both areas Use the Add to List button when you want to assigns ports to a specific Multicast service address group E Multicast Table 122 Example User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 ye Tid ae Te a A Geeta eer eT Paan t E JUEGA ORINA ht kiok Se a a i panr Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOu Bridge Multicast LANID LAN MAC Static Forbidden Dynamic 1 01 00 5c 04 04 05 gl 1 01 00 5c Da Ob Oc g2 Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 57 Bridge Multicast screen E Adding Bridge Multicast Addresses 1 2 3 4 5 Click the check box to enable the Bridge Multicast Filtering Define the VLAN ID and New Bridge Multicast Address fields Check a port to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group Click Add to List button Click the Save Config to app
207. forbidden address mac multicast address p multicast address add Adds ports to the group remove Removes ports from the group mac multicast address MAC multicast address ip multicast address P multicast address interface list Separate non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces hyphen is used to designate a range of ports port channel number list Separate non consecutive valid port channels with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of port channels Default Configuration No forbidden addresses are defined Command Modes Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines Before defining forbidden ports the multicast group should be registered Examples In this example the MAC address 0100 5e02 0203 is forbidden on port g9 within VLAN 8 console config interface vlan 8 console config if bridge multicast address 0100 5e02 0203 console config if bridge multicast forbidden address 0100 5802 0203 add ethernet e9 3 4 5 bridge multicast forward unregistered The bridge multicast forward unregistered interface configuration command enables forwarding unregistered multicast addresses Use the no form of this command to return to default Syntax bridge multicast forward unregistered add remove ethernet nterface list port channel port channelnumber list y no bridge multicast forward unregistered add Force for
208. g the query or switching to the next server 76 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The possible field values are 1 30 Three is the default value e Dead Time This defines the amount of time minutes that a RADIUS server is bypassed for service requests The range is 0 2000 The Dead Time default is O minutes e Key String This defines the default key string used for authenticating and encrypting all RADIUS communications between the device and the RADIUS server This key must match the RADIUS encryption e Source IP Address Defines the source IP address that is used for communication with RADIUS servers e Usage Type Specifies the RADIUS server authentication type The default value is Login The possible field values are e Login indicates that the RADIUS server is used for authenticating user name and passwords e 802 1X indicates that the RADIUS server is used for 802 1X authentication e All where indicates that the RADIUS server is used for authenticating user name and passwords and 802 1X port authentication Use the Add to List button when you add the RADIUS configuration to the RADIUS Table at the bottom of the screen 77 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 7 3 TACACS The device provides Terminal Access Controller Access Control System TACACS client support TACACS provides centralized security for validation of users accessing the device TACACS provides a centralized user management
209. g txt_ipAdEntAddr repeat which does not exist in the page eirag DEJE Error SEHTTP_HTTPS E 2000 22 17 21 SETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_rlIpStaticRouteNextHop query which does not exist in the page O1 Jan S HTTP_HTTPS E sel ridad 2000 22 17 20 Grace SETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntNetMask repeat which does not exist in the page O1 Jan S HTTP_HTTPS E F 214748295 2000 27 17 20 EYWY SETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntAddr repeat which does not exist in the page 05 Jan ad 8 2147483119 2000 23 42 59 Alert TFTP A TrtpRxERROR n error message was received 2 O1 Jan S HTTP_HTTPS E 9 214748330 2000 23 31 28 FE SETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntNetMask repeat which does not exist in the page O1 Jan S HTTP_HTTPS E cues pia di 2000 23 31 28 sali SETTAGDOESNTEXIST PGPRCS Trying to set tag txt_ipAdEntAddr repeat which does not exist in the page 112147483647 O1 Jan Alert TFTP A TFtpRxERROR An error message was received 2 2000 01 12 05 Clear Logs EN Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 82 Flash Logs screen 152 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 COMMAND STRUCTURE The WGSD Switch is a managed Ethernet Switch that can be controlled by the RS 232 console interface telnet interface and Web interface This chapter describer how to configure the Switch through these interfaces When you are ready to configure the smart functions of
210. g v Bridge Settings Priority 32768 Hello Time 2 Sec Max Age Sec O Forward Delay Sec v Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 46 Global STP screen The page contains the following fields Global Setting e STP Operation Mode This indicates the STP mode by which STP is enabled on the device The possible field values are e Classic STP where enables Classic STP on the device This is the default value e Rapid STP where enables Rapid STP on the device e Multiple STP where enables Multiple STP on the device e BPDU Handling This determines how BPDU packets are managed when STP is disabled on the port device BPDUs are used to transmit spanning tree information The possible field values are e Filtering where filters BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface This is the default value e Flooding where floods BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface e Path Cost Default This specifies the method used to assign default path costs to STP ports The possible field values are Values e Short specifies 1 through 65 535 range for port path costs This is the default value e Long specifies 1 through 200 000 000 range for port path costs The default path costs assigned to an interface varies according to the selected method 108 m Bridge Settings e Priority e Hello Time e Max Age e Forward Delay User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Spe
211. ge and Port settings Now if switch A broadcasts a packet to switch C then switch C will drop the packet at port 2 and the broadcast will end there Setting up STP using values other than the defaults can be complex Therefore you are advised to keep the default factory settings and STP will automatically assign root bridges ports and block loop connections Influencing STP to choose a particular switch as the root bridge using the Priority setting or influencing STP to choose a particular port to block using the Port Priority and Port Cost settings is however relatively straight forward 104 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 LAN IL Portcast 19 A Port 3 Bridge ID 15 5 gt Port 1 Port 2 Y d J Portcast 4 Portcast 4 j poe 4 Portcast 4 l B mer CD Bridge ID 30 Bridge ID 20 Port 2 Port 3 Portcast 19 Port 2 Port 3 a L L Portcast 19 Portcast 19 LAN 2 lt _ LAN 3 Before Applying the STA Rules In this example only the default STP values are used LAN L2 A mm Root Bridge 5 gt Port 1 Port 2 Xe A A Designated Port Designated Port Root Port Root Port B Port 1 l C Port 1 Designated Bridge gt Port 2 Port 3 Blocked Port 2 Port 3 q d LAN 2 _ gt LAN 3 A After Applying the STA Ru
212. generation Rising is defined by crossing the threshold from a low value threshold to a higher value threshold 56 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Interval Defines the alarm interval time in seconds e Owner Dhere displays the device or user that defined the alarm Use the Add to List button when you add the RMON Alarms Table entry 257 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 5 4 RMON Events The RMON Events screen see figure 4 20 contains fields for defining RMON events Port Conf o RMON Events Add Event Event Entry Community Default Community Description Default Community Type None v Owner Add to List Event Table Event Community Description Type Time Owner Entry pm RMON Events Log Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 20 RMON Event screen The page contains the following fields E Add Event e Event Entry Displays the event e Community where displays the community to which the event belongs e Description Displays the user defined event description e Type Describes the event type Possible values are e None where indicates that no event occurred e Log indicates that the event is a log entry e Trap indicates that the event is a trap e Log and Trap indicates that the event is both a log entry and a trap e Owner Where displays the device or user that defined the event Use the Add to List button when you add the configured RMON event to the Event Table at the botto
213. ging Tagged Untagged Figure 4 14 Join VLAN to Port screen GARP VLAN Registration Protocol GVRP is specifically provided for automatic distribution of VLAN membership information among VLAN aware bridges GVRP allows VLAN aware bridges to automatically learn VLANs to bridge ports mapping without having to individually configure each bridge and register VLAN membership The Global System LAG information displays the same field information as the ports but represent the LAG GVRP information The GVRP screen refer to 4 15 is divided into two areas GVRP and GVRP Table The field definitions for both areas are the same Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut G RP Table Enable G RP O Interface Port ely LAG GYRP State F Dynamic LAN Creation GYRP Registration Update lt lt Previous i E Next gt gt Dynamic GYRP Interface GYRE SERE LAN Creation Registration O AN T e2 Disabled Enabled Enabled e3 Disabled Enabled Enabled e4 Disabled Enabled Enabled e5 Disabled Enabled Enabled eb Disabled Enabled Enabled e Disabled Enabled Enabled e8 Disabled Enabled Enabled gi Disabled Enabled Enabled g2 Disabled Enabled Enabled v Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 15 GVRP configuration screen 49 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The page contains the following fields e Enable GVRP e Interface e GVRP State e Dynamic VLA
214. h to the host i2 gateway stanford edu Host name of this router 192 68 191 83 IP address of this router 1 msec 1 msec 1 msec Round trip time for each of the probes that are sent The following table describes the characters that can appear in the traceroute command output Field Description The probe timed out Unknown packet type A Administratively unreachable Usually this output indicates that an access list is blocking traffic H Host unreachable N Network unreachable P Protocol unreachable Q Source quench U Port unreachable 316 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 23 3 telnet The telnet User EXEC command is used to log in to a host that supports Telnet Syntax telnet p address hostname port keyword7 p address P address of the destination host An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines Range 1 160 characters host Hostname of the destination host Range Valid IP Address port A decimal TCP port number or one of the keywords from the ports table in the usage guidelines The default is the Telnet port decimal23 on the host keyword Can be one or more keywords from the keywords table in the User Guidelines Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines The Telnet software supports special Telnet commands in the form of Telnet sequence
215. ha sd Scat asatah Doateaten dandy aa a 201 Osh WIM ACS emelec idas 201 OZ MLS Hace range MM a ete a en sted ce te ean dd oie 201 Fo A gt aecacas a E E E J Pameteanon R 202 SS Col ON AAA nesta Po P _ e A 203 EE E E 8 PIE E EE EE E A A oe et ee 203 A arene RRP A eee eee 204 5 7 7 MEJO lO incest E E hues uae enue aia 205 10 TOW A A 205 SUV PAE MESEN AE E AATA ae aot A ETETE O ATEA 206 le OS SUIT AA E a Na ee i 207 A ling deere h au ceas ie destin Pesan beaucere se S etd 207 A e E OE cndseed aa enti a aa 208 dele 0 56 LONI ACO ACV sierpe e ea ae Eea n ai e ea a e a a aaan a aa e R Ee ORe a EEN E 208 9AA SNOW mternaces COM a e el on a e ad hdl en OO e 209 5 7 10 SNOW INLCM ACCS Stat A A 210 5 160 SNOW interraces COSCON OUION dreserien i erties teal Ost lio doo tdi e 212 5 7 17 SHOW Interfaces CONS Sii iii is 212 S VO SNOW PONS JUMBO AMS dl e dd a oe 215 5 7 20 port stormscontrol Droadcastenabole sss deies a td 216 5 21 p rt StOrm COMMT Ol DIO AD CAS Wate ass ns iisaia 216 5 1 22 SNOW POMS SlOMN COMMON sinceris da aaa 217 DO GV IRE COMMAS esrcset ak oasis hth ele eae a ee eae A cen eet A A ae date tat ece Ma aA ak ceetace baah ae a 218 S0 Ro jox lo Alo elo AAA et a etree at aie eet ee ec 218 309 2 GVEP Ena IMM cis 218 Sn ued aE a 219 0 04 OVIP vVlan ere alone dd a lO 220 950 0 OVID TeOISIANOM ON DI de do 221 SO L Clear VP Stallone o och vote cosas 221 5 8 8 SNOW Vrp Configuration t csaak teaa aa Oaa aara R RR RRE eaa T aa
216. hable Network or host unreachable The switch found no corresponding entry in the route table To ping an out of band IP address use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Examples The following example displays a ping to IP address 10 1 1 1 Console ping 10 1 1 1 64 bytes from 10 1 1 1 icmp_seg 0 time 11 ms 64 bytes from 10 1 1 1 icmp_seq 1 time 8 ms 64 bytes from 10 1 1 1 icmp_seq 2 time 8 ms 64 bytes from 10 1 1 1 icmp_seq 3 time 7 ms Ae 10 1 1 1 PING Statistics 4 packets transmitted 4 packets received 0 packet loss round trip ms min avg max 7 8 11 Console gt 5 23 2 traceroute The traceroute User EXEC command discovers the routes that packets will actually take when traveling to their destination 314 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax traceroute p address hostnme size packet_size ttl max tt count packet_count timeout time_ouf source p address tos tos p address P address of the destination host An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines Range 1 160 characters hostname Hostname of the destination host Range Valid IP Address size packet_size Number of bytes in a packet Range 40 1500 ttl max tt The largest TTL value that can be used The traceroute command terminates when the destination is reached or when this value is reached Range 1 255 count packet_cou
217. hat the device has an IP address defined that corresponding management access is granted and that the workstation used to access the device is connected to the device prior to beginning using CLI commands 156 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Note The following steps are for use on the console line only To begin running CLI perform the following 1 Start the device and wait until the startup procedure is complete 2 The User Exec mode is entered into and the prompt console gt is displayed 3 Configure the device and enter the necessary commands to complete the required tasks 4 When finished exit the session with the quit or exit command When a different user is required to log onto the system in the Privileged EXEC Command mode the login command is entered This effectively logs off the current user and logs on the new user 5 2 3 Editing Features Entering Commands A CLI command is a series of keywords and arguments Keywords identify a command and arguments specify configuration parameters For example in the command show interfaces status ethernet e5 show interfaces and status are keywords ethernet is an argument that specifies the interface type and e5 specifies the port When entering commands the Giga ports are referred to with a prefix g and the 10 100 Mbps ports are referred to with a prefix e The ports are preceded by the unit number The unit number for a standalone device is 1
218. he cost of the path from this bridge to the root This indicates the device Maximum Age Time The Maximum Age Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge waits before sending configuration messages The default max age is 20 seconds The range is 6 to 40 seconds This indicates the device Hello Time The Hello Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a root bridge waits between configuration messages The default is 2 seconds The range is 1 to 10 seconds This indicates the device forward delay time The Forward Delay Time indicates the amount of time in seconds a bridge remains in a listening and learning state before forwarding packets The default is 15 seconds The range is 4 to 30 seconds which indicates the total amount of STP state changes that have occurred Which indicates the amount of time that has elapsed since the bridge was initialized or reset and the last topographic change occurred The time is displayed in a day hour minute second format for example 2 days 5 hours 10 minutes and 4 seconds 107 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 9 2 The Global STP The Global STP screen see figure 4 46 contains parameters for enabling STP on the device Global Setting Spanning Tree State which indicates if STP is enabled on the device Global STP Global Setting Spanning Tree State Disable Mi STP Operation Mode Classic STP Y BPDU Handling Flooding Path Cost Default Yalues Lon
219. he field range is 1 65535 The default value is 50 e Current Number of Displays the current number of samples taken View History button This button Samples opens the RMON History screen 53 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Owner Where displays the RMON station or user that requested the RMON information The field range is 0 20 characters Use the Add to List button when you add the configured RMON sampling to the Log Table at the bottom of the screen 1 RMON History Table The RMON History screen see figure 4 18 contains interface specific statistical network samplings Each table entry represents all counter values compiled during a single sample RMON History History Entry No v Owner lt lt Previous Next gt gt Sample Received Received Broadcast Multicast CRC Align Undersize Oversize Fragments Jabbers No Bytes Packets Packets Packets Errors Packets Packets Octets RMON History Control Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 18 RMON History Table screen e Sample No Which indicates the sample number from which the statistics were taken e Received Bytes Displays the number of octets received on the interface since the device was last Octets refreshed This number includes bad packets and FCS octets but excludes framing bits e Received Packets Displays the number of packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed including bad packets Multicast and Broadcast packe
220. he two fields will be 250ct07 and 5 00 The possible field values are e Date The date at which DST begins The possible field range is 1 31 e Month The month of the year in which DST begins The possible field range is Jan Dec e Year The year in which the configured DST begins e Time The time at which DST begins The field format is Hour Minute for example 05 30 Defines the time that DST ends in countries other than USA or European in the format DayMonthYear in one field and time in another For example DST ends on the 23rd March 2008 12 00 am the two fields will be 23Mar08 and 12 00 The possible field values are e Date The date at which DST ends The possible field range is 1 31 e Month The month of the year in which DST ends The possible field range is Jan Dec e Year The year in which the configured DST ends e Time The time at which DST starts The field format is Hour Minute for example 05 30 Defines the time that DST starts in countries other than USA or Europe where the DST is constant year to year The possible field values are Defines the time that DST begins each year For example DST begins locally every second Sunday in April at 5 00 am The possible field values are e Day The day of the week from which DST begins every year The possible field range is Sunday Saturday e Week The week within the month from which DST begins every year The 35 User s Manual of
221. hentication and encryption key for all TACAS communications between the router and the TACACS server This key must match the encryption used on the TACACS daemon Range Up to 160 characters Default Configuration Empty string Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the authentication encryption key Console config tacacs server key abc s 5 25 3 tacacs server timeout The tacacs server timeout command in global configuration mode sets the timeout value To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax tacacs server timeout timeout no tacacs server timeout 334 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds Range 1 1000 Default Configuration 5 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the timeout value as 300 Console config tacacs server timeout 300 5 25 4 tacacs server source ip The tacacs server source ip command in global configuration mode specifies the source IP address that will be used for the communication with TACACS servers To return to default use the no form of this command Syntax tacacs server source ip source no tacacs server ip source Specifies the source IP address An out of band
222. hich the bandwidth settings are displayed e Ingress Rate Limit which indicates if rate limiting is defined on the interface Status e Rate Limit Defines the amount of bandwidth assigned to the interface 62 1000000 Kbps The possible field values are 62 1000000 Kbps e Egress Shaping Indicates if rate limiting is enabled on the interface Rate on Selected Port e Committed Defines CIR as the queue shaping type Information Rate The possible field value is 64 1 000 000 Kbps CIR 93 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 8 5 Basic Mode The Basic Mode screen see figure 4 39 contains the following fields Basic Mode Trust Mode Trust Mode cos Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 39 Basic Mode screen The page contains the following fields e Trust Mode Displays the trust mode If a packet s CoS tag and DSCP tag are mapped to different queues the Trust Mode determines the queue to which the packet is assigned Possible values are e CoS which sets trust mode to CoS on the device and the CoS mapping determined the packet queue e DSCP sets trust mode to the DSCP on the device The DSCP mapping determines the packet queue 4 8 6 Advanced Mode Advanced QoS mode see figure 4 40 provides rules for specifying flow classification and assigning rule actions that relate to bandwidth management The rules are based on the Access Control Lists see Access Control Tab 94
223. how rmon history index throughput errors other period seconds index The requested set of samples Range 1 65535 throughput Displays throughput counters errors Displays error counters other Displays drop and collision counters 211 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 period seconds Specifies the requested period time to display Range 1 4294967295 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for throughput on index number 5 Console show rmon history 5 throughput Sample Set 1 Owner CLI Interface g1 Interval 1800 Requested samples 50 Granted samples 50 Maximum table size 500 Broadcast Jan 18 2002 21 57 00 303595962 357568 Jan 18 2002 21 57 30 287696304 2 5686 Multicast 20 17 The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history for errors on index number 5 Console show rmon history 5 errors Sample Set 1 Owner CLI Interface 1 g1 Interval 1800 Requested samples 50 Granted samples 50 Maximum table size 500 Undersize CRC Align Jan 18 2002 21 57 00 Jan 18 2002 21 57 30 218 Oversize Fragments Jabbers User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The following example displays RMON Ethernet Statistics hist
224. hown below Poo o CI Authentication server a ee 207 1X switch RADIUS E P Workstations a E clients E MS e Client the device workstation that requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the switch The workstation must be running 802 1 X compliant client software such as that offered in the Microsoft Windows XP operating system The client is the supplicant in the IEEE 802 1X specification e Authentication server performs the actual authentication of the client The authentication server validates the identity of the client and notifies the switch whether or not the client is authorized to access the LAN and switch services Because the switch acts as the proxy the authentication service is transparent to the client In this release the Remote Authentication Dial ln User Service RADIUS security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP extensions is the only supported authentication server it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3 0 RADIUS operates in a client server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients e Switch 802 1X device controls the physical access to the network based on the authentication status of the client The switch acts as an intermediary proxy between the client and the authentication server requesting identity information from the client
225. hport trunk native vian The switchport trunk native vlan interface configuration command defines the port as a member of the specified VLAN and the VLAN ID as the port default VLAN ID PVID To configure the default VLAN ID use the no form of this command Syntax switchport trunk native vlan vian id no switchport trunk native vlan vilan id Valid VLAN ID of the active VLAN Default Configuration VLAN ID 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines This command has the following consequences incoming untagged frames are assigned to this VLAN and outgoing traffic in this VLAN on this port is sent untagged despite the normal situation where traffic sent from a trunkmode port is all tagged The command adds the port as a member in the VLAN If the port is already a member in the VLAN not as a native it should be first removed from the VLAN Example The following example e8 in trunk mode is configured to use VLAN number 123 as the native VLAN Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport trunk native vlan 123 5 27 11 switchport general allowed vian The switchport general allowed vlan interface configuration command adds or removes VLANs from a general port Syntax switchport general allowed vlan add v an ist tagged untagged switchport general allowed vlan remove vian list add vlan list List of VLAN IDs to add Sep
226. https server Default Configuration The default for the device is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines You must use the crypto certificate generate command to generate the HTTPS certificate Example The following example enables the device to be configured from a browser Console enable ip https server 360 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 28 4 ip https port The ip https port global configuration command configures a TCP port for use by a secure web browser to configure the device To use the default port use the no form of this command Syntax ip https port port number no ip https port port number Port number for use by the HTTP server Range 0 65535 Default Configuration This default port number is 443 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the https port number to 100 Console enable ip https port 100 5 28 5 crypto certificate generate The crypto certificate generate global configuration command generates a HTTPS certificate Syntax crypto certificate generate key generate ength key generate Regenerate SSL RSA key length Specifies the SSL RSA key length If unspecified length defaults to 1024 Range 512 2048 Default Configuration The Certificate and the SSL RSA key pairs do not exist Comm
227. ian global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple VLANs Syntax interface range vlan v an range all vian range A list of valid VLAN IDs to add Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces a hyphen designates a range of IDs all All existing static VLANs Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode 346 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each interface in the range If the command returns an error on one of the interfaces an error message is displayed and execution continues on other interfaces Example The following example groups VLAN 221 until 228 and VLAN 889 to receive the same command Console config interface range vlan 221 228 889 Console config if 5 27 6 name The name interface configuration command adds a name to a VLAN To remove the VLAN name use the no form of this command Syntax name string no name string Unique name up to 32 characters in length to be associated with this VLAN Default Configuration No name is defined Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines The VLAN name should be unique Example The following example names VLAN number 19 with the name Marketing Console config interface
228. ible field values are e Classic Lock by which locks the port using the classic lock mechanism The port is immediately locked regardless of the number of addresses that have already been learned e Limited Dynamic Lock which locks the port by deleting the current dynamic MAC addresses associated with the port The port learns up to the maximum addresses allowed on the port Both relearning and aging MAC addresses are enabled Specifies the number of MAC addresses that can be learned on the port The Max Entries field is enabled only if Locked is selected in the Interface Status field In addition the Limited Dynamic Lock mode is selected The default is 1 85 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Action on Violation Where indicates the action to be applied to packets arriving on a locked port The possible field values are e Discard which discards packets from any unlearned source This is the default value e Forward Normal forwards packets from an unknown source without learning the MAC address e Discard Disable which discards packets from any unlearned source and shuts down the port The port remains shut down until reactivated or until the device is reset e Enable Trap This enables traps when a packet is received on a locked port e Trap Frequency Which the amount of time in seconds between traps The default value is 10 seconds In order to change the Learning Mode the Lock Interface must be set
229. icast router interfaces Syntax show ip igmp snooping mrouter interface vian id 228 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 vlan_id VLAN ID value Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows IGMP snooping mrouter information Console show ip igmp snooping mrouter 5 9 8 show ip igmp snooping interface The show ip igmp snooping interface User EXEC command displays IGMP snooping configuration Syntax show ip igmp snooping interface vlan id vian_id LAN ID value Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The example displays IGMP snooping information Console show ip igmp snooping interface 1 IGMP Snooping is globaly disabled 229 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 IGMP Snooping is disabled on VLAN 1 IGMP host timeout is 260 sec IGMP Immediate leave is disabled IGMP leave timeout is 60 sec IGMP mrouter timeout is 300 sec Automatic learning of multicast router ports is enabled 5 9 9 show ip igmp snooping groups The show ip igmp snooping groups user EXEC command displays the multicast groups learned by IGMP snooping Syntax show ip igmp snooping groups vlan v an id
230. ied If the authentication server cannot be reached the switch can retransmit the request If no response is received from the server after the specified number of attempts authentication fails and network access is not granted When a client logs off it sends an EAPOL logoff message causing the switch port to transition to the unauthorized state If the link state of a port transitions from up to down or if an EAPOL logoff frame is received the port returns to the unauthorized 82 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 state HM 802 1X Settings of WGSD Switch Port based authentication enables authenticating system users on a per port basis via an external server Only authenticated and approved system users can transmit and receive data Ports are authenticated via the RADIUS server using the Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP Refer to figure 4 30 here aN eS EA ae esas Tice AAA ee ss cee H A aN E Nae Wate K D Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multi 802 1x Settings Parameters Enable 802 1x O Port el Status Port Control Force Authorized Enable Periodic Reauthentication F Setting Timer Update Table Base Table More Detatils Status Enable as Port Control Periodic A ay Reauthentication et Force Authorized o 2 e2 Force Authorized False 3 e3 Force Authorized False 4 et Force Authorized False 5 es Force Authorized False 6 e6 Force Authorize
231. ield range is 0 15 e Interface Indicates the interface for which the MSTP settings are displayed The possible field values are two types e Port Specifies the port for which the MSTP settings are displayed e LAG Specifies the LAG for which the MSTP settings are displayed e Port State where indicates whether the port is enabled for the specific instance e Type indicates if the port is a point to point port or a port connected to a hub The possible field values are e Boundary Port attaches MST bridges to LAN in an outlying region If the port is a boundary port it also indicates whether the device on the other side of the link is working in RSTP or STP mode e Master Port where provides connectivity from a MSTP region to the outlying CIST root e Internal indicates the port is an internal port e Role Indicates the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide to STP paths The possible field values are e Root provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root device e Designated indicates the port or LAG via which the designated device is attached to the LAN e Alternate provides an alternate path to the root device from the root 116 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 interface e Backup provides a backup path to the designated port path toward the Spanning Tree leaves Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point to point link Backup ports also occur
232. ient and cannot provide time services to other systems x Note 4 3 Port Configuration In this field you can see these parts such as port settings Link aggregation LACP 4 3 1 Port settings To use the port settings screen for setting up each of the switch s ports It shows these parts port description admin status link status speed duplex MDI MDIX Flow control type LAG PVE see Figure 4 6 36 The Port Settings screen contains the following fields e Port e Description e Admin Status e Link Status e Speed e Duplex e MDI MDIX e Flow control St aA PARES oe IAS RAR ASA Bans LN AN E A es A NT Y an Al A y We S B or ontig E UC 5 DL ric B 3 Big JOS a a Port Settings Port el e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e e8 gi g2 Description Administrative Status L Up Up up Up Up Up Up Up Up v v v Y IAE ala lala Link Status Down Down Down Up Down Down Down Down Down Down Speed 100M Duplex Full MDI MDIX MDIX Figure 4 6 Port Settings screen User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Flow Control Disable Type 100M copper LAG PYE Detai Detail Save Config M Cancel Config Shows the port number You can click on the Detail button of the appropriate port G1 G2 to use an SFP module and the Detail button shows the Port Configuration Detail screen which include port description port type admi
233. ig radius server timeout 5 5 18 6 radius server deadtime The radius server deadtime global configuration command improves RADIUS response times when servers are unavailable The command is used to cause the unavailable servers to be skipped To reset the default value use the no form of this command Syntax radius server deadtime deadtime no radius server deadtime deadtime Length of time in minutes for which a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests Range 0 2000 Default Configuration The default dead time is O minutes Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets a dead time where a RADIUS server is skipped over by transaction requests for this period to 10 minutes 212 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Console config radius server deadtime 10 5 18 7 show radius servers The show radius servers user EXEC command displays the RADIUS server settings Syntax show radius servers Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays the RADIUS server settings Console show radius servers Port IP address Auth Acct TimeOut Retransmit Deadtime Source IP Priority 172 16 1 1 1645 1646 Global Global Global Global
234. ig pubkey key key string rsa AAAAB3NzaC 1 yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCvTnRwPWI 5 22 8 key string The key string SSH public key string configuration command manually specifies a SSH public key Syntax key string text text Authentication string that must be sentand received in the packets using the routing protocol being authenticated The string can contain from 1 to 16 uppercase and lowercase alphanumeric characters Default Configuration By default the keys do not exist Command Mode SSH Public Key string configuration User Guidelines Use the key string row command to specify the SSH public key row by row Each row must begin with the keystring row command This command is useful for configuration files UU encoded DER format is the same format in authorized_keys file used by OpenSSH Example The following example enters public key strings for SSH public key clients called bob Console config crypto key pubkey chain ssh Console config pubkey chain user key bob rsa Console config pubkey key key string rsa AAAAB3NzaC 1yc2EAAAADAQABAAABAQCvTnRwPWI Al4kpqlw9GBRonZQZxjHKcqKL6rMIQ ZNXfZSkvHG QuslIZ 76ILMFT34v7u7ChFAE Vu4GRipSwoQUvV35LqJJk671OU zfwOl1g kTwmI75QR9gHujSEKwGN2QWXgh3ub8gDjTSq muSn Wd05iDX2IExXQWU08licglk02LY ciz Z4TrEU 9FJxwPiIVQOjc KBXuROjuNg5SnFYsY OZCkON W9a tnkm1shRE7Di71 w3fNiOA 6w9044t6 AINEICBCCA4YcF6zMzaT 1wefWwX6f 310 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Rmt5nhhqdA
235. ignated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable v Cancel Config Save Config Figure 4 49 RSTP Port Settings screen The page contains the following fields e Interface e Role e Mode e Fast Link e Port State e Point to Point Where displays the port or LAG on which Rapid STP is enabled Where indicates the port role assigned by the STP algorithm in order to provide to STP paths The possible field values are e Root where provides the lowest cost path to forward packets to root switch e Designated where indicates that the port or LAG via which the designated switch is attached to the LAN e Alternate which provides an alternate path to the root switch from the root interface e Backup which provides a backup path to the designated port path toward the Spanning Tree leaves Backup ports occur only when two ports are connected in a loop by a point to point link Backup ports also occur when a LAN has two or more connections connected to a shared segment e Disabled which indicates the port is not participating in the Spanning Tree Where indicates the current Spanning Tree mode The Spanning Tree mode is selected in the Global STP screen The possible field values are e Classic STP which indicates that Classic STP is enabled on the device e Rapid STP which indicates that Rapid STP is enabled on the device e Multiple STP which indicates that Multiple STP is enabled on the device This indicates if Fast
236. iguration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays GVRP statistics information Console show gvrp error statistics GVRP error statistics INVPROT Invalid Protocol Id INVPLEN Invalid PDU Length INVATYP Invalid Attribute Type INVALEN Invalid Attribute Length INVAVAL Invalid Attribute Value INVEVENT Invalid Event Port INVPROT INVATYP INVAVAL INVALEN INVEVENT 224 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 9 IGMP Snooping Commands 5 9 1 ip igmp snooping Global The ip igmp snooping global configuration command enables Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping To disable IGMP snooping use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Default Configuration IGMP snooping is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables IGMP snooping Console config ip igmp snooping 5 9 2 ip igmp snooping Interface The ip igmp snooping interface configuration command enables Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP snooping on a specific VLAN To disable IGMP snooping on a VLAN interface use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping no ip igmp snooping Default Configuration IGMP snooping is
237. ime 01 Jan 2000 09 06 25 01 Jan 2000 08 49 35 01 Jan 2000 07 56 16 01 Jan 2000 07 56 10 01 Jan 2000 07 40 23 01 Jan 2000 05 13 50 01 Jan 2000 05 12 15 01 Jan 2000 05 00 47 01 Jan 2000 04 21 11 01 Jan 2000 04 19 41 01 Jan 2000 04 19 35 01 Jan 2000 04 00 58 Memory Logs Description ofAA T CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 51 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED of44 I CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED WwAAA I CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED w 4044 I DISCONNECT http connection For user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinatio n 192 168 1 254 TERMINATED WAAA I CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED Informational oLINK I Up e6 Warning oLINK W Down e6 2 404 I CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED o448 1 DISCONNECT http connection For user admin source 192 168 1 51 destinatio n192 168 1 254 TERMINATED 444 I CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED YAAA I DISCONNECT http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 60 destinatio n 192 168 1 254 TERMINATED oA44 I CONNECT New http connection for user admin source 192 168 1 51 destinati on 192 168 1 254 ACCEPTED Severity
238. indicates that no bit is important A wildcard of 0 0 0 0 indicates that all the bits are important For example if the source IP address 149 36 184 198 and the wildcard mask is 255 36 184 00 the first eight bits of the IP address are ignored while the last eight bits are used Where matches the destination MAC address to which packets are addressed to the ACE Wildcard Mask which defines the destination IP address wildcard mask Which matches the packet s VLAN ID to the ACE The possible field values are 2 to 4094 Where specifies the packet s Ethernet type Use the Add to List button to add the configured MAC Based ACLs to the MAC Based ACL Table at the bottom of the screen 4 6 4 MAC Based ACL Configure Sample This chapter will teah you how to configure a MAC based ACL in the WGSD Switch NW Sample Case Deny IP packets to specific Class C network gt Purpose 71 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 When the workstation with IP address 192 168 99 188 and MAC address 00 1 1 08 57 E0 1E ping to PC with IP address 192 168 99 57 and MAC address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE use MAC based ACL function from ACL to deny or shutdown and permit the traffic transmit ability of notebook that connect to port 8 of WGSD Switch gt Case Design Source MAC Address 00 11 08 57 E0 1E Destination MAC Address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE Applied Interface Interface g2 gt Device Connection and Configuration MAC Addre
239. ing Tree Protocol is configured and enabled primary links are established and duplicated links are blocked automatically The reactivation of the blocked links at the time of a primary link failure is also accomplished automatically without operator intervention This automatic network reconfiguration provides maximum uptime to network users However the concepts of the Spanning Tree Algorithm and protocol are a complicated and complex subject and must be fully researched and understood It is possible to cause serious degradation of the performance of the network if the Spanning Tree is incorrectly configured Please read the following before making any changes from the default values The Switch STP performs the following functions Creates a single spanning tree from any combination of switching or bridging elements Creates multiple spanning trees from any combination of ports contained within a single switch in user specified groups Automatically reconfigures the spanning tree to compensate for the failure addition or removal of any element in the tree Reconfigures the spanning tree without operator intervention Bridge Protocol Data Units For STP to arrive at a stable network topology the following information is used The unique switch identifier The path cost to the root associated with each switch port The por tidentifier STP communicates between switches on the network using Bridge Protocol Data Units BPDUs Each BPDU contain
240. ion User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 possible field values are e Connected there is currently a connection between the device and the TACACS server e Not Connected there is not currently a connection between the device and the TACACS server Maintains a single open connection between the device and the TACACS server when selected the Add to List button to add the TACACS configuration to the TACACS table at the bottom of the screen 79 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 7 4 802 1x settings Understanding IEEE 802 1X Port Based Authentication The IEEE 802 1X standard defines a client server based access control and authentication protocol that restricts unauthorized clients from connecting to a LAN through publicly accessible ports The authentication server authenticates each client connected to a switch port before making available any services offered by the switch or the LAN Until the client is authenticated 802 1X access control allows only Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN EAPOL traffic through the port to which the client is connected After authentication is successful normal traffic can pass through the port This section includes this conceptual information e Device Roles e Authentication Initiation and Message Exchange e Ports in Authorized and Unauthorized States E Device Roles With 802 1X port based authentication the devices in the network have specific roles as s
241. ion To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax aaa authentication login default ist name method1 method2 no aaa authentication login default ist name Default Uses the listed authentication methods that follow this argument as the default list of methods when a user logs in listname Character string used to name the list of authentication methods activated when a user logs in method method2 Specify at least one from the following table Source or destination Uses the enable password for authentication Uses the line password for authentication Uses the local username database for authentication 160 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 none Uses no authentication radius Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication Uses username Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication Uses username Default Configuration The local user database is checked This has the same effect as the command aaa authentication login listname local Note On the console login succeeds without any authentication check if the authentication method is not defined Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The default and optional list names created with the aaa authentication login command are used with the login authentication command Create a list by entering the aaa authentication login ist name method command for a
242. irections of more than one port are monitored the capacity may exceed the bandwidth of the target port In this case the division of the monitored packets may not be equal The user is advised to use caution in assigning port monitoring Example The following example shows how traffic on port e8 source port is copied to port g1 destination port Console config interface ethernet g1 Console config if port monitor e8 5 16 2 show ports monitor The show ports monitor user EXEC command displays the port monitoring status Syntax show ports monitor Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode 255 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how the port copy status is displayed Console show ports monitor Source Port Destination Port Status VLAN Tagging Active Active Active 5 17 QoS Commands 5 17 1 qos The qos global configuration command enables quality of service QoS on the device and enters QoS basic or advanced mode 256 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Use the no form of this command to disable the QoS features on the device Syntax qos advanced no qos advanced QoS advanced mode which enables the full range of QoS configuration Default Configuration By default QoS is enabled in basic mode
243. irtual terminal for secured remote console access SSH Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays the line configuration Console show line Console configuration Interactive timeout 20 History 10 Baudrate 38400 Databits 8 Parity none Stopbits 1 Telnet configuration Interactive timeout 10 minutes 10 seconds History 10 SSH configuration Interactive timeout 10 minutes 10 seconds History 10 5 13 Management ACL Commands 5 13 1 management access list User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The management access list configuration command defines an access list for management and enters the access list for 242 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 configuration Once in the access list configuration mode the denied or permitted access conditions are configured with the deny and permit commands To remove an access list use the no form of this command Syntax management access list name no management access list name name The access list name using up to 32 characters Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines This command enters the access list configuration mode where the denied or permitted access conditions with th
244. is displayed 180 console show bridge multicast address table MAC Address 0100 5e02 0203 static 0100 5e02 0208 static 0100 5e02 0208 dynamic Forbidden ports for multicast addresses MAC Address 0100 5e02 0203 0100 5e02 0208 224 239 130 2 2 3 static 224 239 130 2 2 8 static 224 239 130 2 2 8 dynamic Forbidden ports for multicast addresses IP Address 224 239 130 2 2 3 224 239 130 2 2 8 5 4 17 show bridge multicast filtering User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The show bridge multicast filtering privileged EXEC command displays the multicast filtering configuration Syntax show bridge multicast filtering vian id ylan_id A valid VLAN ID value Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example the multicast configuration for VLAN 1 is displayed 181 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 console show bridge multicast filtering 1 Filtering Enabled VLAN 1 Forward All Static Status Forbidden Filter Forward Forward s Forward d 5 4 18 show ports security The show ports security privileged EXEC command displays the port lock status Syntax show ports security ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel n
245. is manual that is incorrect misleading or incomplete we would appreciate your comments and suggestions FCC Warning This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the Instruction manual may cause harmful interference to radio communications Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at whose own expense CE Mark Warning This is a Class A product In a domestic environment this product may cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take adequate measures WEEE Warning To avoid the potential effects on the environment and human health as a result of the presence of hazardous substances in electrical and electronic equipment end users of electrical and electronic equipment should understand the meaning of the crossed out wheeled bin symbol Do not dispose of WEEE as unsorted municipal waste and have to collect such WEEE separately Revision PLANET 8 Port Desktop Managed Ethernet Switch User s Manual FOR MODELS WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 REVIS
246. isabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA NjA NjA NjA LAG8 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA NjA N A N A v Figure 4 48 STP Port status screen 4 9 4 RSTP Port settings While the classic spanning tree prevents Layer 2 forwarding loops in a general network topology convergence can take between 30 60 seconds This time may delay detecting possible loops and propagating status topology changes Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol RSTP detects and uses network topologies that allow a faster STP convergence without creating forwarding loops refer to figure 4 49 111 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 ARAS t3 DOU RSTP Port Settings Interface Port el LAG Role Designated Mode STP Fast Link Disable Port State Disabled Point to Point Admin Status Auto v Point to Point Oper Status Enable Activate Protocol Migration Test 5 Update lt lt Previous 1 2 Next Fast Link Port Point to Point Point to Point Interface Role Mode Oper Status Status Admin Status Operational Status 2 e Designated STP 2 e2 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 3 e3 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 4 et Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 5 e5 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 6 e6 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 7 e7 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 8 e8 Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 9 gl Designated STP Disable Disabled Auto Enable 10 g2 Des
247. itted Burst Size CBS Bytes per second Add to List Aggregate CIR CBS Exceed Action Policer Name Cancel Figure 4 44 Aggregate Policer Settings screen The page contains the following fields e Aggregate Policer Where enter a name in this field Name e Ingress Committed This defines the CIR in bits per second This field is only relevant when the Police value is Single Information Rate CIR e Ingress Committed This defines the CBS in bytes per second This field is only relevant when the Police value is Single Burst Size CBS e Exceed Action Action assigned to incoming packets exceeding the CIR This field is only relevant when the Police value is Single Possible values are e Drop which drops packets exceeding the defined CIR value e Remark DSCP where remarks packet s DSCP values exceeding the defined CIR value e None forwarding packets exceeding the defined CIR value 99 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 9 Spanning Tree m Theory of Spanning Tree Protocol The IEEE 802 1D Spanning Tree Protocol and IEEE 802 1W Rapid Spanning Tree Protocol allow for the blocking of links between switches that form loops within the network When multiple links between switches are detected a primary link is established Duplicated links are blocked from use and become standby links The protocol allows for the duplicate links to be used in the event of a failure of the primary link Once the Spann
248. l Configuration mode User Guidelines Do not include spaces in the text string Example The following example displays setting up the system contact point as abc_Technical_ Support 289 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Console config snmp server contact abc_Tecnical_ Support 5 20 3 snmp server location The snmp server location global configuration command sets up information on where the device is located To remove the location string use the no form of this command Syntax snmp server location text no snmp server location text Character string up to 160 characters describing the system location Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Do not include spaces in the text string Example The following example sets the device location as New_York Console config snmp server location New_York 5 20 4 snmp server enable traps The snmp server enable traps global configuration command enables the switch to send SNMP traps To disable SNMP traps use the no form of the command Syntax snmp server enable traps no snmp server enable traps Default Configuration Enabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 290 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Examples The following example displays the command to enab
249. l number no arp ip_addr hw_addr ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number _addr IP address or IP alias to map to the specified MAC address hw_addr MAC address to map to the specified IP address or IP alias ethernet interface number Ethernet port number vlan vian id VLAN number port channel number Port channel number Default Configuration By default ARP is disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The software uses ARP cache entries to translate 32 bit IP addresses into 48 bit hardware addresses Because most hosts support dynamic resolution static ARP cache entries do not need to be specified Example The following example adds the IP address 198 133 219 232 and MAC address 00 00 0c 40 0f bc to the ARP table Console config arp 198 133 219 232 0000 0c40 0fbc ethernet e8 5 10 6 arp timeout The arp timeout global configuration command configures how long an entry remains in the ARP cache To restore the default value use the no form of this command Syntax arp timeout seconds no arp timeout seconds seconds Time in seconds that an entry remains in the ARP cache Range 1 40000000 Default Configuration The default timeout is 60000 seconds 234 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines It Is recommended not to set the timeout value to less than
250. l usage VLAN of a port If an internal usage is not defined for a Port and the user wants to define an IP interface the software chooses one of the unused VLANs If a VLAN ID was chosen by the software for internal usage and the user wants to use that VLAN ID for static or dynamic VLAN he should either remove the IP interface creates the VLAN and recreate the IP interface or use this command to define explicit internal usage VLAN Examples The following example reserves a VLAN as the internal usage VLAN of an interface Console config ip internal usage vlan 10 5 27 19 show vlan The show vlan privileged EXEC command displays VLAN information Syntax show vlan tag vian id name vian name vilan id A valid VLAN ID vian name A valid VLAN name string Range 1 32 characters Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays all VLAN information console show vlan 356 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e 1 4 8 g 1 2 ch 1 8 Required e2 permanent Required e3 permanent Required 5 27 20 show vian internal usage The show vlan internal usage privileged EXEC command displays a list of VLANs being used internally by the switch Syntax show vlan internal usage Default Configuration This command has
251. lassification use the no form of this command Syntax switchport general map protocols group group vlan vian id no switchport general map protocols group group group Group number as defined in the map protocol protocols group command Range 1 2147483647 vilan id Define the VLAN ID in the classifying rule Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets a protocol based classification rule of protocol group 1 to VLAN 8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport general map protocols group 1 vlan 8 5 27 18 ip internal usage vlan The ip internal usage vlan interface configuration command reserves a VLAN as the internal usage VLAN of an interface Use the no form of this command to reset to default Syntax ip internal usage vlan vian id no ip internal usage vlan vian id VLAN ID of the internal usage VLAN Range Valid VLAN Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 355 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel User Guidelines An internal usage VLAN is required when an IP interface is defined on Ethernet port or Port channel Using this command the user can define the interna
252. ld and the value at the last sampling interval is less than this threshold a single event is generated Falling Threshold A sampled statistic threshold When the current sampled value is less than or equal to this threshold and the value at the last sampling interval is greater than this threshold a single event is generated Rising Event The event index used when a rising threshold is crossed Falling Event The event index used when a falling threshold is crossed 5 19 8 rmon event The rmon event global configuration command configures an event To remove an event use the no form of this command Syntax rmon event index type community texf description texf owner name no rmon event index index The event index Range 1 65535 type The type of notification that the device generates about this event Can have the following values none log trap log trap In the case of log an entry is made in the log table for each event In the case of trap an SNMP trap is sent to one or more management stations community text If an SNMP trap is to be sent it is sent to the SNMP community specified by this octet string Range 0 127 characters description text A comment describing this event Range 0 127 characters owner name Enter a name that specifies who configured this event If unspecified the name is an empty string Range 0 127 characters Default Configuration This command has no d
253. le because no keyword is entered a prompt is displayed After the keyword is selected a message 338 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 confirming the command entry method is displayed Console configure Console config 5 26 4 login The login user EXEC command changes a login username Syntax login Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to enter privileged EXEC mode and login Console gt login User Name admin Password Console 5 26 5 exit configuration The exit command exits any configuration mode to the next highest mode in the CLI mode hierarchy Syntax exit Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 339 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode All command modes User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example changes the configuration mode from Interface Configuration mode to User EXEC mode Console config if exit Console config exit Console 5 26 6 exit EXEC The exit user EXEC command closes an active terminal session by logging off the device Syntax exit Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC command mode Us
254. le SNMP traps Console config snmp server enable traps 5 20 5 snmp server trap authentication The snmp server trap authentication global configuration command enables the switch to send Simple Network Management Protocol traps when authentication fails To disable SNMP authentication failed traps use the no form of this command Syntax snmp server trap authentication no snmp server trap authentication Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays the command to enable authentication failed SNMP traps Console config snmp server trap authentication Console config snmp server host 10 1 1 1 management 2 5 20 6 snmp server host The snmp server host global configuration command specifies the recipient of Simple Network Management Protocol notification operation To remove the specified host use the no form of this command Syntax snmp server host host addr community string 1 2 no snmp server host host addr host address Internet address of the host the targeted recipient An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the User Guidelines 291 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 community string Password like community string sent with the notification operation R ange 1 20 characters
255. les The switch with the lowest Bridge ID switch C was elected the root bridge and the ports were selected to give a high port cost between switches B and C The two optional Gigabit ports default port cost 4 on switch A are connected to one optional Gigabit port on both switch B and C The redundant link between switch B and C is deliberately chosen as a 100 Mbps Fast Ethernet link default port cost 19 Gigabit ports could be used but the port cost should be increased from the default to ensure that the link between switch B and switch C is the blocked link 105 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 MW Supported Spanning Tree Protocol of WGSD Series Switch Spanning Tree Protocol STP provides tree topography for any arrangement of bridges STP also provides one path between end stations on a network eliminating loops Loops occur when alternate routes exist between hosts Loops in an extended network can cause bridges to forward traffic indefinitely resulting in increased traffic and reducing network efficiency The device supports the following Spanning Tree versions e Classic STP by which provides a single path between end stations avoiding and eliminating loops e Rapid STP which detects and uses network topologies that provide faster convergence of the spanning tree without creating forwarding loops e Multiple STP which provides full connectivity for packets allocated to any VLAN Multiple STP is based on the RST
256. lex then the performance will be poor 100Base TX port link LED is lit but the traffic is irregular Solution Check that the attached device is not set to dedicate full duplex Some devices use a physical or software switch to change duplex modes Auto negotiation may not recognize this type of full duplex setting Why the Switch doesn t connect to the network Solution Check the LNK ACT LED on the switch Try another port on the Switch Make sure the cable is installed properly Make sure the cable is the right type Turn off the power After a while turn on power again How to deal forgotten password situation of switch Solution 1 Please contact Planet switch support team and the mail address is support_switch planet com tw 3 9 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 APPENDEX A A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments When connecting your 10 100Mbps Ethernet Switch to another switch a bridge or a hub a straight or crossover cable is necessary Each port of the Switch supports auto MDI MDI X detection That means you can directly connect the Switch to any Ethernet devices without making a crossover cable The following table and diagram show the standard RJ 45 receptacle connector and their pin assignments 10 100Mbps 10 100Base TX RJ 45 Connector pin assignment Contact MDI Media Dependant Interface 1 Tx transmit 2 Tx transmit 3 Rx receive 4 5 Not used 6 Rx receive 7 8 Not used 100
257. lines for this command Example The following example clears messages from the internal syslog message logging buffer Console clear logging Clear logging buffer y n y 5 24 7 logging file The logging file global configuration command limits syslog messages sent to the logging file based on severity To cancel the buffer use the no form of this command 23 7 1 Syntax 328 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 logging file evel no logging file level Limits the logging of messages to the buffer to a specified level emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational and debugging Default Configuration The default severity level is errors Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example limits syslog messages sent to the logging file based on the severity level alerts Console config logging file alerts 5 24 8 clear logging file The clear logging file privileged EXEC command clears messages from the logging file Syntax clear logging file Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example clears messages from the logging file Console clear logging file Clear Logging File y n y 329 User s
258. lines for this command Example The following example globally enables GVRP on the device Console config gvrp enable 5 8 2 gvrp enable interface The gvrp enable interface configuration command enables GVRP on an interface To disable GVRP on an interface use the no form of this command Syntax gvrp enable 218 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 no gvrp enable Default Configuration GVRP is disabled on all interfaces by default Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines An access port would not dynamically join a VLAN because it is always a member in only one VLAN Example The following example enables GVRP on ethernet g8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if gvrp enable 5 8 3 garp timer The garp timer interface configuration command adjusts the GARP application join leave and leaveall GARP timer values To reset the timer to default values use the no form of this command Syntax garp timer join leave leaveall timer_value no garp timer join Indicates the time in milliseconds that PDUs are transmitted Range 10 2147483640 leave Indicates the amount of time in milliseconds that the device waits before leaving its GARP state The Leave Time is activated by a Leave All Time message sent received and cancelled by the Join message Range 10 2147483640 leaveall Used to confirm the po
259. llowing example displays the SSH public keys on the device Console show crypto key mypubkey rsa RSA key data 005C300D 06092A86 4886F70D 01010105 00034B00 30480241 00C5E23B 55D6AB22 04AEF1BA A54028A6 9ACCO1C5 129D99E4 64CAB820 847EDAD9 DFOB4E4C 73A05DD2 BD62A8A9 FA603DD2 E2A8A6F8 98F76E28 D58AD221 B583D7A4 71020301 87685768 Fingerprint Hex 77 C7 19 85 98 19 27 96 C9 CC 83 C5 78 89 F8 86 Fingerprint Bubble Babble yteriuwt jgkljnglk yewiury hdskjfryt gfhkjglk 5 22 11 show crypto key pubkey chain ssh The show crypto key pubkey chain ssh privileged EXEC command displays SSH public keys stored on the device Syntax show crypto key pubkey chain ssh username username fingerprint bubble babble hex 312 username Specifies the remote SSH client username bubble babble Fingerprints in Bubble Babble format User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 hex Fingerprint in Hex format If fingerprint is unspecified it defaults to Hex format Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays all SSH public keys stored on the device Console show crypto key pubkey chain ssh Username Fingerprint 9A CC 01 C5 78 39 27 86 79 CC 23 C5 98 59 F1 86 98 F7 6E 28 F2 79 87 C8 18 F8 88 CC F8 89 87 C8 The following example displays the SSH public
260. lue from the current value The difference in the values is compared to the threshold Displays the rising counter value that triggers the rising threshold alarm The rising threshold is presented on top of the graph bars Each monitored variable is designated a color Displays the mechanism in which the alarms are reported The possible field values are e LOG Indicates there is not a saving mechanism for either the device or in the management system If the device is not reset the entry remains in the Log Table e TRAP indicates that an SNMP trap is generated and sent via the Trap mechanism The Trap can also be saved using the Trap mechanism e Both indicates that both the Log and Trap mechanism are used to report alarms Displays the falling counter value that triggers the falling threshold alarm The falling threshold is graphically presented on top of the graph bars Each monitored variable is designated a color Displays the mechanism in which the alarms are reported The possible field values are e LOG indicates there is not a saving mechanism for either the device or in the management system If the device is not reset the entry remains in the Log Table e TRAP indicates that a SNMP trap is generated and sent via the Trap mechanism The Trap can also be saved using the Trap mechanism e Both indicates that both the Log and Trap mechanism are used to report alarms Displays the trigger that activates the alarm
261. lways the number of packets dropped it is the number of 274 Octets Packets Broadcast Multicast CRC Align Errors Undersize Pkts Oversize Pkts Fragments Jabbers Collisions 64 Octets 65 to 127 Octets 128 to 255 Octets 256 to 511 Octets 512 to 1023 Octets 1024 to 1518 Octets User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 times this condition has been detected The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets broadcast packets and multicast packets received The total number of good packets received and directed to the broadcast address This does not include multicast packets The total number of good packets received and directed to a multicast address This number does not include packets directed to the broadcast address The total number of packets received with a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets of between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but with either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error The total number of packets received less than 64 octets long excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and otherwise well formed The total number of packets received longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits b
262. ly the sttings The bridge Multicast address is assigned to the Multicast group and the device is updated a Defining Ports to Receive Multicast Service 1 2 3 4 5 Define the VLAN ID and the Bridge Multicast Address fields Check and click a port to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group Click Add to List button Click the Save Config to apply the sttings Select the VLAN ID to check if the entries be added The port is assigned to the Multicast group and the device is updated a Assigning LAGs to Receive Multicast Service 1 2 3 4 Define the VLAN ID and the Bridge Multicast Address fields Check and click the LAG to Static to join the port to the selected Multicast group Click Add to List button Click the Save Config to apply the sttings The LAG is assigned to the Multicast group and the device is updated 4 10 3 Bridge Multicast Forward All The Bridge Multicast Forward All Screen contains fields for attaching ports or LAGs to a device attached to a neighboring 123 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Multicast router switch Once IGMP Snooping is enabled Multicast packets are forwarded to the appropriate port or VLAN Refer to figure 4 58 ning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin Log Bridge Multicast Forward All LAN ID lv Interface el e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e7 e8 gl g2 None 000000000 Forbbiden O O O0 0 000000 St OOOO 0O0O0C00 0 Dynamic
263. m broadcast rate 100 kilobytes per second console config interface ethernet g2 console config if port storm control broadcast rate 100 5 7 22 show ports storm control The show ports storm control privileged EXEC command displays the storm control configuration Syntax show ports storm control ethernet interface ethernet interface A valid Ethernet port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the storm control configuration Console show ports storm control Broadcast Storm control kbyes sec 217 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 8000 Disabled Disabled 5 8 GVRP Commands 5 8 1 gvrp enable global GVRP or GARP VLAN Registration Protocol is an industry standard protocol designed to propagate VLAN information from device to device With GVRP a single switch is manually configured with all desired VLANs for the network and all other switches on the network learn these VLANs dynamically The gvrp enable global configuration command enables GVRP globally To disable GVRP globally on the switch use the no form of this command Syntax gvrp enable no gvrp enable Default Configuration GVRP is globally disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guide
264. m of the screen see figure 4 21 The Event Table area contains the following additional field B8 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Time Where displays the time that the event occurred Press the RMON Event Log button to display the log store in the flash Only the Event type is Log or Log and Trap then the entries appear The screen in Figure 4 21 appears GQ PLANET y ANS setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut RMON Events Event Log No Log Time Description Rmon Events Control Figure 4 21 RMON Event Log Screen 59 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 5 5 Port Utilization The Port Utilization screen see figure 4 22 indicates the amount of resources each interface is currently consuming Ports in green are functioning normally while ports in red are currently transmitting an excessive amount of network traffic PLANET Fee OOO Port Utilization Refresh Rate No Refresh v Utilization 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Port el e2 e3 e4 e5 e6 e es gl g2 BB normal peal Overloaded Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 22 Port Utilization screen The page includes the following fields e Refresh Rate Indicates the amount of time that passes before the port utilization statistics are refreshed The possible field values are e No Refresh indicates that the statistics are not refreshed e
265. me of the upgrade file on the TFTP Server e Destination File Where specifies the name of the configuration file The default is StartupCfg m Via HTTP This HTTP Firmware Upgrade screen is used for saving configuration information using your Web browser See figure 4 75 GQ PLANET limones Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Save Configuration O via TFTP via HTTP Secceeeees UPGRADE BACKUP Source File i Figure 4 75 Save Configuration via HTTP e Upgrade Select this option to upgrade the switch from a file on the local hard drive 145 e Backup e Source File User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 This is used to backup the configuration to the local hard drive Type in the name and path of the file or Browse to locate the upgrade file Use the Proceed button to save configuration via TFTP or HHTP that be selected 4 12 8 Firmware Upgrade The Firmware Upgrade screen contains the following fields See figure 4 76 Firmware Upgrade ext via TFTP O via HTTP UPGRADE BACKUP File Type Software Image Y TFTP Server Source File Destination File Figure 4 76 Firmware Upgrade via TFTP The page contains the following fields m Via TFTP e Via TFTP e File Type e TFTP Server e Source File e Destination File Defines the upgrade through a TFTP Server Select file type to be upgr
266. mes this condition has been detected The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment during this sampling interval 5 19 5 rmon alarm The rmon alarm global configuration command configures alarm conditions To remove an alarm use the no form of this command Syntax rmon alarm index variable interval rthreshold fthreshold revent fevent type type startup direction owner name no rmon alarm index index The alarm index Range 1 65535 variable The object identifier of the particular variable to be sampled interval The interval in seconds over which the data is sampled and compared with the rising and falling thresholds Range 1 4294967295 threshold Rising Threshold Range 1 4294967295 fthreshold Falling Threshold Range 1 4294967295 revent The Event index used when a rising threshold is crossed Range 0 65535 fevent The Event index used when a falling threshold is crossed Range 0 65535 type type The sampling method for the selected variable and calculating the value to be compared against the thresholds If the method is absolute the value of the selected variable is compared directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval If the method is delta the selected variable value at the last sample is subtracted from the current value and the difference compared with the thresholds 280
267. ming bits Displays the number of packets received on the interface including bad packets Multicast and broadcast packets since the device was last refreshed Which displays the number of good broadcast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed This number does not include Multicast packets Displays the number of good Multicast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed which displays the number of CRC and Align errors that have occurred on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the number of undersized packets less than 64 octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the number of oversized packets over 1518 octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Indicates the number of fragments packets with less than 64 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Indicates the total number of received packets that were longer than 1518 octets This number excludes frame bits but includes FCS octets that had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error number The field range to detect jabbers is between 20 ms and 150 ms Displays the number of collisions received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Number of xx byt
268. mode to configure an Ethernet type interface Port Channel Contains commands to configure port channels for example assigning ports to a VLAN or port channel Most of these commands are the same as the commands in the Ethernet interface mode and are used to manage the member ports as a single entity The Global Configuration mode command interface port channel is used to enter the port channel Interface Configuration mode SSH Public Key chain Contains commands to manually specify other device SSH public keys The Global Configuration mode command crypto key pubkey chain ssh is used to enter the SSH Public Key chain Configuration mode MAC Access List Configures conditions required to allow traffic based on MAC addresses The Global Configuration mode command mac access list is used to enter the MAC access list configuration mode Interface Contains commands that configure the interface The Global Configuration mode command interface ethernet is used to enter the interface configuration mode 5 2 2 Starting the CLI The switch can be managed over a direct connection to the switch console port or via a Telnet connection The switch can also be managed via an out of band OOB management port The switch is managed by entering command keywords and parameters at the prompt Using the switch command line interface CLI is very similar to entering commands on a UNIX system If access is via a Telnet connection ensure t
269. mory attention pool overflow The system is in a critical state Cannot bind to SNMP enor A system error has occurred Failed to delete entry 5 The system is functioning properly Bad route but system notice has occurred Informational pe Provides device information Link up Debug T Provides detailed information about Method list created the log If a Debug error occurs contact Dell Online Technical Support The Server Logs screen see figure 4 80 contains information for viewing and configuring the Remote Log Servers New log servers can be defined and the log severity sent to each server 149 Log Table There are five items as below e Server e UDP Port 1 65535 e Facility e Description e Minimum Severity Description Minimum Severity User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Server Logs Server 192 168 1 51 UDP Port 514 Facility Local w Server UDP Port Facility Description Minimum Severity 192 168 1 51 514 Local 7 Error Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 80 Server Logs screen Specifies the server to which logs can be sent Defines the UDP port to which the server logs are sent The possible range is 1 to 65535 The default value is 514 Defines a user defined application from which system logs are sent to the remote server Only one facility can be assigned to a single server If a second facility level is assigned the first facility is overridden All applic
270. mounting brackets Damage caused to the parts by using incorrect screws would invalidate the warranty Step3 Secure the brackets tightly Step4 Follow the same steps to attach the second bracket to the opposite side Step5 After the brackets are attached to the Switch use suitable screws to securely attach the brackets to the rack as shown in Figure 2 6 gt Figure 2 6 Mounting the Switch in a Rack 21 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Step6 Proceeds with the steps 4 and steps 5 of session 2 2 1 Desktop Installation to connect the network cabling and supply power to the switch 2 2 3 Installing the SFP transceiver The sections describe how to insert an SFP transceiver into an SFP slot The SFP transceivers are hot pluggable and hot swappable You can plug in and out the transceiver to from any SFP port without having to power down the Switch As the Figure 2 7 appears FF MIGR S5X MGR LA Figure 2 7 Plug in the SFP transceiver Approved PLANET SFP Transceivers PLANET WGSD Switch support both single mode and multi mode SFP transceiver The following list of approved PLANET SFP transceivers is correct at the time of publication WMCB SX SFP 1000BASE SX SFP transceiver WMCB LX SFP 1000BASE LX SFP transceiver It recommends using PLANET SFPs on the Switch If you insert a SFP transceiver that is not 23 Note supported the Switch will not recognize it Before connect the other switches wo
271. mple configures https authentication console config ip https authentication radius local 165 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 3 7 show authentication methods The authentication methods privilege EXEC command displays information about the authentication methods Syntax show authentication methods Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the authentication configuration console show authentication methods Login Authentication Method Lists Default Radius Local Line Console_Login Line None Enable Authentication Method Lists Default Radius Enable Console Enable Enable None Login Method List Enable Method List Console Console_Login Console_Enable Telnet Default Default SSH Default Default HTTP Radius local HTTPS Radius local 802 1x Radius 5 3 8 password The password line configuration command specifies a password on a line To remove the password use the no form of this command Syntax password password encrypted no password 166 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 password Password for this level from 1 to 159 characters in length encrypted Encrypted password to be entered copied from another device configuration Default Configuration This command has no
272. ms Network alarms occur when a network problem or event is detected Rising and falling thresholds generate events Alarm Table Alarm Entry Source Interface Counter Name Sample Type Rising Threshold Rising Event Falling Threshold Falling Event Startup Alarm Interval Owner Alarm Counter Entry Name The page contains the following fields RMON Alarm O Port el Y Orac 1 Total Bytes Octets Receive v Absolute 1 00 o 20 v Rising Alarm y 100 Counter Sample Rising Rising Falling Falling Startup anar Interface alue Type Threshold Event Threshold Event Alarm Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 19 RMON Alarm screen 55 e larm Entry e Source Interface e Counter Name e Sample Type e Rising Threshold e Rising Event e Falling Threshold e Falling Event e Startup Alarm User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Indicates a specific alarm Displays the interface for which RMON statistics are displayed The possible field values are e Port displays the selected port of the RMON statistics e LAG displays the RMON statistics for the selected LAG Displays the selected MIB variable Defines the sampling method for the selected variable and comparing the value against the thresholds The possible field values are e Absolute compares the values directly with the thresholds at the end of the sampling interval e Delta subtracts the last sampled va
273. n 252 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 on Forces the port to join a channel auto Allows the port to join a channel as a result of an LACP operation Default Configuration The port is not assigned to any port channel Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines Turning off auto negotiation on an aggregate link may under some circumstances make it non operational If the other side has auto negotiation turned on it may re synchronize all members of the aggregated link to half duplex operation and may as per the standard set them all to Inactive When a port is added to a LAG it acquires the trunk properties as set by the administrator If the port cannot be configured accordingly it will not be added to the LAG and the user will get an appropriate error message However if the first port to join the LAG is one which cannot be configured according to the administrative settings of the LAG the port will nonetheless be added to the LAG using its port default settings An error message is generated however it is important to note that since it is then the ONLY port of the LAG the whole LAG at that point operates at the port s settings instead of the LAG administrative settings Example The following example shows how port e5 is configured to port channel number 1 without LACP Console config interface ethernet e5 Console config if channel group 1 mode
274. n STP is enabled using the default parameters the path between source and destination stations in a switched network might not be ideal For instance connecting higher speed links to a port that has a higher number than the current root port can cause a root port change STP Port States The BPDUs take some time to pass through a network This propagation delay can result in topology changes where a port that transitioned directly from a Blocking state to a Forwarding state could create temporary data loops Ports must wait for new network topology information to propagate throughout the network before starting to forward packets They must also wait for the packet lifetime to expire for BPDU packets that were forwarded based on the old topology The forward delay timer is used to allow the network topology to stabilize after a topology change In addition STP specifies a series of states a port must transition through to further ensure that a stable network topology is created after a topology change Each port on a switch using STP exists is in one of the following five states Blocking the port is blocked from forwarding or receiving packets Listening the port is waiting to receive BPDU packets that may tell the port to go back to the blocking state _ Learning the port is adding addresses to its forwarding database but not yet forwarding packets Forwarding the port is forwarding packets Disabled the port only responds to net
275. n status current port Status Click up the Detail button to make a brief description of the port When to choose the UP button the port can be accessed normally to choose the Down button the port will be taken offline Shows an active connection when you choose the UP button there is no active connection or the port has been taken offline by an Admiinistrator when you choose the Down button Shows the connection speed of the port and the speed can be configured only when auto negotiation is disabled on that port The port duplex mode Full transmission occurs in both directions simultaneously or Half transmission occurs in only one direction at a time This mode can be configured only when auto negotiation is disabled and port speed is set to 10Mbps or 100Mbps It cannot be configured on Link Aggregation Groups LAGs Shows the MDI MDIX status of the port To use the MDI setting if the port is connected to an end station To use the MDIX setting if the port is connected to a hub or another switch Shows the flow control status of the port It is active when the port uses Full Duplex Ey a User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Mode e Type Shows the port type e LAG Shows whether the port is part of a LAG e PVE It bypasses the Forwarding Database and forwards all unicast multicast and broadcast traffic to an uplink when a port is a Private VLAN Edge PVE port Uplinks can be ports or LAGs e Det
276. nds an inform request The default is 3 seconds Add ta List Use the button when you want to add the Notification Recipient configuration to the relevant table at the bottom of the screen Notification Recipient SNMP 1 2 Notification Recipient Notification UDP Filter Recipients Notification Community Timeout Retries IP Type String Yersion Port Name 192 168 1 51 Traps public SNMPy 1 162 15 3 sua SNMPy3 Notification Recipient Recipients Notification User Security Level UDP Filter Timeout Retries IP Type Name Port Name fe v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 67 Notification Recipient 135 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 136 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 12 Admin The Admin section provides information for devining system parameters including User account and file management device software Under Admin the folling topics are provided to devine and view the system informatin User Authentication Static Address Dynamic Address Logging Port Mirroting Cable Test Storm Control Save Configuration Firmware Uograde Server Logs Memory Logs Flash Logs 4 12 1 User Authentication The User Authentication screen see figure 4 68 is used to modify user passwords NMP Admin TNE User Authentication User Authentication Authentication Type Local v Local User Edit User Name Password Alphanumeric Confirm Password Local Users Table User Name
277. ne Daylight Saving e Daylight Saving e Time Set Offset e From e To e Recurring e From User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Defines the system time The field format is HH MM SS for example 21 15 03 Defines the system date The field format is Day Month Year for example 04 May 2050 The difference between Greenwich Mean Time GMT and local time For example the Time Zone Offset for Paris is GMT 1 while the local time in Taipei is GTM 8 Enables the Daylight Savings Time DST on the device based on the devices location The possible field values are e USA The device switches to DST at 2 a m on the first Sunday of April and reverts to standard time at 2 a m on the last Sunday of October e European The device switches to DST at 1 00 am on the last Sunday in March and reverts to standard time at 1 00 am on the last Sunday in October The European option applies to EU members and other European countries using the EU standard e Other The DST definitions are user defined based on the device locality If Other is selected the From and To fields must be defined For non USA and European countries the amount of time for DST can be set in minutes The value range is 1 1440 The default time is 60 minutes Defines the time that DST begins in countries other than USA or Europe in the format DayMonthYear in one field and time in another For example DST begins on the 25th October 2007 5 00 am t
278. nfiguration VLAN ID 1 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel mode 348 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines The command automatically removes the port from the previous VLAN and adds it to the new VLAN Example The following example configures a VLAN ID of 23 to the untagged layer 2 VLAN interface number e8 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport access vlan 23 5 27 9 switchport trunk allowed vian The switchport trunk allowed vlan interface configuration command adds or removes VLANs from a trunk port Syntax switchport trunk allowed vlan add vian list remove vian list add vlan list List of VLAN IDs to add Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of IDs remove vian list List of VLAN IDs to remove Separate non consecutive VLAN IDs with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designate a range of IDs Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example shows how to add VLANs 2 and 5 to 8 to the allowed list of es Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport trunk allowed vlan add 2 5 8 349 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 27 10 switc
279. nize To disable authentication of the identity of the system use the no form of this command Syntax sntp trusted key key number no sntp trusted key key number key number Key number of authentication key to be trusted Range 1 4294967295 187 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration Not trusted Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines The command is relevant for both unicast and broadcast Examples The following example authenticates key 8 Console config sntp authentication key 8 md5 ClkKey Console config sntp trusted key 8 Console config sntp authenticate 5 5 8 sntp client poll timer The sntp client poll timer global configuration command sets the polling time for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP client To return to default use the no form of this command Syntax sntp client poll timer seconds no sntp client poll timer seconds Polling interval in seconds Range 60 1024 Default Configuration 1024 Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the polling time for the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP client to 120 seconds Console config sntp client poll timer 120 188 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 5 9 sntp broadcast client enable The sntp broadcast client enable global configuration c
280. no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example the bridge tables are cleared console clear bridge 5 4 11 port security The port security interface configuration command locks the port By locking the port new addresses are not learned on the port To enable new address learning use the no form of the port security command Syntax port security forward discard discard shutdown trap seconds no port security 176 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 forward Forwards frames with unlearned source addresses but does not learn the address discard Discards frames with unlearned source addresses This is the default if no option is indicated discard shutdown Discards frames with unlearned source addresses The port is also shut down trap Seconds Sends SNMP traps and defines the minimal amount of time in seconds between two consecutive traps Range 1 1 000 000 Default Configuration Disabled No port security Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example frame forwarding is enabled without learning and with traps sent every 100 seconds on port e18 console config interface ethernet e18 console config if port security forward trap 100
281. no enable authentication default Uses the default list created with the authentication enable command listname Uses the indicated list created with the authentication enable command Default Configuration Uses the default set with the command authentication enable 163 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example specifies the default authentication method when accessing a higher privilege level from a remote Telnet or console console config line cnsole console config line enable authentication default 5 3 5 ip http authentication The ip http authentication global configuration mode command specifies authentication methods for http To return to the default use the no form of this command Syntax ip http authentication method methodz2 no ip http authentication method method2 Specify at least one from the following table Source or destination Uses the local username database for authentication Uses no authentication Uses the list of all RADIUS servers for authentication Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication Default Configuration The local user database is checked This has the same effect as the command ip http authentication local Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The addition
282. ns status Console show snmp 293 Community String Community Access read only read write read write private private OOB management stations Community String Community Access private read write Traps are enabled Authentication trap is enabled Trap Rec Address 192 122 173 42 Trap Rec Community public OOB trap receivers Trap Rec Address 176 16 8 9 Trap Rec Community public System Contact Robert System Location Marketing IP address 172 16 1 1 172 17 1 1 IP address 176 16 8 9 294 Version 2 Version 2 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 21 Spanning Tree Commands 5 21 1 spanning tree The spanning tree global configuration command enables spanning tree functionality To disable spanning tree functionality use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree no spanning tree Default Configuration Spanning tree is enabled Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enables spanning tree functionality Console config spanning tree 5 21 2 spanning tree mode The spanning tree mode global configuration command configures the spanning tree protocol To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree mode stp rstp no spanning tree mode stp STP i
283. nsole config interface vian 2 Console config if ip igmp Snooping mrouter time out 200 5 9 6 ip igmp snooping leave time out The ip igmp snooping leave time out command configures the leave time out If an IGMP report for a multicast group is not received within the leave time out period after an IGMP leave was received from a specific port the current port is deleted from the member list of that multicast group To configure the default leave time out use the no form of this command Syntax ip igmp snooping leave time out time out immediate leave no ip igmp snooping leave time out time out leave time out in seconds Range 0 2147483647 immediate leave Specifies that the port should be immediately removed from the members list after receivingIGMP Leave Default Configuration The default leave time out configuration is 10 seconds Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines The leave timeout should be set greater than the maximum time that a host is allowed to respond to an IGMP Query Use immediate leave only where there is only one host connected to a port Example The following example configures the host leave time out to 60 seconds Console config interface vlan 2 Console config if ip igmp snooping leave time out 60 5 9 7 show ip igmp snooping mrouter The show ip igmp snooping mrouter User EXEC command displays information on dynamically learned mult
284. nt The number of probes to be sent at each TTL level Range 1 10 timeout time_out The number of seconds to wait for a response to a probe packet Range 1 60 source p address One of the interface addresses of the device to use as a source address for the probes The device will normally pick what it feels is the best source address to use Range Valid IP Address tos tos The Type Of Service byte in the IP Header of the packet Range 0 255 Default Configuration size packet_size The default is 40 bytes ttl max ttl The default is 30 count packet_count The default count is 3 timeout time_out The default is 3 seconds Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines The traceroute command works by taking advantage of the error messages generated by routers when a datagram exceeds its time to live TTL value The traceroute command starts by sending probe datagrams with a TTL value of one This causes the first router to discard the probe datagram and send back an error message The traceroute command sends several probes at each TTL level and displays the round trip time for each The traceroute command sends out one probe at a time Each outgoing packet may result in one or two error messages A time exceeded error message indicates that an intermediate router has seen and discarded the probe A destination unreachable error message indicates that the destination node has received the pr
285. ntication and encryption key for all TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS server This key must match the encryption used on the TACACS daemon If no key string value is specified the global value is used Range Up to 160 characters source Specifies the source IP address to use for the communication If no source value is specified the global value is used priority Determines the order in which the servers will be used when 0 is the highest priority If unspecified defaults to 0 Range 0 65535 Default Configuration No TACAS host is specified Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Multiple tacacs server host commands can be used to specify multiple hosts If no host specific timeout key or source values are specified the global values apply to each host To define TACACS server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address 333 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example The following example specifies a TACACS host Console config tacacs server host 172 16 1 1 5 25 2 tacacs server key The tacacs server key command in global configuration mode sets the authentication encryption key used for all TACACS communications between the device and the TACACS daemon To disable the key use the no form of this command Syntax tacacs server key key string no tacacs server key key string Specifies the aut
286. ny one time but not both at the same time If String and Notification Version fields are enabled for configuration e Community String where identifies the community string of the trap manager e Notification Version determines the trap type The possible field values are 134 e SNMP V3 e Security Level e UDP Port e Filter Name e Timeout e Retries User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 SNMP V1 which indicates SNMP Version 1 traps are sent SNMP V2 which indicates SNMP Version 2 traps are sent This enables SNMPv3 as the Notification Recipient Either SNMPv1 2 or SNMP V3 enabled at any one time but not both at the same time If SNMP V3 which is enabled the User Name and Security Level fields are enabled for configuration e User Name defines the user to whom SNMP notifications are sent Defines the means by which the packet is authenticated The possible field values are e No Authentication Indicates the packet is neither authenticated nor encrypted e Authentication which indicates the packet is authenticated e Privacy which indicates the packet is both authenticated and encrypted Displays the UDP port used to send notifications The default is 162 Indicates if the SNMP filter for which the SNMP Notification filter is defined Indicates the amount of time Seconds the device waits before resending informs The default is 15 seconds Indicates the amount of times the device rese
287. o rmon table size history log history entries Maximum number of history table entries Range 20 32767 log entries Maximum number of log table entries Range 20 32767 Default Configuration History table size is 270 Log table size is 100 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The configured table size is effective after the device is rebooted Example The following example configures the maximum RMON history table sizes to 1000 entries Console config rmon table size history 1000 287 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 20 SNMP Commands 5 20 1 snmp server community The snmp server community global configuration command sets up the community access string to permit access to the SNMP protocol To remove the specified community string use the no form of this command Syntax snmp server community community ro rw su p address snmp server community group community group name ip address no snmp server community string ip address community Character string that acts like a password and permits access to the SNMP protocol Range 1 20 characters ro Specifies read only access rw Specifies read write access su Specifies SNMP administrator access p address Management station IP address Default is all IP addresses An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines group n
288. obe and discarded it because it could not deliver the packet If the timer goes off before a response comes in the traceroute command prints an asterisk The traceroute command terminates when the destination responds when the maximum TTL is exceeded or when the user interrupts the trace with Esc To find the trace to an out of band IP address use the out of band IP address format oob ip address 315 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Examples console gt traceroute umaxp1 physics lsa umich edu Type Esc to abort Tracing the route to umaxp1 physics lsa umich edu 141 211 101 64 1 i2 gateway stanford edu 192 68 191 83 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 2 STAN POS calren2 NET 171 64 1 213 0 msec 0 msec 0 msec 3 SUNV STAN POS calren2 net 198 32 249 73 1 msec 1 msec 1 msec 4 Abilene QSV POS calren2 net 198 32 249 162 1 msec 1 msec 1 msec 5 kscyng snvang abilene ucaid edu 198 32 8 103 33 msec 35 msec 35 msec 6 iplsng kscyng abilene ucaid edu 198 32 8 80 47 msec 45 msec 45 msec 7 so 0 2 0x1 aa1 mich net 192 122 183 9 56 msec 53 msec 54 msec 8 atm1 0x24 michnet8 mich net 198 108 23 82 56 msec 56 msec 57 msec gtr 10 A ARB3 LSA NG c SEB umnet umich edu 141 211 5 22 58 msec 58 msec 58 msec 11 umaxp1 physics lsa umich edu 141 211 101 64 62 msec 63 msec 63 msec The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description 1 Indicates the sequence number of the router in the pat
289. ocols recommended message format for all error reporting For example System logs and local device reporting messages are assigned a severity code and include a message mnemonic which identifies the source application generating the message It allows messages to be filtered based on their urgency or relevancy Each message severity determines the set of event logging devices that are sent per each event logging The page contains the following fields e Logging Indicates if device global logs for Cache File and Server Logs are enabled Console logs are enabled by default e Emergency The system is not functioning e Alert The system needs immediate attention e Critical The system is in a critical state e Error A system error has occurred e Warning A system warning has occurred e Notice The system is functioning properly but system notice has occurred 444 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Informational Provides device information e Debug Provides detailed information about the log If a Debug error occurs contact Customer Tech Support 142 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 12 5 Port Mirroring Port mirroring monitors and mirrors network traffic by forwarding copies of incoming and outgoing packets from one port to a monitoring port Port mirroring can be used as diagnostic tool and or a debugging feature Port mirroring also enables switch performance monitoring refer to figure 4 72
290. oconoconnnconononoconcnnonononconnnnnnnnnronornnnnnnnrnrnnrnnrnnonannnonencnnnnanens 181 DAIS SNOW PONS SECUN gett Pete ee tetera rn re eee he eee etn ee eee Seed a a See Orne er Monee et ee 182 SEAS oe AG o A NO 183 Bo AM e Po tenet a eben end mentee aetna ema touae aetes 183 SEO SON Cae tates E o e e seen ceo eet 183 5979 COC UMEZONG conor ateici eh Aah ale cee a esate en erat exer ct A ete h aN aah anette a tec et eGaet 184 SoA COCK SUMMEN E cies ea saeco ween ea caine ees reas tae ae ee 185 5 00 SALDsAUINGMECATOMNAK aiii ia iia 186 BO SINT De autentica ocios isis 187 OSM SO a catan 187 So OSMO Clent DOMINE o A db 188 02020 sntp Droadcast client enable ori laos 189 5 5 10 sntp anycast client enable aria ia is 189 9 5 11 smtp cllentenable LCM ACE ari a cee eh ea a e a E E 190 5 9 12 Snip nicast client enable a ee tee aoe ee eerie te eee a 190 Ese A a aN 191 A A Re O ern rN 192 So Yad A Aer pment ee erat E a cee ee rere en 193 5 07 16 SNOW SILO COMMUN ALOE cti e Sd oe ca eed AS 193 OSU SOW SINS CALS costas osado tios cla a olas salas 194 5 6 Configuration and Image Fil8S ooooccccooncnnococcnnononnnononennonnncnnnnncnnnnnnrnnn nano non nn nn AOE rn nn nnn rn nro nnnnnnnnrnnnnnnrnrrnnnrnnnnnrnnrnnnnnns 195 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 DICO A a Pity PR DEN Meter ery eae ere ee MET er ee ame 195 5 6 4 SNOW SlaMUp CONNG 232 ecttic i A ee Se A 199 5 7 Ethermer Connguration GC OMmmMeandS o ates cies lula ls oti ot
291. of the switch includes the user access and management control The Security function contains links to the following topics e ACL Binding e RADIUS e TACACS e 802 1x Settings e Port Security e Multiple Hosts e Storm Control 4 7 1 ACL Binding When an ACL is bound to an interface all the ACE Access Control Event rules that have been defined are applied to the selected interface Whenever an ACL is assigned on a port LAG or VLAN flows from that ingress interface that do not match the ACL are matched to the default rule which is Drop unmatched packets You can refer to figure 4 27 Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicas ACL Binding Interface Port e7 Lac ACL Name IP Based ACL All Inband Deny Y O MAC Based ACL Add to List Interface Select ACL e All Inband Deny Add New v lt gt Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 27 ACL Binding screen The Page contains the following fields e Interface Indicates the interface to which the ACL is bound The selection includes e Port indicates port to apply the ACL e LAG indicates LAG to apply the ACL e ACL Name Indicates the ACL which is bound to the interface The selection includes e IP Based ACL e MAC Based ACL 75 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Use the Add to List button to add the ACL Binding configuration to the ACL Binding Table at the bottom of the screen 4 7 2 Radius Remote Authorization Dial In User Service RADI
292. ome external event occurs This is the actual switch port link type It may differ from the administrative state 4 9 5 MSTP Properties MSTP provides differing load balancing scenarios For example while port A is blocked in one STP instance the same port is placed in the Forwarding State in another STP instance The MSTP Properties screen see figure 4 50 contains information for defining global MSTP settings region names MSTP revisions and maximum hops curity QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut MSTP Properties Region Name 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Revision 0 Max Hops 20 IST Master 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Save Config W Cancel Config Figure 4 50 MSTP Properties The page contains the following fields e Region Name Where provides a user defined STP region name 113 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Revision Where defines unsigned 16 bit number that identifies the revision of the current MST configuration The revision number is required as part of the MST configuration The possible field range 0 65535 e Max Hops Which indicates the total number of hops that occur in a specific region before the BPDU is discarded Once the BPDU is discarded the port information is aged out The possible field range is 1 40 The field default is 20 hops e IST Master Where identifies the Spanning Tree Master instance The IST Master is the specified instance roo 4 9 6 MSTP Instance Settings MSTP o
293. ommand enables the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP broadcast clients To disable the SNTP broadcast clients use the no form of this command Syntax sntp broadcast client enable no sntp broadcast client enble This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Global configuration mode User Guidelines The sntp broadcast client enable interface configuration command enables the device to receive broadcast transmissions globally and on ALL interfaces Use the sntp client enable interface configuration command to enable sntp client on specific interface Examples The following example enables the SNTP broadcast clients Console config sntp broadcast client enable 5 5 10 sntp anycast client enable The sntp anycast client enable global configuration command enables anycast client To disable the polling for SNTP broadcast client use the no form of this command Syntax sntp anycast client enable no sntp anycast client enable This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Global configuration 189 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines Polling time is determined by the sntp client poll timer global configuration command Use the sntp client enable interface configuration command to enable sntp client on specific interface Examples The following example enables anycast clients Console c
294. on 1 0 2 Firmware Yersion 1 0 0 34 System Location Geuectom nnb art Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 1 t Save Config Via the Web Management the administrator can setup the WGSD Switch by select the functions those listed in the Main Function The screen in Figure 4 2 appears _ o _ T Setup Port Config YLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut summary Figure 4 2 WGSD Switch Main Funcrions Menu The following functions can be configured here Setup Port Config m VLAN Config Statistics mE ACL 30 Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin 4 2 Setup The Setup menus include the tree sub menus Summary m Network Settings Time 4 2 1 Summary The summary screen provides Device and System Information about the Switch User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 E p j J PLANET Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Device Information System Information System Name IP Address Subnet Mask DNS Servers Default Gateway Address Mode Base MAC Address Serial Number Model Name Hardware Version Boot Version Firmware Version System Location Custam Contact e e 192 168 1 254 255 255 255 0 Static 00 03 6d 30 57 00 WGSD_1022 00 03 00 1 0 2 1 0 0 34 Figure 4 3 System Summary screen The page contains the following
295. onfig VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security Qos Spanning Tree Multic cast SNMP Admin LogOut STP Port Settings Port Port Port Path Designated Designated Designated Forward gt gi H Fast State Role Speed Cost Prony me Pi Cost Transitions ES iS AAA Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 100M 2000000 128 NjA NjA NjA NjA Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 100M 2000000 128 NjA N A nia NJA e Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 100M 2000000 128 NjA N A N A NjA eS Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 100M 2000000 128 NjA N A nia NjA e6 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 100M 200000 128 NjA N A nia NjA e Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 100M 2000000 128 NjA N A nia NjA e8 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 100m 200000 128 Nid NjA NjA NjA gi Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 NjA N A nia NjA g2 Enabled Disabled Disabled Designated 1000M 2000000 128 NjA N A nia NjA Global System LAGs Designated Designated A LAG STP ik State hogs Path Priority dos Pork Designated Forward ast Role Cost ID ID Cost Transitions LAG1 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA NjA NJA NjA LAG2 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA N A N A N A LAG3 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA N A N A NjA L4G Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA NjA NjA NjA LAGS Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA NjA N A NjA L4G6 Enable Disabled Disabled Designated 20000 128 NjA NjA N A NjA L4G Enable D
296. onfig if sntp anycast client enable 5 5 11 sntp client enable interface The sntp client enable interface configuration command enables the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP client on an interface To disable the SNTP client use the no form of this command Syntax sntp client enable no sntp client enable This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet Port Channel VLAN mode User Guidelines Use the sntp client enable global configuration command to enable broadcast clients globally Use the sntp anycast client enable global configuration command to enable anycast clients globally Examples The following example enables the SNTP client on the interface console config sntp client enable 5 5 12 sntp unicast client enable The sntp unicast client enable global configuration command enables the device to use the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP to request and accept Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from servers To disable requesting and accepting Network Time Protocol NTP traffic from servers use the no form of this command 190 Syntax sntp unicast client enable no sntp unicast client enable This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples User s Manual of
297. onfiguration The show sntp configuration Privileged EXEC command shows the configuration of the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP use Syntax show sntp configuration This command has no keywords or arguments Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 193 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Examples Console show sntp configuration Polling interval 7200 seconds MD5 Authentication keys 8 9 Authentication is required for synchronization Trusted Keys 8 9 Unicast Clients Polling Enabled Polling Encryption Key 176 1 1 8 Enabled 176 1 8 179 Disabled Disabled Broadcast Clients Enabled Broadcast Clients Poll Enabled Broadcast Interfaces 1 1 1 3 OOB SNTP servers Polling Encryption Key 10 1 1 91 Enabled Broadcast Clients Enabled Broadcast Clients Poll Enabled Broadcast Interfaces 1 1 1 3 5 5 17 show sntp status The show sntp status Privileged EXEC command shows the status of the Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP Syntax show sntp status This command has no keywords or arguments Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode 194 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example
298. ory for other on index number 5 Console show rmon history 5 other Sample Set 1 Owner CLI Interface 1 g1 Interval 1800 Requested samples 50 Granted samples 50 Maximum table size 500 Dropped Collisions Jan 18 2002 21 57 00 Jan 18 2002 21 57 30 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Time Date and Time the entry is recorded Octets The total number of octets of data including those in bad packets received on the network excluding framing bits but including FCS octets Packets The number of packets including bad packets received during this sampling interval Broadcast The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to the broadcast address Multicast The number of good packets received during this sampling interval that were directed to a multicast address This number does not include packets addressed to the broadcast address Utilization The best estimate of the mean physical layer network utilization on this interface during this sampling interval in hundredths of a percent CRC Align The number of packets received during this sampling interval that had a length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets between 64 and 1518 octets inclusive but had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a nonintegral number of octets Alignment Error
299. ot command to copy a boot file from a server to Flash memory Copying a Configuration File from a Server to the Running Configuration Use the copy source url running config command to load a configuration file from a network server to the device running configuration The configuration is added to the running configuration as if the commands were typed in the command line interface CLI The resulting configuration file is a combination of the previous running configuration and the loaded 197 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 configuration file with the loaded configuration file having precedence Copying a Configuration File from a Server to the Startup Configuration Use the copy source url startup config command to copy a configuration file from a network server to the device startup configuration These commands replace the startup configuration file with the copied configuration file Storing the Running or Startup Configuration on a Server Use the copy running config destination url command to copy the current configuration file to a network server using TFTP Use the copy startup config destination url command to copy the startup configuration file to a network server The configuration file copy can serve as a backup copy Saving the Running Configuration to the Startup Configuration Use the copy running config startup config command to copy the running configuration to the startup configuration
300. ot1x ethernet e3 Interface Admin Mode Oper Mode Reauth Reauth Username Control Period Unauthorized Ena 3 1 State held Quiet period 60 Tx period 30 Max req 2 Login Time n a Last Authentication n a User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 MAC Address 0008 7832 9878 Authentication Method Remote Termination Cause Supplicant logoff The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Interface Admin mode Oper mode Reauth Control Reauth Period Username State Quiet period Tx period Max req Login Time Last Authentication Mac address Description The interface number The admin mode of the port Possible values are Force auth Force unauth Auto The oper mode of the port Possible values are Authorized Unauthorized Reauthentication control Reauthentication peiod The User Name representing the identity of the Supplicant The current value of the Authenticator PAE state machine The number of seconds that the switch remains in the quiet state following a failed authentication exchange for example the client provided an invalid password The number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame from the client before resending the request The maximum number of times that the switch sends an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame assuming that no r
301. ot1x system auto control Syntax This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Disabled Command Modes Global configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example enables 802 1x globally Console config dot1x system auto control 5 29 3 dot1x port control The dot1x port control interface configuration command enables manual control of the authorization state of the port Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x port control auto force authorized force unauthorized no dot1x port control auto Enable 802 1X authentication on the interface and cause the port to transition to the authorized or unauthorized state based on the 802 1X authentication exchange between the switch and the client 364 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 force authorized Disable 802 1X authentication on the interface and cause the port to transition to the authorized state without any authentication exchange required The port resends and receives normal traffic without 802 1X based authentication of the client force unauthorized Deny all access through this interface by forcing the port to transition to the unauthorized state ignoring all attempts by the client to authenticate The switch cannot provide authentication services to the client through the interface Default Configu
302. ou can access the switch s Web interface applications directly in your Web browser by entering the IP address of the switch You can then use your Web browser to list and manage switch configuration parameters from one central location just as if you were directly connected to the switch s console port Web Management requires either Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 01 or later or Netscape Navigator 4 03 or later 3 3 SNMP Based Network Management You can use an external SNMP based application to configure and manage the switch This management method requires the SNMP agent on the switch and the SNMP Network Management Station to use the same community string This management method in fact uses two community strings the get community string and the set community string If the SNMP Net work management Station only knows the set community string it can read and write to the MIBs However if it only knows the get community string it can only read MIBs The default gets and sets community strings for the switch are public 3 4 Protocols The switch supports the following protocols Virtual terminal protocols such as Telnet Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP 3 4 1 Virtual Terminal Protocols A virtual terminal protocol is a software program such as Telnet that allows you to establish a management session from a Macintosh a PC or a UNIX workstation Because Telnet runs over TCP IP you must have at least one IP address configu
303. plays spanning tree configuration 303 Syntax show spanning tree ethernet interface port channel port channel number show spanning tree detail active blockedports interface The full syntax is unit oort Range Valid Ethernet port port channel number Port channel index Range Valid port channel instance id D associated with a spanning tree instance Range 1 15 detail Display detailed information active Display active ports only blockedports Display blocked ports only Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Modes Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays spanning tree information Console show spanning tree Spanning tree enabled mode RSTP Default port cost method short Root ID Priority 32768 Address 0001 4297 e000 Cost 57 Port g 1 Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec Bridge ID Priority 32768 Address 0002 4b29 7a00 Hello Time 2 sec Max Age 20 sec Forward Delay 15 sec Number of topology changes 2 last change occurred 2d18h ago Times hold 1 topology change 35 notification 2 304 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 hello 2 max age 20 forward delay 15 Interface Port ID Cost Set Designated Port ID Prio Nbr Cost Bridge ID Prio Nbr FWD 38 32768 00
304. pport IGMP Enabling IGMP allows the ports to detect IGMP queries and report packets and manage IP multicast traffic through the switch IGMP have three fundamental types of message as follows Message Description A message sent from the querier IGMP router or switch asking for a response Query from each host belonging to the multicast group 119 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host wants to be or is a Report member of a given group indicated in the report message A message sent by a host to the querier to indicate that the host has quit to be a Leave Group member of a specific multicast group 4 10 1 I GMP Snooping When IGMP Snooping see figure 4 55 is enabled globally all IGMP packets are forwarded to the CPU The CPU analyzes the incoming packets and determines which ports want to join which Multicast groups which ports have Multicast routers generating IGMP queries which routing protocols are forwarding packets and Multicast traffic Ports requesting to join a specific Multicast group issue an IGMP report specifying that Multicast group is accepting members This results in the creation of the Multicast filtering database RA A z POT A y S Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin IGMP Snooping IGMP Global IGMP Snooping Status O lan IGMP Settings VLAN ID i y IGMP Status O Auto Learn Host Timeout 260 MRouter Timeout 300 fo
305. preation maps VLANs into STP instances see figure 4 51 Packets assigned to various VLANs are transmitted along different paths within Multiple Spanning Trees Regions MST Regions Regions are one or more Multiple Spanning Tree bridges by which frames can be transmitted In configuring MST the MST region to which the device belongs is defined A configuration consists of the name revision and region to which the device belongs Network Administrators can define MSTP Instances settings using the MSTP Instance Settings screen MSTP Instance Settings Instance Configuration VLAN Instance Configuration Instance ID 1 v Included LANs Included YLAN Pe Instance Settings Bridge Priority 32768 Designated Root Bridge ID 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Root Port 0 Root Path Cost 0 Bridge ID 32768 00 03 6d 30 57 00 Remaining Hops 20 Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 51 MSTP Instance Settings screen The page contains the following fields m Instance Configuration 114 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Press the VLAN Instance Configuration button a new window popup Assgin selected VLAN to specify MST Instance at the VLAN Instatnce Configuration page The screen in Figure 4 52 appears e Instance ID Included VLANs e Included VLAN Instance Settings e Bridge Priority e Designated Root Bridge ID e Root Port e Root Path Cost e Bridge ID e Remaining Hops LAN VLAN 1 VLAN 2 VLAN 3
306. ration force authorized Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example enables 802 1X authentication on the interface Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x port control auto 5 29 4 dot1x re authentication The dot1x re authentication interface configuration command enables periodic re authentication of the client Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x re authentication no dot1x re authentication This command has no arguments or keywords Default Configuration Periodic re authentication is disabled Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 365 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Examples The following example enables periodic re authentication of the client Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x re authentication 5 29 5 dot1x timeout re authperiod The dot1x timeout re authperiod interface configuration command sets the number of seconds between reauthentication attempts Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting Syntax dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds no dot1x timeout re authperiod seconds Number of seconds between re authentication attempts Range 300 4294967295
307. rd architecture broadcast storm control runt CRC filtering eliminates erroneous packets to optimize the network bandwidth O 8K MAC address table automatic source address learning and ageing O 1Mbit embedded memory for packet buffers O Supports IEEE 802 1Q Tagged based VLAN O GVRP protocol for VLAN Management O Support up to 4 Trunk groups each trunk for up to maximum 4 port with 800Mbps bandwidth Duplex Mode O 1EEE802 1d IEEE802 1w classic Spanning Tree Algorithm or Rapid Spanning Tree support O Supports the IEEE 802 1s specification for multiple spanning trees on a single port Spanning tree per VLAN gt Quality of Service 4 priority queues on all switch ports Support for strict priority and weighted round robin WRR CoS policies Support QoS and bandwidth control on each port OO Od Traffic policing policies on the switch port gt Multicast O Support IGMP Snooping v1 and v2 O Port Mirroring to monitor the incoming or outgoing traffic on a particular port gt Security O 802 1x Port Based Authentication O IP Based Access Control List ACL O MAC Based Access Control List O Port Security gt Management 15 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 WEB Based Telnet Console Command Line management SSH Secure Shell SSL Access through SNMPv1 v2c and v3 security set and get requests OO UO Four groups history statistics alarms and events of embedded remote monitoring RMON agents for network
308. re allows VLAN to span multiple 802 1Q compliant switches through a single physical connection and allows Spanning Tree to be enabled on all ports and work normally Frame Income Income Frame is tagged Income Frame is untagged Frame Leave Leave port is tagged Frame remains tagged Tag is inserted Leave port is untagged Frame remain untagged In this field there are five items such as Create VLAN Port setting Ports to VLAN VLAN to Ports GVRP 4 4 1 Create VLAN In this table the information and global parameters for configuring and working with VLAN s will be provided see figure 4 10 Create VLAN Single LAN LAN Name LAN Table LAN ID LAN NAME Status 1 Default 2 VLAN 2 Static 3 VLAN_S Static Total existing VLANs 1 Y Save Config M Cancel Config 44 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Figure 4 10 Create VLAN screen The page contains the following fields E Single VLAN e VLAN ID 2 4094 You can configure the ID number of the VLAN by this item Up to 256 VLANs can be created This field is used to add VLANs one at a time If you want to add the defined VLAN ID number you can press the Add button e VLAN Name Where shows the user defined VLAN name e VLAN Range Indicates a range of VLANs configured To add the defined range of VLAN ID numbers press the Add Range button m VLAN Table The VLAN Table displays a list of all configured VLANs include the e VLAN ID e
309. red on the switch before you can establish access to it with a virtual terminal protocol Terminal emulation differs from a virtual terminal protocol in that you must connect a terminal directly 23 Note to the console serial port 3 4 2 SNMP Protocol Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP is the standard management protocol for multi vendor IP networks SNMP supports transaction based queries that allow the protocol to format messages and to transmit information between reporting devices and data collection programs SNMP runs on top of the User Datagram Protocol UDP offering a connectionless mode service 26 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 3 4 3 Management Architecture All of the management application modules use the same Messaging Application Programming Interface MAPI By unifying management methods with a single MAPI configuration parameters set using one method console port for example are immediately displayable by the other management methods for example SNMP agent of Web browser The management architecture of the switch adheres to the IEEE open standard This compliance assures customers that the switch is compatible with and will interoperate with other solutions that adhere to the same open standard lt P User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 Web Configuration The WGSD 1022 can be configured through an Ethernet connection make sure the manager PC must be set on same the IP
310. res the system priority To reset to default use the no form of this command Syntax lacp system priority va ue no lacp system priority value Value of the priority Range 1 65535 Default Configuration The default system priority value is 1 236 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the system priority to 120 Console config lacp system priority 120 5 11 2 lacp port priority The lacp port priority interface configuration command configures the priority value for physical ports To reset to default priority value use the no form of this command Syntax lacp port priority va ue no lacp port priority value Port priority value Range 1 65535 Default Configuration The default port priority value is 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the priority value for port e8 to 247 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if lacp port priority 247 5 11 3 lacp timeout The lacp timeout interface configuration command assigns an administrative LACP timeout To reset the default administrative LACP timeout use the no form of this command 237 User s Manual of WGSD
311. ress filter or to use port lock security on the selected port This defines the action to be applied to packets arriving in single host mode from a host whose MAC address is not the supplicant MAC address The possible field values are e Discard which discards the packets This is the default value e Forward by which forwards the packet e Discard Disable discards the packets and shuts down the port The ports remains shut down until reactivated or until the device is reset When checked indicates that traps are enabled for Multiple Hosts Defines the time period by which traps are sent to the host The Trap Frequency 1 1000000 field can be defined only if multiple hosts are disabled The default is 10 seconds 87 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Status Where indicates the host status 4 7 7 Storm control A BroadcastStorm is a result of an excessive amount of broadcast messages simultaneously transmitted across a network by a single port Forwarded message responses are heaped onto the network straining network resources or causing the network to time out The system measures the incoming Broadcast and Multicast frame rate separately on each port and discard frames when the rate exceeds a user defined rate The Storm Control page provides fields for enabling and configuring Storm Control The screen in Figure 4 34 appears Port el y Broadcast Control O Mode Broadcast Only v Rate Threshold 3500
312. retransmit 5 5 18 4 radius server source ip The radius server source ip global configuration command specifies the source IP address used for communication with RADIUS servers To return to the default use the no form of this command Syntax radius server source ip source no radius server ip source Specifies the source IP address Default Configuration The default IP address is the outgoing IP interface Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines To define an out of band IP address use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Example The following example configures the source IP address used for communication with RADIUS servers to 10 1 1 1 Console config radius server source ip 10 1 1 1 5 18 5 radius server timeout The radius server timeout global configuration command sets the interval for which a router waits for a server host to reply To restore the default use the no form of this command Syntax radius server timeout timeout no radius server timeout 2 1 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 timeout Specifies the timeout value in seconds Range 1 30 Default Configuration The default value is 3 seconds Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets the interval for which a router waits for a server host to reply to 5 seconds Console conf
313. rface flooding Flood BPDU packets when spanning tree is disabled on an interface Default Configuration The default definition is flooding 302 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The command is relevant when spanning tree is disabled globally or on a single interface Example The following example defines BPDU packet flooding when spanning tree is disabled on an interface Console config spanning tree bpdu flooding 5 21 14 clear spanning tree detected protocols The clear spanning tree detected protocols privileged EXEC command restarts the protocol migration process force the renegotiation with neighboring switches on all interfaces or on the specified interface Syntax clear spanning tree detected protocols ethernet interface number port channel port channel number interface A valid Ethernet port port channel number A port channel index Default Configuration If no interface is specified the action is applied to all interfaces Command Modes Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines This feature should be used only when working in RSTP mode Example The following example restarts the protocol migration process forces the renegotiation with neighboring switches on g1 Console clear spanning tree detected protocols ethernet g1 5 21 15 show spanning tree The show spanning tree privileged EXEC command dis
314. rivileged EXEC mode commands from the User EXEC mode perform the following At the prompt enter the command enable and press lt Enter gt A password prompt is displayed Enter the password and press lt Enter gt The password is displayed as The privileged EXEC mode prompt is displayed The Privileged EXEC mode prompt consists of the device host name followed by console 154 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 To return from Privileged mode to User EXEC mode use the following disable commands The following example illustrates how to access Privileged mode and return back to the User EXEC mode console gt enable enter Password console console disable console gt Exit is used to move back from any mode to a previous level mode except from Privileged EXEC to User EXEC mode for example from Interface Configuration mode to Global Configuration mode and from Global Configuration mode to Privileged EXEC mode Global Configuration Mode Global configuration commands apply to features that affect the system as a whole rather than just a specific interface The Privileged EXEC mode command configure is used to enter the Global Configuration mode The Global Configuration mode commands perform the following At the Privileged EXEC mode prompt enter the command configure and press lt Enter gt The Global Configuration mode prompt is displayed The Global Configuration mode prompt
315. rkstation or Media Converter 1 Make sure both side of the SFP transfer are with the same media type for example 1000Base SX to 1000Base SX 1000Bas LX to 1000Base LX 2 Check the fiber optic cable type match the SFP transfer model gt To connect to 1000Base SX SFP transfer use the multi mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type gt To connect to 1000Base LX SFP transfer use the single mode fiber cable with one side must be male duplex LC connector type Connect the fiber cable 279 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 1 Attach the duplex LC connector on the network cable into the SFP transceiver 2 Connect the other end of the cable to a device switches with SFP installed fiber NIC on a workstation or a Media Converter 3 Check the LNK ACT LED of the SFP slot on the front of the Switch Ensure that the SFP transceiver is operating correctly 4 Check the Link mode of the SFP port if the link failed Co works with some fiber NICs or Media Converters set the Link mode to 1000 Force is needed Remove the transceiver module 1 Make sure there is no network activity by consult or check with the network administrator Or through the management interface of the switch converter if available to disable the port in advance 2 Remove the Fiber Optic Cable gently 3 Turn the handle of the MGB MFB module to horizontal 4 Pull out the module gently through the handle
316. rmon alarm table Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 281 Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the alarms summary table Console show rmon alarm table 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 TOTZ T2 OA Manager 130 T2 12 2 1109 CLI User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Index An index that uniquely identifies the entry OID Monitored variable OID Owner The entity that configured this entry 5 19 7 show rmon alarm The show rmon alarm user EXEC command displays alarm configuration Syntax show rmon alarm number number Alarm index Range 1 65535 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 282 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example The following example displays RMON 1 alarms Console show rmon alarm 1 Alarm 1 OID 1 3 6 1 2 1 2 2 1 10 1 Last sample Value 878128 Interval 30 Sample Type delta Startup Alarm rising Rising Threshold 8700000 Falling Threshold 78 Rising Event 1 Falling Event 1 Owner CLI The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description OID Monitored varia
317. rom the list of syslogs use the no form of this command Syntax logging ip address port port severity level facility facility description tex no logging ip address p address IP address of the host to be used as a syslog server An out of band IP address can be specified as described in the usage guidelines port Port number for syslog messages If unspecified the port number defaults to 514 Range 1 65535 severity level Limits the logging of messages to the syslog servers to a specified level emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational and debugging If unspecified the default level is informational facility The facility that is indicated in the message Can be one of the following values local0 local1 local2 local3 local4 local5 local 6 local7 If unspecified the port number defaults to local7 text Syslog server description which can be up to 64 characters 325 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration As described in the field descriptions Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Multiple syslog servers can be used If no specific severity level is specified the global values apply to each server To define a logging server on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Example The following example configures messages with a critical se
318. rt within the VLAN The time in milliseconds between messages sent Range 10 2147483640 timer_value Timer values in milliseconds Default Configuration The default timer values are as follows Join timer 200 milliseconds Leave timer 600 milliseconds Leavall timer 10000 milliseconds Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet port channel mode 219 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines The following relationship for the various timer values must be maintained Leave time must be greater than or equal to three times the join time Leaveall time must be greater than the leave time Set the same GARP timer values on all Layer 2 connected devices If the GARP timers are set differently on Layer 2 connected devices GARP application will not operate successfully As the number of dynamic VLANs GVRP increases the leave time should be increased from the default value For example if the number of dynamic VLANs is 400 it is recommended to increase the leave time Example The following example sets the leave timer for port e8 to 900 milliseconds Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if garp timer leave 900 5 8 4 gvrp vlan creation forbid The gvrp vlan creation forbid interface configuration command enables or disables dynamic VLAN creation To disable dynamic VLAN creation use the no form of this command Syntax gvrp vlan creation forbi
319. s 369 38 23 11 00 TIMeOUE seve Mela rt a A ta 370 O so 370 DZ SNOW OU US Sd iio 372 a ee User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 29 WA SOW COL 1 SEALS CS e oa 374 5 29215 00X authenOl e ee ee e 375 ZO A COL Ie MUIE NOSIS inte aerial eile a Sekt a ideas ada coast oad bat 376 529A 0 dOt1XSMale NOST MIOIQUDOIN arica ina iia 376 AL O ace tats 377 TROUBEESHA OO TINO ad au o 379 A AP rn po PP eee nee ee eee eee ene 380 A 1 Switch s RJ 45 Pin Assignments ccccsecccceeececcseececceneeecsueeeseeeecseueeessuseeesaueeesseueeessaecessegeeessueeesssaesesseneeesseeeeesageees 380 A2 RIAS Cable PIS AMEN tA cia eek coer A 380 SE lA A A cee ie 382 sia User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 1 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing PLANET Desktop Managed Switch WGSD 1022 and WGSD 8000 If any of these are missing or damaged please contact your dealer immediately if possible retain the carton including the original packing material and use them against to repack the product in case there is a need to return it to us for repair Package Contents Check the contents of your package for following parts e The WGSD Managed Switch x1 e CD ROM user s manual x1 e Quick installation guide x1 e 19 rack mounting kit x1 e AC adapter x1 e RS 232 console cable x 1 e Rubber feet x 4 How to Use This Manual This User Manual is structured as follows Section 2 Installation The section explains the functions
320. s Map screen see figure 4 33 Add Class Map ClassMapName i i E Preferred ACL I IF Based mt IP ACL Match Or ts MAL ALCL Add to List Class Map Preferred IP ACL Match MAC ACL Mame ACL Cancel Figure 4 43 Class Map Settings screen The page contains the following fields e Class Map Name e Preferred ACL e IP ACL e Match e MAC ACL defines a new Class Map name which indicates if packets are first matched to an IP based ACL or a MAC based ACL the possible field values are e IP Based ACLs matches packets to IP based ACLs first then matches packets to MAC based ACLs e MAC Based ACLs matches packets to MAC based ACLs first then matches packets to IP based ACLs Matches packets to IP based ACLs first and then matches packets to MAC based ACLs Criteria used to match IP addresses and or MAC addresses with an ACL s address The possible field values are e And both the MAC based and the IP based ACL must match a packet e Or either the MAC based or the IP based ACL must match a packet Matches packets to MAC based ACLs and to IP based ACLs 98 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Aggregate Policer where user defined aggregate policers The Aggregate Policer button opens the New Aggregate Policer screen Aggregate Policer Setting New Aggregate Policer screen see figure 4 44 Add Aggregate Policer Ingress Committed Information Rate CIR Kbits per second Ingress Comm
321. s N A NA NA 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A e6 N A NJIA NA 128 200000 N A N A N A Nid N A e7 N A NJIA NA 128 2000000 N A N A N A Nid N A e8 N A NIA NA 128 200000 N A N A N A Nid N A gl N A NJA NA 128 2000000 N A N A N A Nid N A g2 N A NIA N A 128 2000000 N A N A N A N A N A v Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 54 MSTP Interfance configuration screen 117 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 10 Multicast On this field included IGMP Snooping Bridge Multicast Forward All About the Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP Snooping Computers and network devices that want to receive multicast transmissions need to inform nearby routers that they will become members of a multicast group The Internet Group Management Protocol IGMP is used to communicate this information IGMP is also used to periodically check the multicast group for members that are no longer active In the case where there is more than one multicast router on a sub network one router is elected as the queried This router then keeps track of the membership of the multicast groups that have active members The information received from IGMP is then used to determine if multicast packets should be forwarded to a given sub network or not The router can check using IGMP to see if there is at least one member of a multicast group on a given subnet work If there are no members on a sub network packets will not be forwarded to that sub network IG
322. s but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 1024 and 1518 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets 2 5 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 19 2 rmon collection history The rmon collection history interface configuration command enables a Remote Monitoring RMON MIB history statistics group on an interface To remove a specified RMON history statistics group use the no form of this command Syntax rmon collection history index owner ownername buckets bucket number interval seconds no rmon collection history index Index The requested statistics index group Range 1 65535 owner ownername Records the RMON statistics group owner name If unspecified the name is an empty string buckets bucket number A value associated with the number of buckets specified for the RMON collection history group of statistics If unspecified defaults to 50 Range 1 65535 interval seconds The number of seconds in each polling cycle If unspecified defaults to 1800 Range 1 3600 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines This command cannot be executed on multiple ports using the interface range ethernet command Example The following example enables a Remote Monitoring RMON MIB histor
323. s or subnet needed e Must be near switch or use dial up connection Text based e Not convenient for remote users e Telnet functionality and HyperTerminal built into Modem connection may prove to be unreliable Windows 95 98 NT 2000 ME XP operating or slow systems e Secure Web e Ideal for configuring the switch remotely e Security can be compromised hackers need Browser e Compatible with all popular browsers only know the IP address and subnet mask Can be accessed from any location e May encounter lag times on poor connections e Most visually appealing SNMP e Communicates with switch functions at the MIB Requires SNMP manager software Agent level e Least visually appealing of all three methods e Based on open standards e Some settings require calculations 24 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Security can be compromised hackers need only know the community name Table 3 1 Management Methods Comparison 3 1 1 Administration Console The administration console is an internal character oriented and command line user interface for performing system administration such as displaying statistics or changing option settings Using this method you can view the administration console from a terminal personal computer Apple Macintosh or workstation connected to the switch s console serial port There are two ways to use this management method via direct access or modem port access The following sections describe these m
324. s supported rstp RSTP is supported Default Configuration Spanning tree protocol STP is supported Command Modes Global Configuration mode 295 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures the spanning tree protocol to RSTP Console config spanning tree mode rstp 5 21 3 spanning tree forward time The spanning tree forward time global configuration command configures the spanning tree bridge forward time which is the amount of time a port remains in the listening and learning states before entering the forwarding state To reset the default forward time use the no form of this command Syntax spanning tree forward time seconds no spanning tree forward time seconds Time in seconds Range 4 30 Default Configuration The default forwarding time for IEEE Spanning tree Protocol STP is 15 seconds Command Modes Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures spanning tree bridge forward time to 25 seconds Console config spanning tree forward time 25 5 21 4 spanning tree hello time The spanning tree hello time global configuration command configures the spanning tree bridge hello time which is how often the switch broadcasts hello messages to other switches To reset the default hello time
325. s that map generic terminal control functions to operating system specific functions To issue a special Telnet command enter Esc and then a command character If you want to login to host on the out of band port use the out of band IP address format oob ip address Special Telnet Command character Escape Sequence Purpose Ctrl shift 6 b Break Ctrl shift 6 c Interrupt Process IP Ctrl shift 6 h Erase Character EC Ctrl shift 6 o Abort Output AO Ctrl shift 6 t Are You There AYT Ctrl shift 6 u Erase Line EL At any time during an active Telnet session the Telnet commands can be listed by pressing the Ctrl shift 6 key followed by a question mark at the system prompt Ctrl shift 6 A sample of this list follows The following example displays the system service tag information 317 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Console gt Ctrl shift 6 Special telnet escape help Esc B sends telnet BREAK Esc C sends telnet IP Esc H sends telnet EC Esc O sends telnet AO Esc T sends telnet AYT Esc U sends telnet EL Several concurrent Telnet sessions can be opened and switched between them To open a subsequent session the current connection needs to be suspended by pressing the escape sequence Ctrl Shift 6 and x to return to the system command prompt Then open a new connection with the telnet command If you want to login to host on the out of band port use the out of band IP
326. s that the port is in whose mode The port cannot forward traffic however it can learn new MAC addresses e Forwarding the port that can forward traffic and learn new MAC addresses Indicates the speed at which the port is operating Indicates the port contribution to the root path cost The path cost is adjusted to a higher or lower value and is used to forward traffic when a path being rerouted Value Rage 1 20000000 Default Path Cost The default path cost of the port is automatically set by the port speed and the default path cost method The default values for path costs are Ethernet 2000000 Fast Ethernet 200000 Gigabit Ethernet 20000 When selected the default path cost is implemented Indicates priority value of the port The priority value influences the port choice when a bridge has two ports connected in a loop The priority value is between O 240 The priority value is provided in increments of 16 Indicates the bridge priority and the MAC Address of the designated bridge Indicates the selected port s priority and interface Where indicates the cost of the port participating in the STP topology Ports with a lower cost are less likely to be blocked if STP detects loops 110 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Forward Transitions This indicates the number of times the port has changed from the Blocking state to Forwarding state STP Port status table 3 PLANET Setup Port C
327. s the following information The unique identifier of the switch that the transmitting switch currently believes is the root switch The path cost to the root from the transmitting port The port identifier of the transmitting port The switch sends BPDUs to communicate and construct the spanning tree topology All switches connected to the LAN on which the packet is transmitted will receive the BPDU BPDUs are not directly forwarded by the switch but the receiving switch uses the information in the frame to calculate a BPDU and if the topology changes initiates a BPDU transmission The communication between switches via BPDUs results in the following One switch is elected as the root switch The shortest distance to the root switch is calculated for each switch A designated switch is selected This is the switch closest to the root switch through which packets will be forwarded to the root A port for each switch is selected This is the port providing the best path from the switch to the root switch Ports included in the STP are selected Creating a Stable STP Topology 100 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 It is to make the root port a fastest link If all switches have STP enabled with default settings the switch with the lowest MAC address in the network will become the root switch By increasing the priority lowering the priority number of the best switch STP can be forced to select the best switch as the root switch Whe
328. ser s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 DSCP In DSCP Out DSCPIn DSCPOuE DSCPIn DSCP Out DSCP In DSCP Out O O 16 a a2 ME 5 45 w ly 33 33 w 49 49 w 16 a4 a4 a0 SO 19 359 al O 36 az zi af 53 ae 35 a 23 an i Qu J mo oO T a4 E O 56 mo 0 ws 5 A WO hy mal bra be a fa t Ci lt i 4 i AAA AA q 25 oe 26 ae Zo 23 a0 al 55 29 60 pl Dz 63 Di Oo Bo Bo Boy Boy Bo By Boy Boy Bo i O oy 5 Oy Ory Be a yy Boy a Di J mo RAHA aelekee alela alele lmla ele FINES ANA NAAA Figure 4 41 Out of Profile DSCP Assignments screen The page contains the following fields e DSCP In This displays the DSCP In value The value is form 0 63 e DSCP Out This displays the current DSCP out value A new value can be selected from the pull down menu fe to List Policy Name Figure 4 42 Policy Settings screen 96 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The page contains the following fields e Policy Name defines a new Policy name e Add to List this button will add the policy to the Policy Name table e Select Policy which selects an existing Policy by name e New Policy Name which defines a new Policy name e Class Map where selects an existing Class Map by name 97 m Class Map setting User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 New Class Map by which the New Class Map button opens the New Clas
329. ser s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 VLAN to Ports lt lt Previous 1 Next Port Mode Join LAN LANs LAG el Access 1U v e2 Access 1U v e3 Access 1U v e4 Access 1U v e5 Access 1U v e6 Access 1u amp e Access 1U v es Access 10 v gi Access 1U v g2 Access 1U w Cancel Config Figure 4 13 VLA N to Ports The page contains the following fields e Port e Mode e Join VLAN e VLANs e LAG Displays the interface number By which indicates the port to VLAN mode Possible field values are e General By which indicates the port belongs to VLANs and each VLAN is user defined as tagged or untagged full 802 1Q mode e Access Indicates the port belongs to a single untagged VLAN When a port is in Access mode the packet types which are accepted on the port cannot be designated Ingress filtering cannot be enabled disabled on an access port e Trunk Which indicates these ports belong to VLANs in which all ports are tagged except for one port that can be untagged Defines the VLANs to which the interface is joined Displays the PVID tag Indicates whether the port is a member of a LAG If it is a member of a LAG it cannot be configured to a VLAN The LAG to which belongs can be configured to a VLAN Press the Join VLAN button to selecet and add VLAN to per port The screen in Figure 4 14 appears 48 4 4 5 GVRP User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 2 11 a Add Select YLAN Remove Tag
330. serio 129 A1 S COMMUNES OS 131 AMO INOUE ATION lea O te e e la o 133 A ee AA A nn eee ie etc eee 134 A 6 ee ee et ARR a Per ere 137 PAI o A A E o PP A 137 4 122 Sac 2 40 0 e hc oe gene TR ene eee Ce ere eter er nen eee ree verre en ree een eee 138 4 12 SO DYNAMIC AA EN 139 A O RO 141 A 126 AS A OU O 143 ANZ 6 Gable TES inna ete ae Aa ee at ore iat Nh Maa soy ar Neh eA an ann aa E 143 412r Save COnngurationsc ciao Avie eae an ee te ee ee aE 144 AZ O Firmware UPA oca lllcnd 146 A A a ee ee ane 147 ANZ VO AC ONY TS a is ee La ee a arti eee 148 BAZ A Seer LOGS A ees ts es Seed eee eee e E 149 AW AAM mO LOS met opio 150 A2 AAA O O O 151 BS COMMAND STRUCTURE ca a a a O o o ee ee 153 9 1 CGOMectto PC SR92392 serial PU aii usiaiadao ai 153 SA A A eee Cee 153 9 21 CL COMMaANd MOOS Scissor diarias 153 o A ee 156 952o o OA A A Ten A 157 SS ANA SOM Seras enc lola aio upon ida 160 5 3 1 aaa AUIMEMUCANOMNOGUIN aaa ini 160 9 32 Aad AUINEMICAON DL a Ds aaa ee A eh eA sae a Sa aed 161 5 3 5 lOGIN AUINCNLCAOM Aaa 163 5 94 enable AUUTSMLICAL OM sense E e ewes ca eene didaviiede toned ase E 163 es PP Decale Uva cane RRA 164 ja e o A ee 165 00 7 SHOW autnenticali n MENOS isteran a EE t 166 To o Oj WO PM PRO o o ee ene ene ee ee ene ro eee 166 5 3 9 enable password cccccccecccecccseeceeeceueeceeeceueceaeeseessueesaeesaeesaueeeaeeseuessueeeaeesueesaeessuessueessueeseesseessueesasesseessusenaeess 167 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD
331. ses To disable filtering of multicast addresses use the no form of the bridge multicast filtering command Syntax bridge multicast filtering no bridge multicast filtering Default Configuration Disabled All multicast addresses are flooded to all ports of the relevant VLAN Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines If multicast routers exist on the VLAN and IGMP snooping is not enabled the bridge multicast forward all command should be used to enable forwarding all multicast packets to the multicast routers Example In this example bridge multicast filtering is enabled console config bridge multicast filtering 5 4 3 bridge multicast address The bridge multicast address interface configuration command registers MAC layer multicast addresses to the bridge table and adds static ports to the group To unregister the MAC address use the no form of the bridge multicast address command Syntax bridge multicast address mac multicast address ip multicast address 170 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 bridge multicast address mac multicast address p multicast address add remove ethernet interface list port channel port channel number list no bridge multicast address mac multicast address ip multicast address add Adds ports to the group If no option is specified this is the default option remove Removes ports from the group mac multicast address
332. shows the status of the SNTP Console show sntp status Clock is synchronized stratum 4 reference is 176 1 1 8 Reference time is AFE2525E 70597B34 00 10 22 438 PDT Jul 5 1993 Unicast servers Preference Status Last response Offset Delay mSec mSec 176 1 1 8 AFE252C1 6DBDDFF2 7 33 176 1 8 179 Secondary Unknown AFE21789 643287C9 8 98 Broadcast Interface IP address Last response 176 1 1 8 AFE252C1 6DBDDFF2 176 1 8 179 Secondary AFE21789 643287C9 5 6 Configuration and I mage Files 5 6 1 copy The copy privileged EXEC command copies files from a source to a destination Syntax copy source url destination url snmp source url The source file location URL or reserved keyword being copied destination url The destination file URL or reserved keyword snmp Used only when copying from to startup config Specifies that the destination source file is inSNMP format The following table displays keywords aliases to URL 195 Keyword running config startup config backup config Image boot tftp Xmodem null User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Source or destination Represents the current running configuration file Represents the startup configuration file Represents the backup configuration file The image is executable code which is decompressed during system startup into the switching and routing software that manages the device There are always two images
333. signate a range of ports port channel number list Separate non consecutive valid port channels with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of port channels Default Configuration Disable forward all on all ports Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example all multicast packets on port e8 are forwarded console config interface vlan 2 console config if bridge multicast forward all add ethernet e8 5 4 8 bridge multicast forbidden forward all The bridge multicast forbidden forward all interface configuration command forbids a port to be a forward allmulticast port To restore the default use the no form of the bridge multicast forward all command 174 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax bridge multicast forbidden forward all add remove ethernet interface list port channel port channel number list no bridge multicast forward all add Forbids forwarding all multicast packets remove Does not forbid forwarding all multicast packets interface list Separates non consecutive valid Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of ports port channel number list Separates non consecutive valid port channels with a comma and no spaces a hyphen is used to designate a range of port channels Default Config
334. sing higher privilege levels console config aaa authentication enable default enable 162 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 3 3 login authentication The login authentication line configuration command specifies the login authentication method list for a remote telnet or console To return to the default specified by the authentication login command use the no form of this command Syntax login authentication default ist name no login authentication default Uses the default list created with the authentication login command listname Uses the indicated list created with the authentication login command Default Configuration Uses the default set with the command authentication login Command Mode Line Configuration mode User Guidelines Changing login authentication from default to another value may disconnect the telnet session Example The following example specifies the default authentication method for a remote Telnet or console console config line cnsole console config line login authentication default 5 3 4 enable authentication The enable authentication line configuration command specifies the authentication method list wnen accessing a higher privilege level from a remote telnet or console To return to the default specified by the enable authentication command use the no form of this command Syntax enable authentication default ist name
335. sole config if flowcontrol on 5 7 9 mdix The mdix interface configuration command enables automatic crossover on a given interface To disable automatic crossover use the no form of this command Syntax mdix on auto no mdix on Manual mdix auto Auto mdi mdix Default Configuration Automatic crossover is enabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines Mdix Auto All possibilities to connect a PC with cross OR normal cables are supported and are automatically detected Mdix ON It is possible to connect to a PC only with a normal cable and to connect to another switch ONLY with a cross cable If MDIX is set to no mdix the device works oppostie from the MDIX On behavior It is possible to connect to PC only with cross cable and to connect to another switch ONLY with Normal cable 206 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example In the following example automatic crossover is enabled on g2 Console config interface ethernet g2 Console config if mdix auto 5 7 10 back pressure The back pressure interface configuration command enables Back Pressure on a given interface To disable Back Pressure use the no form of this command Syntax back pressure no back pressure Default Configuration Back Pressure is disabled Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines Back Pressure will operat
336. ss and Wild Card Mask be blanked After click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table ACL Name Delete ACL Action Source MAC Address Dest MAC Address LAN ID Ether Type O Mew ACL Name wild Card Mask Wild Card Mask Ber sc om User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Action Source Destination YLAN ID Ethertype Address Address Deny 00 11 08 57 E0 1E 00 530 4F 10 9F DDE 1 Permit Delete 13 Please press Save Config to save current setting E Binding the MAC ACL to specify interface 14 Select Security ACL Binding in the Menu bar 15 Choose Port g2 from Interface item 16 Choose MAC Based ACL select ACL name with Deny MAC A that we had been created at step 1 Click Add to List button the entry would be show at the table CPANGT Sa Pena keteztiez amp panaan Setup Comfia Config Statistics ACL Security Dos Ta Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut ACL Binding 7 Interface Port g2 4 O Lac ACL Name IP Based ACL Deny 5ource 4 MAC Based ACL Deny MAC 4 x Interface Select ACL gz Deny MAC A Save Config M Cancel Config 17 Please press Save Config to save current setting Note If action shutdown is selected the port will be force disabled 74 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 7 Security This section is to control the security access
337. ss 00 11 08 57 E0 1E ACL Switch MAC Address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE Setting procedure from WGSD Switch Web interface Mi Create Deny MAC ACL and add to list 1 Please enter into Web interface and choose ACL function Then choose MAC based ACL function Please input a new ACL name for example Deny MAC 2 To defined Permit Deny or Shutdown from Action item Deny Rule Enter Dest Mac Address 00 30 4F 1D 9F DE with Wild Card Mask 00 00 00 00 00 00 2 3 4 Deny Rule Input Source MAC Address 00 11 08 57 E0 1E with Wild Card Mask 00 00 00 00 00 00 6 7 Deny Rule Input the VLAN ID and default VLAN ID is 1 8 Press Add to List button to complete this setting 79 O ACL Name Delete ACL Action Source MAC Address Dest MAC Address LAN ID Ether Type Action Source Address Deny 00 11 08 57 E0 1E User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 New ACL Name Deny MAac 4 Deny 0 1 i 18 57 60 1 Wild Card Mask 0 00 00 00 00 00 00 30 4F 1D 9F D wild Card Mask 0 00 00 00 00 00 11 Destination YLAN ID Ethertype Address 00 30 4PF 10 9F DE 1 Mi Create Permit MAC ACL and add to list To allow all other packets be forwarded 9 10 11 12 Permit Rule Within the same ACL Deny MAC A choose Action Permit Permit Rule Keep the Source MAC Address and Wild Card Mask be blanked Permit Rule Keep the Destination MAC Addre
338. ssfully established LNK ACT Blink indicate that the switch is actively sending or receiving data over that port Lights to indicate the port is running in 1000Mbps speed 1000 Orange Off indicate that the port is operating at 10Mbps or 100Mbps 2 1 4 Switch Rear Panel Figure 2 3 and Figure 2 4 shows the rear panel of the switches 12V DC 1 5A Figure 2 3 WGSD 1022 rear panel 19 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 12V DC 2 0A OO Figure 2 4 WGSD 8000 rear panel Power Notice 1 The device is a power required device it means it will not work till it is powered If your networks should active all the time please consider using UPS Uninterrupted Power Supply for your device It will prevent you from network data loss or network downtime 2 In some area installing a surge suppression device may also help to protect your switch from being damaged by unregulated surge or current to the Switch or the power adapter 2 2 Install the Switch This section describes how to install the Ethernet Switch and make connections to it Please read the following topics and perform the procedures in the order being presented 2 2 1 Desktop Installation To install the Switch on desktop or shelf please follows these steps Step1 Attach the rubber feet to the recessed areas on the bottom of the switch Step2 Place the switch on the desktop or the shelf near an AC power source Step3 Keep enough ventilation space betw
339. st configuration command defines a deny rule Syntax deny ethernet nterface number vlan vlan id port channel number service service 244 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 deny ip source p address mask mask prefix length ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number out of band eth oob interface service service ethernet interface number A valid Ethernet port number vlan vian id A valid VLAN number port channel number A valid port channel number p address Source IP address Range Valid IP Address mask mask Specifies the network mask of the source IP address Range Valid subnet mask mask prefix length Specifies the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash service service Indicates service type Can be one of the following telnet ssh http https or snmp Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Management Access list Configuration mode User Guidelines Rules with Ethernet VLAN and port channel parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate interface The system supports up to 256 management access rules Example The following example shows how all ports are denied in the access list called mlist Console config management access list mlist Console config macl den
340. stics ethernet interface interface The full syntax is unit port Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example displays 802 1X statistics for the specified interface Switch show dot1x statistics ethernet g1 EapolFrameskx 11 EapolFramesTx 12 EapolStartFramesRx 1 EapolLogoffFramesRx 1 EapolRespldFramesRx 3 EapolRespFramesRx 6 EapolRegldFramesTx 3 EapolReqFramesTx 6 InvalidEapolFramesRx 0 EapLengthErrorFramesRx 0 LastEapolFrameVersion 1 LastEapolFrameSource 0008 3b79 8787 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description EapolFramesRx The number of valid EAPOL frames of any type that have been received by this Authenticator EapolFramesTx The number of EAPOL frames of any type that have been transmitted by this 374 EapolStartFramesRx EapolLogoffFramesRx EapolRespldFramesRx EapolRespFramesRx EapolReqldFramesTx EapolReqFramesIx InvalidEapolFramesRx EapLengthErrorFramesRx LastEapolFrameVersion LastEapolFrameSource User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Authenticator The number of EAPOL Start frames that have been received by this Authenticator The number of EAPOL Logoff frames that have been received by this Authenticator The number of EAP Resp Id frames that have
341. stored in the device flash known as image 1 and image 2 The images do not necessarily have to contain the same versions of the software One of these images is always marked as active and the other image serves as a back up The active image is either the last downloaded image or the image configured as the active image The switch boot code first tries to load and run the active image However if the active image is found to be corrupt the boot code tries to load the back up image If the backup image is also corrupt the boot code prompts the user to initiate the Xmodem transfer of a valid image through the serial connection The image file name is in the format 6024 abcd dos where abcd represents the release number Boot file The name of the image is in the format 6024 boot_abcd rfb where abcd represents the release number Source or destination URL for a TFTP network server The syntax for this alias is tftp location directory filename Source for the file from a serial connection that uses the Xmodem protocol Null destination for copies or files A remote file can be copied to null to determine its size Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines The location of a file system dictates the format of the source or destination URL The startup config and the backup config files cannot be copied to the running config file The entire
342. strings To communicate with the device the Embedded Web Server submits a valid community string for authentication 4 11 1 Global Parameters The Global Parameters screen see figure 4 59 contains parameters for defining SNMP notification parameters Global Parameters SNMP 3 Local Engine ID EngineID not Configured Use Default di Notifications SNMP Notifications K El Authentication Notifications Cancel Config Figure 4 59 SNMP Global Parameter The Global Parameter Screen contains the following fields E SNMPV3 e Local Engine ID Indicates the local device engine ID The field value is a hexadecimal string Each byte in hexadecimal character strings consists of two hexadecimal digits Each byte can be separated by a period or a colon The Engine ID must be defined before SNMPv3 is enabled For stand alone devices select a default Engine ID that is comprised of Enterprise number and the default MAC address For a stackable system configure the Engine ID and verify that the Engine ID is unique for the administrative domain This prevents two devices in a network from having the same Engine ID e Use Default Uses the device generated Engine ID It s defined per standard as First 4 octets first bit 1 the rest is IANA Enterprise number To locate the IANA Enterprise number by referring to the Vendor website or use the show SNMP command using a CLI interface 125 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGS
343. subnet address with the switch For example if you have changed the default IP address of the Switch to 192 168 1 1 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 via console then the manager PC should be set at 192 168 1 x where x is a number between 1 and 253 with subnet mask 255 255 255 0 Or you can use the factory default IP address 192 168 1 254 to do the relative configuration on manager PC The sceen in Figure 4 1 appears PLANET Managed Switch PC Workstation with IE or Netscape Browser RJ 45 UTP Cable Figure 4 1 Web Management via ethernet 1 Logging on the switch 1 Use Internet Explorer 5 0 or above Web browser Enter the factory default IP address to access the Web interface The factory default IP Address as following http 192 168 1 254 2 When the following login screen appears the system will ask you to enter the username and password Default User name admin Default Password admin The login screen in Figure 4 2 appears 28 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 A Log In Microsoft Internet Explorer File Edit View Favorites Tools Help Q tac X P a CA pO search SP Favorites 4 B ti 3 Address E http 192 168 1 254 configfauthentication _page htm Q PLANET Networking A Commusication Input username and password then click Submit Username Password i Internet Figure 4 2 WGSD Switch Web Login screen 3 After entering the username and pas
344. subnet mask for the interface The factory default value is 255 255 255 0 e Deafault Gateway Enter the default gateway for the IP interface The factory default value is 0 0 0 0 e DNS Server Enter the IP Address of the DNS Server The Domain Name System DNS converts user defined domain names into IP addresses 4 2 3 Time In the Basic Setup Table you can see the Time Setup see figure 4 5 by which you can configure the time settings for the Switch You can select SNTP Servers Server for the primary SNTP server and Server2 for the secondary SNTP server e A Port Ca Set Time Use System Time Use SNTP Time Local Time 04 Hours 17 Minutes iT Seconds 01 Month 01 Day o0 Year Time Zone GMT Greenwich Mean Time Dublin Edinburgh Lisbon London Daylight Saving CI Daylight Saving USA European Custom Time Set Offset Min From ommy HH MM To DDIM HH MM Recurring From Day Week Month Time HH MM To Day week Month Time HH MM SNTP Servers Serveri Server2 SNTP Polling Interval 60 86400 sec 11024 Cancel Config Save Config Figure 4 5 Time screen The Time page includes the following fields E Set Time e Use System Time Specifies that the system time is not set by an external source but the Local time settings e Use SNTP Time Specifies that the system time is set via an SNTP server E Local Time 34 e Hours Minuntes Seconds e Month Day Year e Time Zo
345. sword the main screen appears as Figure 4 3 a e e e Device Information System Name IP Address 210 66 155 69 Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 DNS Servers Default Gateway 210 66 155 94 Address Mode Static Base MAC Address 00 03 6d 30 57 00 System Information Serial Number Model Name WGSD_1022 Hardware Version 00 03 00 Boot Yersion 1 0 2 Firmware ersion 1 0 0 34 System Location Cuctam Fantare v Sy Ses Figure 4 3 Web Main Screen of WGSD Switch Now you can use the Web management interface to continue the switch management or manage the switch by console interface x Note It is recommended to use Internet Explore 6 0 or above to access WGSD Switch 29 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 4 1 Main Screen The Switch provides a Web based browser interface for configuring and managing the Switch This interface allows you to access the switch using the Web browser of your choice This chapter describes how to use the switch s Web browser interface to con figure and manage the switch Main Functions Menu Sub Menu el e e Port Link Status Device Information System Name IP Address 210 66 155 69 _ _ _ _ Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Main Screen DNS Servers Default Gateway 210 66 155 94 Description Address Mode Static Base MAC Address 00 03 6d 30 57 00 System Information Serial Number Model Name WGSD_1022 Hardware Yersion 00 03 00 Boot ersi
346. t Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privilege EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the status for all configured interfaces Console show interfaces status Port Type Duplex Speed Flow i Back Control Pressure Disable Disable Duplex Speed Flow Back Control Pressure Disable The displayed port status information includes the following Port The port number Description lf the port has a description the description is displayed Port Type The port designated IEEE shorthand identifier For example 1000Base T refers to 1000 Mbps baseband signaling inluding both Tx and Rx transmissions Duplex Displays the port Duplex status Speed Refers to the port speed Neg Describes the Auto negotiation status Flow Control Displays the Flow Control status Back Pressure Displays the Back Pressure status Link State Displays the Link Aggregation status 211 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 7 16 show interfaces description The show interfaces description user EXEC command displays the description for all configured interfaces Syntax show interfaces description ethernet interface port channel port channel number out of band eth oobinterface Interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number A valid port channel trunk index o0ob interface
347. t identity frame from the client before resending the request Range 1 65535 seconds Default Configuration 30 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet Examples The following command sets the number of seconds that the switch waits for a response to an EAP request identity frame to 3600 seconds Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x timeout tx period 3600 5 29 9 dot1x max req The dot1x max req interface configuration command sets the maximum number of times that the switch sends an Extensible Authentication Protocol EAP request identity frame assuming that no response is received to the client before restarting the authentication process Use the no form of this command to return to the default setting 368 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax dot1x max req count no dot1x max req count Number of times that the switch sends an EAP request identity frame before restarting the authentication process Range 1 10 Default Configuartion 2 Command Mode Interface configuration Ethernet mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Examples The following example sets the number of times that the switch sends an EAP request identity frame to 6 Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if dot1x max req 6 5 29 10 dot1x timeout supp timeout The dot1x timeout supp timeout int
348. t port Port Cost A value used by STP to evaluate paths 19 100Mbps Fast Ethernet ports STP calculates path costs and selects the 4 1000Mbps Gigabit Ethernet ports path with the minimum cost as the active path Default Spanning Tree Configuration Feature Default Value Enable state STP enabled for all ports Port priority 128 Port cost 19 Bridge Priority 32 68 User Changeable STA Parameters The Switch s factory default setting should cover the majority of installations However it is advisable to keep the default settings as set at the factory unless it is absolutely necessary The user changeable parameters in the Switch are as follows Priority A Priority for the switch can be set from O to 65535 0 is equal to the highest Priority Hello Time The Hello Time can be from 1 to 10 seconds This is the interval between two transmissions of BPDU packets sent by the Root Bridge to tell all other Switches that it is indeed the Root Bridge If you set a Hello Time for your Switch and it is not the Root Bridge the set Hello Time will be used if and when your Switch becomes the Root Bridge 103 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 3 Note The Hello Time cannot be longer than the Max Age Otherwise a configuration error will occur Max Age The Max Age can be from 6 to 40 seconds At the end of the Max Age if a BPDU has still not been received from the Root Bridge your Switch will start sending its own BPDU
349. t screen The page contains the following fields e Port e Test Result e Cable Fault Distance e Last Update e Cable Length This is the port to which the cable is connected e OK indicates that the cable passed the test e No Cable means no cable connected to the port e Open Cable means the cable is connected on only one side e Short Cable indicates that a short has occurred in the cable This is the distance from the port at which the cable error occurred This is the last time the port was tested This is the approximate length of the cable The Cable Length test can be performed only when the port is up and operating at 1Gbps 4 12 7 Save Configuration On this screen you can choose two methods to save the configuration Via TFTP Upgrade and Via HTTP See figure 4 74 144 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 GQ PLANET vitae Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut Save Configuration via TFTP O via HTTP UPGRADE BACKUP File Type Configuration TFTP Server Source File Destination File Figure 4 74 Save Configuration via TFTP The page contains the following fields m Via TFTP e Via TFTP Upgrade Select this option to upgrade the switch from a file located on a TFTP Server e TFTP Server The TFTP Server IP Address that contains the source file to upgrade from e Source File Specifies the na
350. tN 4oJfce166DqVXigWmN ZNR4DY DvSzg0IDnwCAC8Qh Fingerprint a4 16 46 23 5a 8d 1d b5 37 59 eb 44 13 b9 33 e9 5 22 9 show ip ssh The show ip ssh privileged EXEC command displays the SSH server configuration Syntax show ip ssh Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the SSH server configuration Console show ip ssh SSH server enabled Port 22 RSA key was generated DSA DSS key was generated SSH Public Key Authentication is enabled Active incoming sessions IP address SSH username Version i Auth Code 172 16 0 1 John Brown i HMAC SH1 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description IP address Client address Version SSH version number Cipher Encryption type 3DES Blowfish RC4 311 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Auth Code Authentication Code HMAC MD5 HMAC SHA1 5 22 10 show crypto key mypubkey The show crypto key mypubkey privileged EXEC command displays the SSH public keys on the device Syntax show crypto key mypubkey rsa dsa rsa RSA key dsa DSA key Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The fo
351. ters Default Configuration Summer time is disabled offset offset default is 60 zone acronym lf unspecified default to the timezone acronym Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines In both the date and recurring forms of the command the first part of the command specifies when summer time begins and the second part specifies when it ends All times are relative to the local time zone The start time is relative to standard time 185 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The end time is relative to summer time If the starting month is chronologically after the ending month the system assumes that you are in the southern hemisphere USA rule for daylight saving time Start First Sunday in April End Last Sunday in October Time 2 am local time EU rule for daylight saving time Start Last Sunday in March End Last Sunday in October Time 1 00 am 01 00 Greenwich Mean Time GMT Examples The following example sets summer time starting on the first Sunday in April at 2am and finishing on the last Sunday in October at 2 am Console config clock summer time recurring first sun apr 2 00 last sun oct 2 00 5 5 5 sntp authentication key The sntp authentication key global configuration command defines an authentication key for Simple Network Time Protocol SNTP To remove the authentication key for SNTP use the no form of this command Syntax sntp authentication key number md5 v
352. tes either the local or remote SNMP entity to which the user is connected Changing or removing the local SNMP Engine ID deletes the SNMPv3 User Database e Local Indicates that the user is connected to a local SNMP entity e Remote Indicates that the user is connected to a remote SNMP entity If the Engine ID is defined remote devices receive inform messages Contains a list of user defined SNMP groups SNMP groups are defined in the SNMP Group Profile page Indicates the Authentication method used The possible field values are 129 Method e Password e Authentication Key e Privacy Key User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e None that no authentication method is used to authenticate the port e MD5 Password that port authentication is performed via HMAC MD5 96 password authentication e SHA Password that port authentication is performed via HMAC SHA 96 password authentication e MD5 Key that port authentication is performed via the HMAC MD5d algorithm e SHA Key that port authentication is performed via HMAC SHA 96 authentication Define the local user password Local user passwords can contain up to 159 characters Define the HMAC MD5 96 or HMAC SHA 96 authentication level The authentication and privacy keys are entered to define the authentication key If only authentication is required 16 bytes are defined If both privacy and authentication are required 32 bytes are defined Each byte in
353. teway 232 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration No default gateway is defined Command Mode Interface configuration User Guidelines The setting of the default gateway on the out of band port must not precede the assignment of the IP address Always assign the IP address to the out of band port first and then set the default gateway Example The following example defines an ip default gateway Console config ip default gateway 192 168 1 1 5 10 4 show ip interface The show ip interface user EXEC command displays the usability status of interfaces configured for IP Syntax show ip interface ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number ethernet interface number Ethernet port number vlan vian id VLAN number port channel number Port channel number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays VLAN 1 configuration Console show ip interface vian 1 233 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 10 5 arp The arp global configuration command adds a permanent entry in the Address Resolution Protocol ARP cache To remove an entry from the ARP cache use the no form of this command Syntax arp io_addr hw_addr ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channe
354. the Switch make sure you had connected the supplied RS 232 serial cable to the RS 232 port at the front panel of your WGSW 24010 Switch and your PC 5 1 Connect to PC s RS 232 serial port Hyper Terminal In Windows 98 2000 XP launch HyperTerminal create a new connection and adjust settings as below Baud per second 38400 Data bits 8 Parity None Stop bits 1 7 Flow Control None COM Properties E x Port Settings Bits per second jseq00 o Data bits a y Parity None Stop bits hr Flow control i Restore Defaults 5 2 Using the CLI 5 2 1 CLI Command Modes 153 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 The Command Line Interface CLI syntax conventions and terminology are described in this section Each CLI command is illustrated using the structure outlined below Introduction To assist in configuring devices the CLI command line interface is divided into different command modes Each command mode has its own set of specific commands Entering a question mark at the system prompt console prompt displays a list of commands available for that particular command mode From each mode a specific command is used to navigate from one command mode to another The standard order to access the modes is as follows User EXEC mode Privileged EXEC mode Global Configuration mode and Interface Configuration mode The following figure illustrates the command mode access p
355. the network If the ip address dhcp command is used with or without the optional keyword the DHCP option 12 field host name option is included in the DISCOVER message By default the specified DHCP host name is the device globally configured host name When the device is reset the DHCP command is saved in the configuration file but the IP address is not It is recommended not to define a DHCP address on an inband port or LAG If a DHCP IP address is configured this address is dynamically retrieved and the ip address dhcp command is saved in the configuration file In the event of a master failure the backup will again attempt to retrieve a DHCP address This could result in one of the following The same IP address may be assigned Adifferent IP address may be assigned which could result in loss of connectivity to the management station The DHCP server may be down which would result in IP address retrieval failure and possible loss of connectivity to the management station Example The following example acquires an IP address from DHCP Console config interface vlan 1 Console config if ip address dhcp 5 10 3 ip default gateway The ip default gateway command defines a default gateway router To remove the default gateway use the no form of this command Syntax ip default gateway ip address no ip default gateway p address Valid IP address that specifies the IP address of the default ga
356. tity frame However if during bootup the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame from the switch the client can initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL start frame which prompts the switch to request the client s identity If 802 1X is not enabled or supported on the network access device any EAPOL frames from the client are dropped If the client does not receive an EAP request identity frame after three attempts S Notice to start authentication the client transmits frames as if the port is in the authorized state A port in the authorized state effectively means that the client has been successfully authenticated When the client supplies its identity the switch begins its role as the intermediary passing EAP frames between the client and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails If the authentication succeeds the switch port becomes authorized The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method being used Following screen shows a message exchange initiated by the client using the One Time Password OTP authentication method with a RADIUS server 81 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Authentication Client SES 607 1 Switch RADIUS a EAPOL Start FAP Request Identity FAP Response Identity RADIUS Access Request EAP Request OTP RADIUS Access Challenge EAP Response OTP RADIUS Access Request EAP Success RADIUS Access Accept Fort
357. to be defined ACLs can be added only if the ACL is not bound to an interface CEN memos Setup Port Config VLAN Config Statistics ACL Security QoS Spanning Tree Multicast SNMP Admin LogOut MAC based ACL OACL Name Select an ACL New ACL Name Delete ACL Action Permit v Source MAC Address Wild Card Mask Dest MAC Address wild Card Mask LAN ID Ether Type Action Source Destination LAN ID Ethertype Address Address Delete v Save Config M Cancel Config Figure 4 26 MAC Base ACL screen The Page contains the following fields 70 e ACL Name e New ACL Name e Delete ACL e Action e Source MAC Address e Wildcard Mask e Dest MAC Address e VLAN ID e Ether Type User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Displays the user defined MAC based ACLs Specifies a new user defined MAC based ACL name By which deletes the selected ACL Indicates the ACL forwarding action Possible field values are e Permit by which forwards packets which meet the ACL criteria e Deny drops packets which meet the ACL criteria e Shutdown where drops packet that meet the ACL criteria and disables the port to which the packet was addressed Matches the source MAC address to which packets are addressed to the ACE Defines the source IP address wildcard mask Wildcard masks specify which bits are used and ignored A wild card mask of 255 255 255 255
358. tring Owner The entity that configured this event Last time sent The time this entry last generated an event If this entry has not generated any events this value is zero 5 19 10 show rmon log The show rmon log user EXEC command displays the RMON logging table Syntax show rmon log evenf event Event index Range 0 65535 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the RMON logging table Console show rmon log Maximum table size 500 Description Errors Jan 18 2002 23 48 19 Errors Jan 18 2002 23 58 17 High Broadcast Jan 18 2002 23 59 48 Console show rmon log Maximum table size 500 800 after reset Description 286 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Errors Jan 18 2002 23 48 19 Errors Jan 18 2002 23 58 17 High Broadcast Jan 18 2002 23 59 48 The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Event An index that uniquely identifies the event Description A comment describing this event Time The time this entry created 5 19 11 rmon table size The rmon table size global configuration command configures the maximum RMON tables sizes To return to the default configuration use the no form of this command Syntax rmon table size history entries log entries n
359. ts e Broadcast Packets Displays the number of good Broadcast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed This number does not include Multicast packets e Multicast Packets Displays the number of good Multicast packets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed e CRC Align Errors Which displays the number of CRC and Align errors that have occurred on the interface since the device was last refreshed 54 e Undersize Packets e Oversize Packets e Fragments e Jabbers 4 5 3 RMON Alarm User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Displays the number of undersized packets less than 64 octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the number of oversized packets over 1518 octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the number of fragments packets with less than 64 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets received on the interface since the device was last refreshed Displays the total number of received packets that were longer than 1518 octets This number excludes frame bits but includes FCS octets that had either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral octet Alignment Error number The field range to detect jabbers is between 20 ms and 150 ms The RMON Alarm screen see figure 4 19 contains fields for setting network alar
360. ts the Root 2 Note Bridge and the Designated Bridges On the port level STP sets the Root Port and the Designated Ports The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the switch level Parameter Bridge Identifier Not user configurable except by setting priority below Priority Description Default Value A combination of the User set priority and 32768 MAC the switch s MAC address The Bridge Identifier consists of two parts a 16 bit priority and a 48 bit Ethernet MAC address 32768 MAC A relative priority for each switch lower 32768 numbers give a higher priority and a greater 102 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 chance of a given switch being elected as the root bridge Hello Time The length of time between broadcasts of 2 seconds the hello message by the switch Maximum Age Timer Measures the age of a received BPDU fora 20 seconds port and ensures that the BPDU is discarded when its age exceeds the value of the maximum age timer Forward Delay Timer The amount time spent by a port in the 15 seconds learning and listening states waiting for a BPDU that may return the port to the blocking state The following are the user configurable STP parameters for the port or port group level Variable Description Default Value Port Priority A relative priority for each 32768 port lower numbers give a higher priority and a greater chance of a given port being elected as the roo
361. uld be defined on the interface Use the priority queue out num of queues command to globally configure a queue as WRR or Strict Priority Use this command to set a weight per interface The ratio will be like this The ratio for each queue is defined by the queue weight divided by the sum of all queue weights i e the normalized weight This actually sets the bandwidth allocation of each queue A weight of 0 means no bandwidth is allocated for the same queue and the share bandwidth is divided among the remaining queues All eight queues are participating excluding the queues that are assigned as expedite queues The weights of these queues are ignored in the ratio calculation All eight queues participate in the WRR exclude the expedite queues in which case the corresponded weight is ignored not used in the ratio calculation The expedite queue is a priority queue and it is serviced until empty before the other queues are serviced Use the priority queue out num of queues command to globally configure a queue as WRR or Strict Priority Use this command to set a weight per interface Example The following example sets queue weights as follows Queue 1 6 36 Queue 2 6 36 Queue 3 6 36 Queue 4 6 36 259 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Queue 5 6 36 Queue 6 6 36 Queue 7 6 36 Queue 8 6 36 Console config if wrr queue bandwidth 66666666 5 17 5 priority queue out num
362. umber Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example all classes of entries in the port lock status are displayed console show ports security Port status Learning Action Maximum Trap Frequency Disabled Lock Disabled Lock Disabled Lock Disabled Lock 182 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Disabled Lock Disabled Lock Disabled Lock Disabled Lock 5 5 Clock Commands 5 5 1 clock set The clock set privileged EXEC command manually sets the system clock Syntax clock set hh mm ss day month year or clock set hh mm ss month day year hh mm ss Current time in hours military format minutes and seconds 0 23 mm O 59 ss O 59 day Current day by date in the month 1 31 month Current month using the first three letters by name Jan Dec year Current year 2000 2097 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example sets the system time to 13 32 00 on the 7th March 2005 console clock set 13 32 00 7 Mar 2005 5 5 2 clock source The clock source Privileged EXEC command configures an external time source for the system clock 183
363. up e SNMPv3 defined for the group Defines the security level attached to the group Security levels apply to SNMPv3 only The possible field values are e No Authentication which indicates that neither the Authentication nor the Privacy security levels are assigned to the group e Authentication which authenticates SNMP messages and ensures the SNMP messages original is authenticated Where encrypts SNMP messages Defines the group access rights The possible field values are e Read The management access is restricted to read only and changes cannot be made to the assigned SNMP view 128 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 e Write The management access is read write and changes can be made to the assigned SNMP view e Notify Sends traps for the assigned SNMP view 4 11 4 Group Membership The Group Membership screen see figure 4 62 provides information for assigning SNMP access control privileges to SNMP groups Log Table Group Membership User Name Engine ID Local Remote es Group Name viv2SuperGroup vw Authentication Method None v Password Authentication Key Privacy Key Add to List User Name Engine ID Group Name Authentication Method Save Config Cancel Config Figure 4 62 Group Membership The page contains the following fields e User name e Engine ID e Group Name e Authentication By which provides a user defined local user list Indica
364. uration By default this setting is disabled for example forwarding to the port is not forbidden Command Mode Interface Configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines IGMP snooping dynamically discovers multicast router ports When a multicast router port is discovered all the multicast packets are forwarded to it unconditionally This command prevents a port to be a multicast router port Example In this example forwarding all multicast packets to e6 are forbidden console config interface vlan 2 console config if bridge multicast forbidden forward all add ethernet e6 5 4 9 bridge aging time The bridge aging time global configuration command sets the address table aging time To restore the default use the no form of the bridge aging time command Syntax bridge aging time seconds no bridge aging time seconds Time is number of seconds Range 10 630 seconds Default Configuration 300 seconds 175 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example In this example the bridge aging time is set to 250 console config bridge aging time 250 5 4 10 clear bridge The clear bridge privileged EXEC command removes any learned entries from the forwarding database Syntax clear bridge This command has no keywords or arguments Default Configuration This command has
365. ut including FCS octets and otherwise well formed The total number of packets received less than 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error The total number of packets received longer than 1518 octets excluding framing bits but including FCS octets and either a bad Frame Check Sequence FCS with an integral number of octets FCS Error or a bad FCS with a non integral number of octets Alignment Error The best estimate of the total number of collisions on this Ethernet segment The total number of packets including bad packets received that are 64 octets in length excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 65 and 127 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 128 and 255 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 256 and 511 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bits but including FCS octets The total number of packets including bad packets received that are between 512 and1023 octets in length inclusive excluding framing bit
366. ut of band eth oob interface service service permit ip source p address mask mask prefix length ethernet interface number vlan vian id port channel number out of band eth oob interface service service ethernet interface number A valid Ethernet port number vlan vian id A valid VLAN number port channel number A valid port channel number p address Source IP address Range Valid IP Address mask mask Specifies the network mask of the source IP address Range Valid subnet mask mask prefix length Specifies the number of bits that comprise the source IP address prefix The prefix length must be preceded by a forward slash Range 0 32 service service Indicates service type Can be one of the following telnet ssh http https or snmp out of band eth oob interface Out of band ethernet port number Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Management Access list Configuration mode User Guidelines Rules with Ethernet VLAN and port channel parameters are valid only if an IP address is defined on the appropriate interface The system supports up to 256 management access rules Example The following example shows how all ports are permitted in the access list called mlist Console config management access list mlist Console config macl permit 5 13 3 deny management The deny management access li
367. ved Transmitted Join Empty 0 Empty 54 Leave Empty 0 Join In 0 Leave In 0 Leave All 54 Ss RA Nr ja re Dd rs td rm GYRP Error Statistics Invalid Protocol ID Invalid Attribute Type Invalid Attribute Yalue Invalid Attribute Length Invalid Event o Jl re JA IS re Pr Clear All Counters v Figure 4 24 GVRP Statistics screen The following fields are relevant for both tables s interace Specifies the interface type for which the statistics are displayed e Port indicates port statistics are displayed e LAG indicates LAG statistics are displayed o Refresh Rate Indicates the amount of time that passes before the GVRP statistics are refreshed The possible field values are e No Refresh indicates that the GVRP statistics are not refreshed e 15 Sec which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 15 seconds e 30 Sec which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 30 seconds e 60 Sec which indicates that the GVRP statistics are refreshed every 60 seconds The GVRP Statistics Table contains the following fields e Join Empty Which displays the device GVRP Join Empty statistics e Empty Displays the device GVRP Empty statistics 62 e Leave Empty e Join In e Leave In e Leave All User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 By which displays the device GVRP Leave Empty statistics By which displays the device GVRP Join In statistics By which displays the device GVRP Leave in
368. verity level so that they are logged to a syslog server with an IP address 10 1 1 1 Console config logging 10 1 1 1 severity critical 5 24 3 logging console The logging console global configuration command limits messages logged to the console based on severity To disable logging to the console terminal use the no form of this command Syntax logging console evel no logging console level Limits the logging of messages displayed on the console to a specified level emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational debugging Default Configuration The default is informational Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example limits messages logged to the console based on severity level errors Console config logging console errors 326 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 5 24 4 logging buffered The logging buffered global configuration command limits syslog messages displayed from an internal buffer based on severity To cancel the buffer use use the no form of this command Syntax logging buffered evel no logging buffered level Limits the message logging to a specified level buffer emergencies alerts critical errors warnings notifications informational debugging Default Configuration The default level is informational Command Mode
369. vlan 19 Console config if name Marketing 5 27 7 switchport mode The switchport mode interface configuration command configures the VLAN membership mode of a port To reset the mode to the appropriate default for the device use the no form of this command 347 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Syntax switchport mode access trunk general no switchport mode access Port belongs to a single untagged VLAN trunk Port belongs to 1 4063 VLANs all tagged except optionally for a single native VLAN general Port belongs to 1 4063 VLANs and each VLAN is explicitly set by the user as tagged or untagged full 802 1Q mode Default Configuration All ports are in access mode and belong to the default VLAN whose VID 1 Command Mode Interface Configuration Ethernet port channel mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures e8 as an untagged layer 2 VLAN interface Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if switchport mode access 5 27 8 switchport access vian The switchport access vlan interface configuration command configures the VLAN ID when the interface is in access mode To reconfigure the default use the no form of this command Syntax switchport access vlan vian id no switchport access vlan vian id VLAN ID of the VLAN to which the port is configured Default Co
370. w privilege user EXEC command displays the current privilege level Syntax show privilege Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC command mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the current privilege level Console show privilege 343 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Current privilege level is 15 5 27 VLAN Commands 5 27 1 vlan database The vlan database global configuration command enters the VLAN configuration mode Syntax vlan database Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example enters the VLAN database mode Console config vlan database Console config vian 5 27 2 vlan Use the vlan interface configuration VLAN command to create a VLAN To delete a VLAN use the no form of this command Syntax vlan vlan range no vlan v an range vian range A list of valid VLAN IDs to be added List separate non consecutive VLAN IDs separated by commas without spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of IDs Range 2 4063 344 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode VLAN Database mode
371. warding of unregistered multicast packets remove Don t force forwarding of unregistered multicast packets interface list Separate nonconsecutive Ethernet ports with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of ports Range Valid Ethernet port port channel number list Separate nonconsecutive port channels with a comma and no spaces use a hyphen to designate a range of port channels Range Valid Port channel number 172 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration Forward Command Modes Interface configuration VLAN mode User Guidelines If routers exist on the VLAN do not change the unregistered multicast addresses state to drop on the routers ports Examples This example enables forwarding unregistered multicast addresses within VLAN 8 console config interface vian 8 console config if bridge multicast forward unregistered add ethernet 1 9 5 4 6 bridge multicast forbidden forward unregistered The bridge multicast forbidden forward unregistered interface configuration command forbids a port to be a Forwarding unregistered multicast addresses port Use the no form of this command to return to default Syntax bridge multicast forbidden forward unregistered add remove ethernet nterface list port channel portchannel number list no bridge multicast forbidden forward unregistered add Forbid forwarding unregistered multicast
372. work management messages and must return to the blocking state first A port transitions from one state to another as follows From initialization Switch boot to blocking From blocking to listening or to disabled From listening to learning or to disabled From learning to forwarding or to disabled From forwarding to disabled From disabled to blocking 101 Switch Blocking Listening Learning User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Disable d s 4 L Forwarding STP Port State Transitions You can modify each port state by using management software When you enable STP every port on every switch in the network goes through the blocking state and then transitions through the states of listening and learning at power up If properly configured each port stabilizes to the forwarding or blocking state No packets except BPDUs are forwarded from or received by STP enabled ports until the forwarding state is enabled for that port 2 STP Parameters STP Operation Levels The Switch allows for two levels of operation the switch level and the port level The switch level forms a spanning tree consisting of links between one or more switches The port level constructs a spanning tree consisting of groups of one or more ports The STP operates in much the same way for both levels On the switch level STP calculates the Bridge Identifier for each switch and then se
373. x is the privilege level Tacacs Uses the list of all TACACS servers for authentication Uses username Senabx Where x is the privilege level Default Configuration If the default list is not set only the enable password is checked This has the same effect as the command aaa authentication enable default enable On the console the enable password is used if it exists If no password is set the process still succeeds This has the same effect as using the command aaa authentication enable default enable none Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines The default and optional list names created with the aaa authentication enable command are used with the enable authentication command Create a list by entering the aaa authentication enable ist name method command where list name is any character string used to name this list The method argument identifies the list of methods that the authentication algorithm tries in the given sequence The additional methods of authentication are used only if the previous method returns an error not if it fails To ensure that the authentication succeeds even if all methods return an error specify none as the final method in the command line All aaa authentication enable default requests sent by the router to a RADIUS server include the username Senabx where x is the requested privilege level Example The following example sets authentication when acces
374. xample enters the context of port channel number 1 Console config interface port channel 1 5 15 2 interface range port channel The interface range port channel global configuration command enters the interface configuration mode to configure multiple port channels Syntax interface range port channel port channel range all port channel range List of port channels to configure Separate non consecutive port channels with a comma and no spaces A hyphen designates a range of port channels all All the channel ports Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Commands under the interface range context are executed independently on each interface in the range If the command returns an error on one of the interfaces it stops the execution of the command on subsequent interfaces Example The following example shows how port channels 1 2 and 8 are grouped to receive the same command Console config interface range port channel 1 2 Console config if 5 15 3 channel group The channel group interface configuration command associates a port with a port channel To remove a port from a port channel use the no form of this command Syntax channel group port channel number mode on auto no channel group port channel_number Specifies the number of the valid port channel for the current port to joi
375. y 5 13 4 management access class The management access class global configuration command defines which management access list is used To disable restriction use the no form of this command Syntax management access class console only name no management access class name Name of the access list If unspecified defaults to an empty access list Range Valid name console only The device can be managed only from the console Default Configuration This command has no default configuration 245 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example configures an access list called mlist as the management access list Console config management access class mlist 5 13 5 show management access list The show management access list privileged EXEC command displays management access lists Syntax show management access list name name Name of the access list If unspecified defaults to an empty access list Range Valid name Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays the active management access list Console show management access list permit ethernet g1 permit ethernet g9
376. y statistics group on port e8 with the index number 1 and a polling interval period of 2400 seconds Console config interface ethernet e8 Console config if rmon collection history 1 interval 2400 5 19 3 show rmon collection history The show rmon collection history user EXEC command displays the requested history group configuration Syntax show rmon collection history ethernet interface port channel port channel number interface Valid Ethernet port port channel number Valid port channel trunk index 2176 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode User EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command Example The following example displays all RMON group statistics Console show rmon collection history Index Interface Interval Requested Granted Samples The following table describes the significant fields shown in the display Field Description Index An index that uniquely identifies the entry Interface The sampled Ethernet interface Interval The interval in seconds between samples Requested Samples The requested number of samples to be saved Granted Samples The granted number of samples to be saved Owner The entity that configured this entry 5 19 4 show rmon history The show rmon history user EXEC command displays RMON Ethernet Statistics history Syntax s
377. ypted no username name The name of the user password The authentication password for the user from 1 to 159 characters in length level The user level Range 1 15 encrypted Encrypted password entered copied from another device configuration Default Configuration The default privilege level is 1 Command Mode Global Configuration mode User Guidelines Up to 30 users can be defined on the device Example The following example configures user bob with the password lee and user level 15 to the system console config username bob password lee level 15 5 3 11 show users accounts The show users accounts privileged EXEC command displays information about the local user database Syntax show users accounts Default Configuration This command has no default configuration Command Mode Privileged EXEC mode User Guidelines There are no user guidelines for this command 168 User s Manual of WGSD 1022 WGSD 8000 Example The following example displays the local users configured with access to the system console config show users accounts Username Privilege 5 4 Address Table Commands 5 4 1 bridge address The bridge address VLAN interface configuration command adds a static MAC layer station source address to the bridge table To delete the MAC address use the no form of the bridge address command using the no form of the command without specifying

Planet Technology WGSD-1022 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents